                                  __|__|__<LF>          GGGGGGGGG      __|__|__<LF>          G                          |    |<LF>          G<LF>          G         GGGG    <LF>          G               G<LF>           GGGGGGGGG
                               __|__|__<LF>         FFFFFFFFF       __|__|__  <LF>         F                         |    |<LF>         FFFFFF<LF>         F<LF>         F<LF>     
                               __|__|__<LF>        DDDDDD           __|__|__  <LF>        D            D           |    |<LF>        D              D   <LF>        D                D<LF>        D               D<LF>        D             D<LF>        DDDDDD
                           __|__|__<LF>                    A     __|__|__<LF>                  A   A     |     |<LF>                A       A<LF>              AAAAAAA     <LF>            A               A<LF>           A                  A
                         _|__|_<LF>      CCCCCCC     _|__|_<LF>      C                   |    |<LF>      C<LF>      C<LF>      CCCCCCC
        This piece of code sets up a blue event that is triggered when the touch        sensor is touched and released. The Monitor Event icon begins monitoring        for such an event to occur. A sound will be played over and over again until        the touch sensor is pushed in and released.. This will force the program        out of the jump sequence and make it land where the Event Landing is located.  
       DDDDDD<LF>       D             D<LF>       D               D<LF>       D                D<LF>       D               D<LF>       D              D<LF>       DDDDDD
  Hints: This command sets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is pressed        and released. The default waits for a touch sensor pressed connected to        port one. This command must appear before the Begin Monitoring command in        your program. You can string in a yellow, blue, red, or generic modifier        to have several events. You can also string in an event source, source of        information, such as sensor values of ports 1, 2, &amp; 3, container values,        or mail values.   
  Measurement Type
  Set the container to a random value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to a random <LF>number between 0 and 8.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Max random number: String in a number to be the <LF>maximum random number to set the container to.
  This VI calculates the position of the rotation center of the needle and the bow covered by the extremity of the needle. This VI has first to be used in a calibration phase.<LF>This Vi is working with vu-meters equipped with a dark needle an a clear background or with a clear needle on a dark background.<LF><LF>Description :<LF><LF>Inputs :<LF><LF>-  Image is the reference of the image to be treated.<LF>-  ROI Descriptor is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user and corresponding to 2 lines corresponding to the initial position of the needle and the full scale position of the needle (the origin of each line must be the extremity of the needle). It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQ Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI Cvi WindGetRoi.<LF>-  error in is LabVIEW cluster error.<LF><LF>Outputs :<LF><LF>-  Center is a cluster containing the coordinates of the rotation center of the needle.<LF>-  Circle Points is an array of clusters containing the coordinates of the points of the bow curved by the extremity of the needle.<LF>-  error out is LabVIEW cluster error.
  This VI is used to calibrate the meter or gauge using three points on the meter: (i) the base of the needle, (ii) the tip of the needle at its initial point and (iii) the tip of the needle at its full scale position.It calculates the position of the points of the arc covered by the tip of the needle.<LF>This Vi is working with vu-meters equipped with a dark needle on a light background or with a light needle on a dark background.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image containing the meter.<LF><LF>- 	Needle Base is a cluster containing the coordinates of the base of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Initial Point is a point cluster containing the coordinates of the tip of the needle in its initial position.<LF><LF>- 	Range Point is a point cluster containing the coordinates of the tip of the needle in full scale position.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Center out is a point cluster containing the coordinates of the rotation center of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Circle Points is an array of point clusters containing the coordinates of the points of the bow curved by the extremity of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
 (all FALSE: do not change)
 Angle (deg) 
 Coordinate Angle (rad) 
 End (dB is << or = )
 Position 
 TaskFlags (0-1)
 Tells whether the event is in the low, normal or high state depending on the set thresholds. The eventstate may also be undefined or calibrating.<LF>0 == Low<LF>1 == Normal<LF>2 == High<LF>3 == Undefined<LF>4 == Start calibrating<LF>5 == Calibrating in process
 error 
 then<LF>Off (Float)<LF>Off (Brake)<LF>On<LF>Forward<LF>Flip<LF>Backward<LF>to <LF> - slope: %d<LF>No such command
""Ask RCX""
% Tolerance
(0: do not change)
(1st line)
(2nd line)
(32 bits flat pointer)
([[sgl]]) scaled data: a two-dimensional array that contains scaled analog input data if output units requests scaled data.  The first dimension is scans, the second dimension is channels.
(if needed ex: /home/m/p/mportsmo/)
- Column<LF>- Row
- Nand<CR>- And
- Nor<CR>- Or
- Row<LF>- Column
- Set<LF>- Get
- T: Show<LF>- F: Hide
- True<LF>- False
- Xnor<CR>- Xor
- Yes<CR>- No
- Yes<LF>- No
- high pass (T)<LF>- low pass (F)
-Set<LF>-Get
-Yes<LF>-No
1 Blink detected (a blink time can be set up)
1 bit
1,2, or 3
1/16ths
1/16ths of a Rotation
10 ms Timer (0-3)
10 ms timers (0,1,2)
10-Oct-96
12 bits (unsigned)
16 bit data
16 bits
16 bits (RGB chunky)
16 bits (signed)
16 bits (unsigned)
1D Color value array
1D U32 array
1st Diagonal
2 Blinks detected
2 bits
24 bits (RGB chunky)
24 bits (RGB planar)
24-Bit Color Table
2D Color value array
2D U32 array
2nd Derivatives
2nd Diagonal
32 Bits ?
32 bits (RGB chunky)
32 bits (float)
32 bits (signed)
32 bits (unsigned)
3D Options:<LF>Complex source image:<LF> 0: real plane<LF> 1: imaginary plane<LF> 2: magnitude plane<LF> 3: phase plane
3D options
3rd Party Sensor
3rd Party Sensor 2
4 bits
48 bits (Complex 2x24 int)
64 bits (Complex 2x32 float)
8 bits
<<B>>buffer size<</B>> is the size of the internal buffer that LabVIEW uses to transfer data from a device.
<<B>>elements<</B>> is an array of elements that are in the queue. If <<B>>return elements<</B>> is FALSE, this array is empty. 
<<B>>left channel <</B>>controls the volume for the left channel.
<<B>>queue element<</B>> contains the element removed from the queue. 
<LF>                                                          SPINNER<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>Design and test a scientific instrument that is able to measure the rotations of something spinning.  We will then be able to use this instrument to measure the rotations of things such as a pinwheel, waterwheel, or hamster wheel.<LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>We think that the best way to make something to measure rotations is with a light sensor.  We will make something that spins, called the spinner, that has a light side and a dark side.<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>Construction -<LF>We used a piece of a notebook cover, white-out, and a black marker to make a paper wheel for our spinner.  We then put an axle through the center of the spinner and secured it on with bushings.  Lastly, we mounted a light sensor in front of the paper wheel and the spinner was complete. <LF>Testing -<LF>We tested the spinner by measuring the speed of the motor, which is supposed to be 350 revolutions per minute.  We also compared the rotations measured by the spinner to the LEGO angle sensor.<LF><LF>Results:<LF>Our spinner works very well.  We will be able to use it in the next experiment.<LF><LF>
<LF>                                                      DOORWAY<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>The goal of this project is to count the number of people passing through the doorway.  <LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>We think that by mounting a light sensor near the doorway, we will be able to tell how many people walked through the door:<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>We taped the light sensor to the doorway and connected it to a long wire which went to the RCX.  We wrote a program to collect light sensor data and then looked at the changes in light.<LF><LF>Results:<LF>We were able to see if someone passed in front of the light sensor.  Our experiment is unable to tell if someone was coming into the room or leaving the room.<LF><LF>Conclusions:<LF>Our experiment was very successful.  We were able to count the number of people coming in and out of the room.  Next we want to make an experiment that will be able to tell if someone is leaving or entering the room.  We are not sure how to do that yet.  We also want to make the RCX beep and turn on the lights when someone enters.
<LF>                                              REACTION TIME<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>The goal of this project it to measure how fast a person can hit a touch sensor after a light comes on. <LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>Our group thinks that our reaction times will be around one second.<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>Someone holds the touch sensor in one hand and watches the lamp (or motor).  <LF>When the lamp comes on, the person has to press the touch sensor as quick as they can.<LF><LF>Results:<LF>Typical speeds are in the tenths of seconds.  The average reaction time was 0.5 seconds for 10 tries.  Next we will try comparing who in our group has the quickest reaction time.  Since the RCX only samples the sensors every 0.03 seconds at the fastest, we think that our numbers could be off by at least +/- 0.03 seconds.<LF><LF>Conclusions:<LF>The reacion times that we measured were much quicker than we thought!  We should also test reaction times of people that are being distracted too.  We think that the reaction time will increase if you are distracted.<LF>
<LF>                                    OVERNIGHT MEASUREMENTS<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>Take measurements of the light sensor and temperature sensor overnight and compare their values.<LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>The light sensor will see darker and the temperature will get lower overnight.<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>We wrote a program to take light and temperature measurements every minute starting at 11:00 pm on the night of 6/24/99. <LF><LF>Results:<LF>From the data, one can see that the sun rises early in the summer and that although the day will be a warm one, the nights are still cool.<LF><LF>Conclusions:<LF>Our experiement was able to accurately measure the light and temperature overnight.  Next we will try and compare different measurements from different nights and see if there is a difference.
<LF>                    A<LF>                  A   A<LF>                A       A<LF>              AAAAAAA     <LF>            A               A<LF>           A                  A
<LF>          GGGGGGGGG<LF>          G<LF>          G<LF>          G         GGGG    <LF>          G               G<LF>           GGGGGGGGG
<LF>         BBBB<LF>         B       B<LF>         B       B<LF>         BBBBB<LF>         B         B<LF>         B          B<LF>         BBBBBB
<LF>         FFFFFFFFF      <LF>         F                       <LF>         FFFFFF<LF>         F<LF>         F<LF>     
<LF>       EEEEEEEE<LF>       E<LF>       EEEEE<LF>       E<LF>       EEEEEEEE
<LF>      CCCCCCC<LF>      C<LF>      C<LF>      C<LF>      CCCCCCC
<LF>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------<LF>ROBOLABtm Software  Version 2.5<LF>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------<LF>ROBOLABtm the LEGO DACTA icon oriented programming software<LF>used to program the LEGO RCX microcomputer!<LF><LF>Produced and distributed by LEGO DACTA A/S<LF>     DK-7190<LF>     Billund, Denmark<LF><LF>Developed at TUFTS University<LF>     College of Engineering<LF>     Medford, MA USA<LF><LF>Powered by LabVIEW<LF>     National Instruments Corp.<LF>     Austin, TX USA<LF><LF>Graphics designed by Interactive Factory<LF>     Boston, MA<LF><LF>Copyright 2001 The LEGO Group, TUFTS University and<LF>National Instruments Corporation.<LF>All rights reserved.<LF>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------<LF>Developed by Chris Rogers, Merredith Portsmore, Martha Cyr, Scott McNamara, Barbara Bratzel, Ben Erwin and John Osborne, Tufts University, Massachusetts, USA<LF>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<LF>The value of the clock in the RCX (what you see on the display) in minutes since 00:00.
<LF>Variation"><LF>				
<LF>language string"><LF>		
>> Changerate
A 1-byte data value in 'data'.
A 1-dimensional array of 1-byte data that LabVIEW draws as a pixmap in the picture.  The array is made up of a concatenation of rows of data.  Within each row, data is packed into the array of bytes.  Thus if 'bit depth' is 1, each byte represents 8 pixel values, if 'bit depth' is 4, each byte represents 2 pixel values, and if 'bit depth' is 8, each byte represents 1 pixel value.<LF>Each row should be padded to a multiple of two bytes long.
A Controls
A cluster containing the specific font characteristics for the text to draw.  This specification is ignored unless the 'desired font' control is set to 'User-specified Font'.
A cluster containing the upper-left and lower-right coordinates that describe a rectangle bounding the data. The data will be conformed to the width of this rectangle and clipped to the height of this rectangle. All coordinates are absolute.
A number between 1 and 20 to represent the number of the Jumping and Landing pair of commands.
A picture of the page you have chosen.
A secret!
A#
A,B, and/or C
A,B, or C
A/D Converter Settings
A/D Settings
ABS Container
AI Data
AI Data (1D)
AI Data (2D)
AI External Clock
AI Parameters
AI Trig/Clock
AI Trigger
AI channel<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AI channels<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AI scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AI scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT> (10 scans/sec)
AIPD
AND Container
AND the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to AND the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to AND:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ANDed.
AND the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to AND the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to AND:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ANDed.
AO External Clock
AO Parameters
AO Trig/Clock
AO Trigger
AO channel<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AO channels
AO channels<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AO scan rate/ch<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AO scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT>
AO scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT> (10 scans/sec)
AREA
ASCII Character
AUTODETECT
Abort Download
Abort Loading
Abort Waiting
Aborted
Aborted?
About
About LabVIEW...
About ROBOLAB
Acceleration Sensor Container
Accelerometer (g) LogIT
Accelerometer (m/s/s) LogIT
Accelerometer Sensor Fork
Access Control Landing
Action
Activate a motor or a lamp on Port A.
Activate a motor or a lamp on Port B.
Activate a motor or a lamp on Port C.
Activate event
Actual Current Task #
Adagio
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Add
Add Rest
Add Theme
Add a number to the container.<LF>The default is to add 1 to the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to add:  String a number to add to the<LF>container.
Add a number to the container.<LF>The default is to add 1 to the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to add:  String a number to add to the container.
Add to Container
Additional Data Sets
Additional Duration
Additional Events
Additional Octaves
Additional Ports
Adds or inserts an image on the browser. The image is resampled to fit the size of the thumbnail size. The resampling value applied to the image is the same on both axes in order to maintain the image aspect.<LF><LF>The thumbnail will be added at the last position or at the first vacant position depending on the selected mode. If all positions are occupied, an additionnal line of thumbnail images will be added to the browser.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF> 	<LF>- Image to Add  is the image to add or insert in the browser. This image can be of 8,16, float, or RGB type.<LF><LF>- Insertion Mode  is the mode used for inserting the thumbnail. Two modes are available : <LF>1. first vacant position <LF>2. last position.<LF> 	<LF>- Color Palette  is the palette used to show an 8 bit image. If this control is not set, a gray level palette is used.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF> 	<LF>- Index Out is the index of the position where the image is placed on the browser.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the added thumbnail <LF><LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is inserted.<LF> 	<LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Adds or inserts an image on the browser. The image is resampled to fit the size of the thumbnail size. The resampling value applied to the image is the same on both axes in order to maintain the image aspect.<LF><LF>The thumbnail will be added at the last position or at the first vacant position depending on the selected mode. If all positions are occupied, an additionnal line of thumbnail images will be added to the browser.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>- Image to Add  is the image to add or insert in the browser. This image can be of 8,16, float, or RGB type.<LF><LF>- Insertion Mode  is the mode used for inserting the thumbnail. Two modes are available : <LF>1. first vacant position <LF>2. last position.<LF><LF>- Color Palette  is the palette used to show an 8 bit image. If this control is not set, a gray level palette is used.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF> 	<LF>- Index Out is the index of the position where the image is placed on the browser.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the added thumbnail <LF><LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is inserted.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Adds or inserts an image on the browser. The image is resampled to fit the size of the thumbnail size. The resampling value applied to the image is the same on both axes in order to maintain the image aspect.<LF><LF>The thumbnail will be added at the last position or at the first vacant position depending on the selected mode. If all positions are occupied, an additionnal line of thumbnail images will be added to the browser.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>- Image to Add  is the image to add or insert in the browser. This image can be of 8,16, float, or RGB type.<LF><LF>- Insertion Mode  is the mode used for inserting the thumbnail. Two modes are available : <LF>1. first vacant position <LF>2. last position.<LF><LF>- Color Palette  is the palette used to show an 8 bit image. If this control is not set, a gray level palette is used.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF><LF>- Index Out is the index of the position where the image is placed on the browser.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the added thumbnail.<LF> <LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is inserted.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Adds two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Constant is the value added to the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The constant is rounded down in cases in which the image is encoded as an integer. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected.
Adds two images where the first is a complex image, or adds a complex image and a complex constant.<LF>  <LF>Constant is the complex constant added to the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B is the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image. If the image is not a complex image, then the imaginary part of the Image Dst is equal to Image Src A.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) + SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) + Constant.
Admin
Admin button
Administrator
Alarms
Alignment
All Bins
All Data Sets
All Images? (No)
Allegro
Alpha
Amount Filled
Amplitude
Amplitudes
Amusement Park
An RGB color value in 'Color Table'.
An array of RGB colors to which the array of data maps.  If no color table is specified, the LabVIEW color table is used.
An error-management facility for IMAQ Vision that can be programmed to perform specific actions in case of an error.<LF>The previous error code also can be read.<LF><LF>Error Processing: is a number representing the type of error processing you need to use. This value is only used when the Boolean Set Error Condition is set to TRUE. The following values are possible:<LF><LF>  0	Dialog	Displays a Stop/Continue dialog box, to determine<LF>    whether to stop or continue when an error occurs. Dialog is the      <LF>    default value.<LF>   1	Stop	Stops in case of error.<LF>   2	Ignore	Ignores all errors and does not display an error message.<LF>     Set Error Condition rereads the last occurring error (FALSE) or   <LF>     programs a procedure when an error occurs (TRUE). The     <LF>     default value is FALSE.<LF><LF>	Last Error Code: contains the last occurring error code if the Boolean Set Error Condition is set to FALSE. This error code is only accessible once and is reset automatically after reading. <LF><LF>	Last Error Message: contains the message associated with the last error code if the Boolean Set Error Condition is set to FALSE. As in Last Error Code, this error message is accessible only once and is reset automatically after reading<LF><LF>Note:	Error codes returned from the VIs in IMAQ Vision are not accessible directly. If an error occurs, depending on the error condition chosen (Dialog, Stop, or Ignore), a programmed action is taken. The reading of the last occurring error then is reset.
Analog  LogIT
Analyze Area
Analyze Page
And
And/Nand (And)
Andante
Angle
Angle (deg)
Angle (degrees)
Angle (rad)
Angle Container
Angles (deg)
Angles (rad)
Applies a lookup table (LUT) to each color plane.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Dst (RGB) is the reference to the destination image. If connected, it must be an RGB-chunky image..<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Lookup Table is the LUT applied to the first color plane (depending on the Color Mode). This array can contain a maximum of 256 elements. The array is filled automatically when less than 256 elements are specified. This procedure does not change pixel values that are not explicitly specified from the values of the LUT given by the user on input. By default this array is empty and no replacement occurs on this plane. <LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Lookup Table is the LUT applied to the second color plane (depending on the Color Mode). This array can contain a maximum of 256 elements. The array is filled automatically when less than 256 elements are specified. This procedure does not change pixel values that are not explicitly specified from the values of the LUT given by the user on input. By default this array is empty and no replacement occurs on this plane. <LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Lookup Table is the LUT applied to the third color plane (depending on the Color Mode). This array can contain a maximum of 256 elements. The array is filled automatically when less than 256 elements are specified. This procedure does not change pixel values that are not explicitly specified from the values of the LUT given by the user on input. By default this array is empty and no replacement occurs on this plane. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out (RGB) is the reference to the output RGB image that is obtained by applying the color LUT to the source image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Applies a multi-threshold to an image. <LF>    	  <LF>Threshold Data is an array of clusters specifying the mode and threshold range. This operation is analogous to the process in IMAQ Threshold. Each cluster is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF> Lower value is the lowest pixel value used during a threshold. The  <LF> default is 128.<LF>	Upper value (default 255) is the highest pixel value used during a  <LF> threshold. The default is 128.<LF>	<LF>  All pixels not contained between the two values Lower value and  <LF>  Upper value are set to 0. All values found between this range are  <LF>  replaced by the value entered in Replace Value, if Keep/<LF>  ReplaceValue (Replace) is set to TRUE.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The threshold operations are performed in the order that the data is received from Threshold Data. A pixel can be taken into account only once, even if the pixel is included in the threshold range of two different thresholds by Threshold Data.<LF><LF>For example, a VI contains two clusters on input:<LF><LF>Cluster 1	Lower value =  80, Upper value = 150, Keep/Replace Value = TRUE, Replace Value = 255.<LF>Cluster 2	Lower value = 120, Upper value = 200, Keep/Replace Value = FALSE.<LF>This example shows two threshold ranges with an overlap between 120 and 150. Therefore, the pixels between 120 and 150 are treated only by the first threshold. The following results occur after execution of this VI:<LF><LF>·	Pixel values between 0 and 79 are replaced by 0<LF><LF>·	Pixel values between 80 and 150 are replaced by 255<LF><LF>·	Pixel values between 151 and 200 keep their original values<LF><LF>·	Pixel values greater than 200 are set to 0
Applies a threshold to an image.<LF>    	    <LF>Keep/Replace Value (Replace) determines whether the pixels existing in the range between Lower value and Upper value are to be replaced by another value. The default TRUE replaces these pixel values and the status FALSE keeps the original values. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Range is a cluster specifying the threshold range. It is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF> Lower value is the lowest pixel value used during a threshold. The  <LF> default is 128.<LF> <LF>	Upper value is the highest pixel value used during a threshold. The  <LF> default is 255.<LF><LF>All pixels not contained between the two values Lower value and Upper value are set to 0. All values found between this range are replaced by the value entered in Replace Value, if Keep/ReplaceValue (Replace) is set to TRUE.<LF><LF>Replace Value is the value used to replace pixels between the Lower value and Upper value. This operation requires that Keep/Replace Value (Replace) be set to TRUE. <LF><LF>Note:	You should use a binary palette when you plan to visualize an image to which a threshold has been applied in Replace mode. However, which palette to use for visualization depends on the value of Replace Value. For example, the visualization of a threshold image could be performed with a gray palette. However, in this case it is advised that you use a replacement value of 255 (white) to see the threshold image better.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Applies a threshold to the three planes of an RGB-chunky image and places the result into an 8-bit image. A test is performed with each range (Red (or Hue) Range, Green (or Sat) Range, and Blue (or Light or Val) Range), to determine whether the corresponding pixel from the Image Src is set to the value specified in Replace Value. If a pixel from the Image Src does not have corresponding pixel values specified in all three ranges, then the corresponding pixel in Image Dst Out is set to 0. <LF><LF>Note:	By default the pixels in the Image Dst Out take the new value specified by ReplaceValue as all three ranges are set for 0 to 255. Therefore you easily can apply a threshold to one of the three ranges without having to set the values of the other two ranges. <LF><LF>Replace Value specifies the value applied to the destination image when the corresponding pixel from the Image Src is found in all three ranges. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to the image to threshold. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Dst must be connected and must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Range is a cluster used to determine the thresholding range for the red or hue plane (depending on the Color Mode). Any pixel values not included in this range are reset to zero in the destination image. The pixel values included in this range are altered depending on the status of the Replace input. By default, all pixel values are included (0, 255).<LF><LF>Lower Value is the minimal pixel value in the red or hue plane that is used for the threshold. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Upper Value is the maximal pixel value in the red or hue plane that is used for the threshold. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Range is a cluster used to determine the thresholding range for the green or saturation plane (depending on the Color Mode). Any pixel values not included in this range are reset to zero in the destination image. The pixel values included in this range are altered depending on the status of the Replace input. By default, all pixel values are included (0, 255). Green (or Sat) Range has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Range.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Range is a cluster used to determine the thresholding range for the blue, lightness, or value plane (depending on the Color Mode). Any pixel values not included in this range are reset to zero in the destination image. The pixel values included in this range are altered depending on the status of the Replace input. By default, all pixel values are included (0, 255). Blue (or Light or Val) Range has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Range.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Applies an automatic binary threshold to an image that initially possesses 256 gray levels in two classes. Performs a statistical calculation to determine the optimal threshold.<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Method is the threshold method used. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>  0	clustering<LF>  1	entropy<LF>  2	metric<LF>  3	moments<LF>  4	inter-class variance<LF>Note:	See the Thresholding section of Chapter 7, Morphology Analysis, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about these methods.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Threshold Value outputs the threshold value. This value can be directly connected to Lower value from IMAQ Threshold, provided that 255 is connected to Upper value.<LF><LF>Lookup Table outputs a lookup table containing 256 elements encoded in 0 and 1. If the threshold value is 160 then the values between 0 and 159 become zero and the values between 160 and 255 become 1. This array can be used directly by IMAQ UserLookup. <LF><LF>Threshold Data outputs an array containing two clusters compatible with IMAQ MultiThreshold. The elements in this array define a set of intervals equivalent to the LUT outputted by Lookup Table.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The VI outputs the threshold data in three forms:<LF><LF>·	The threshold data directly (Threshold Value)<LF><LF>·	An LUT directly usable by IMAQ UserLookup<LF><LF>·	An array directly usable by IMAQ MultiThreshold (Threshold Data)
Applies an automatic multi-threshold by using a variant of the classification by clustering method. Starting from a random sort, the gray scale values are determined. This technique is rapid.<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Number of Classes is the number of desired phases. This algorithm uses a clustering method and can use any value between 2 and 256. The default is 2.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Lookup Table is an array containing the values of the 256 transformed elements encoded between 0 and the (n – 1), where n is the Number of Classes. This array can be connected directly to IMAQ UserLookup. <LF><LF>Threshold Data outputs an array containing the Number of Classes compatible with IMAQ MultiThreshold. The results range from 0 to (n - 1), where n is the Number of Classes.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>This method is based on a reiterated measurement of an histogram. After finding the best result (a very rapid process), the histogram is segmented into n groups. These groups are based on the fact that each point in a group is closer to the barycenter of its own group than the other group. The VI outputs the threshold data in two forms:<LF><LF>·	A LUT directly usable by IMAQ UserLookup<LF><LF>·	An array directly usable by IMAQ MultiThreshold (Threshold Data)
Arc Points
Are you sure that you want<LF>to delete the theme:  
Are you sure you want to delete this theme?
Area
Area (calibrated)
Area (pixels)
Area (pixels^2)
Area Under Curve
Areas
Array Size
Array of digits
Articulation
Ask Before Starting?
Aspect Ratio
Associates an ROI with an image window.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest that is associated with an image window. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Attenuates the frequencies of a complex image.<LF>  <LF>Low pass/High pass (Low pass) determines which frequencies are attenuated. Choose low pass (F) to attenuate the high frequencies or high pass (T) to attenuate the low frequencies. The default is FALSE, which specifies low pass.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the image reference source. <LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Auto
Auto Threshold Binary
Auto Threshold Greyscale
Auto-Median
Auto?
Average Data Set
Average Lines
Average Reaction Time
Axis Labels
B Controls
BTN
Back
Background Color
Background Image
Background color
Bar pattern
Barometeric Sensor Container
Barometeric Sensor Fork
Barometric LogIT
Bars
Base Reference
Basic Reports
Basic Reports Out
Battery (0)
Battery Level (0)
Battery Power (V)
Battery Value
Battery value
Beats/min
Begin
Begin Control Lab Interface
Begin Direct Mode
Begin Internet Direct Mode
Begin LASM
Begin LASM File
Begin RCX
Begin Scout
Begin Scout Direct Mode
Begin an Inventor program and shows the <LF>LASM interface.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program.<LF>
Begin an Inventor program and shows the LASM interface.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program.
Begin an Inventor program for the 2nd <LF>Control Lab Interface (CLI).<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your <LF>computer to which the CLI is connected   <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port<LF>is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".
Begin an Inventor program for the Control Lab Interface (CLI).<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your computer to which the CLI is connected   <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".
Begin an Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your computer to which RCX is connected.    <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM code before it is passed to the brick.
Begin an Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your <LF>computer to which the RCX is connected    <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port<LF>is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM<LF>code before it is passed to the brick.  <LF>The default is to pass it dirctly to the RCX.<LF>
Begin an Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your computer to which the Scout is connected (Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM code before it is passed to the brick.  The default is to pass it directly to the Scout.
Begin an Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your <LF>computer to which the Scout is connected    <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port<LF>is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port""<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM<LF>code before it is passed to the brick.  The <LF>default is to pass it directly to the Scout.
Begin an Inventor program to be download over the internet.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Internet Inventor program.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Remote Site IP Number:  String in the IP number or name of the compter that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire  the icon in.<LF><LF>Typing a * will use the host computer and leaving it blank uses the IP addres in the default.prf.
Begin an Inventor program to downloaded<LF>over the internet.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Internet Inventor program.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire the icon in.  <LF><LF>Typing a * will use the host computer and leaving it blank uses the IP address in the default.prf<LF><LF>
Begin an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program.
Begin an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program.<LF>
Begin of Subroutine
Begin of a direct Internet mode program.<LF><LF>String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download) over the internet.  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire the icon in.
Begin of a direct Internet mode program.<LF><LF>String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download) over the internet.  You will need to make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF>  <LF>Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire the icon in.
Big Endian (Motorola)
Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin In
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select <LF>All Bins.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select All Bins.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Blue Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Brown Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Green Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Lavender Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Light Blue Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Olive Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Orange Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Purple Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Red Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Yellow Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Blue Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Brown Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Green Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Lavender Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Light Blue Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Olive Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Orange Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Purple Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Red Bin.
Bin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Yellow Bin.
Bin Plots
Binary
Binary_Morph
Bins
Black
Black Jump
Black Land
Black on White
BlackIsZero
Blob Count
Blob Math
Blob Parameter
BlobCount
Blobs
Blue
Blue (or Light or Val) Histogram Graph
Blue (or Light or Val) Histogram Report
Blue (or Light or Val) Lookup Table
Blue (or Light or Val) Plane
Blue (or Light or Val) Plane out
Blue (or Light or Val) Range
Blue (or Light or Val) value
Blue Bin
Blue Container
Blue Data Set
Blue Event
Blue Jump
Blue Land
Blue Scroll
Blue Timer
Blue scroll
Blue value
Bold?
Boolean
Border Size
Bottom
BrightSteps (1-32767)
BrightTH (1-1020)
Bring To Front? (N)
Brown Bin
Browse
Browse for Project
Browse...
Browser Info
Browser Size
Brush Parameters in
Brush Parameters out
Brush Window
Brush active out
Brush active? (False)
Brush element size<FONT predef=APPFONT> in
Brush element size<FONT predef=APPFONT> out
Brush shape in
Brush shape out
Btns
Building
Builds a reference for any arbitrary coordinate system with respect to the image plane. The reference of the coordinate system is specified as the position of the origin of the coordinate system and the orientation of its X axis with respect to that of the image plane.<LF><LF>Coordinate Reference is an array of point clusters that define the coordinate system. If two points are specified, these points are assumed to lie along the X axis of the coordinate system and the first point is used as the origin of the coordinate axis. If three points are specified, then the first two points are assumed to be along the X axis and the third point is assumed to be on the Y axis of the coordinate system.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Coordinate Origin is a point cluster that specifies the location of the origin of the coordinate system within an image plane.<LF>	<LF>Coordinate Angle (rad) is the angle in radians formed by the X axis of the coordinate system and the image plane.<LF><LF>Coordinate Angle (deg) is the angle in degrees formed by the X axis of the coordinate system and the image plane.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Builds a single ROI descriptor from an array ROIs descriptors.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptors is an array of ROIs descriptors. Each element of this array is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G which is returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor out is a ROI descriptor that contains all the contours in the array of ROIs.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
By subtracting the measurements from the number 41, the places where the light sensor measurements were darker now show up as spikes on the graph.  These are the times when someone was going in or coming out of the room.<LF><LF>
Byte Order
Bytes count
C Controls
C#
CLI
CODE A
CODE B
CODE C
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
COM 4
COM Port
Calculates a convex envelope for particles that are labeled in an image. You need to execute IMAQ Label prior to this VI in order to label the objects in the image.<LF>  	  <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Calculates slope of line(s) and displays the corresponding value <LF>on the graph.
Calculates slope of line(s) and displays the corresponding value on the graph.
Calculates standard deviation of a Data Set and <LF>displays corresponding values on the graph.
Calculates the area of interest of each digit from a rectangular area of interest around the whole indicator. This Vi has first to be used in a calibration phase. In order to find the area of each digit, all the segments of the indicator have to be lighted.<LF>This Vi is working with LCD indicators and with electroluminescent indicators, a parameter specifies the type of the indicator.<LF>It is fairly insensitive to light drift. It returns the area of interest containing the global rectangle for each digit. Its type is ROI Descriptor, standard of IMAQä Vision for G.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image containing the seven segment display.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user that corresponds to the global rectangle of the indicator. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Threshold (default=8) is used to determine if a segment is on or off. This value is compared to the standard deviation of the line profiles. This value may be increased when using images with high contrast or lowered in case of poor contrast images.<LF><LF>- 	LCD / LED (LCD) (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the indicator type. FALSE corresponds to LCD indicators and  TRUE to electroluminescent indicators.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor out contains the global rectangles of each digit.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Calculates the area under the curves and displays<LF>corresponding values on graph.
Calculates the coefficients of all detected particles. This VI returns an array of coefficients whose measurements are based on the results sent from IMAQ ComplexParticle.<LF>  <LF>Image is the same input source image that is used to measure the particle coefficients by IMAQ ComplexParticle.<LF>	<LF>Complex Reports is the output array of measurements from IMAQ ComplexParticle. The description of the measurements stored in each element of this array is described in IMAQ ComplexParticle. <LF>	<LF>Complex Report is an extraction of the output array of measurements from IMAQ ComplexParticle. The description of the measurements stored in each element of this array is described in IMAQ ComplexParticle. This input is used only in a case in which Complex Reports is not connected, thereby specifying that the measurements are to be made on a single particle. <LF><LF>Parameters is an array specifying a descriptor list of the coefficients that the user wants to calculate. The user can calculate one or more coefficients for one or more particles. The descriptor list is described in the table for the Parameter control.<LF>	<LF>Parameter is an array specifying a descriptor list of the coefficients that the user wants to calculate. The user can calculate one or more coefficients for one or more particles. This input is used only in a situation in which the input Parameters is not connected. The descriptor list is described in the table below.<LF><LF>   0	Area (pixels)	surface area of particle in pixels<LF>    1	Area (calibrated)	surface area of particle in user units<LF>    2	Number of holes	number of holes<LF>    3	Hole's Area	surface area of the holes in user units<LF>    4	Total Area	total surface area (holes and particles) in user units<LF>    5	Scanned Area	surface area of the entire image in user units<LF>    6	Ratio: Area/Scanned Area %	percentage of the surface area <LF>       of a particle in relation to the Scanned Area<LF>     7	Ratio: Area/Total Area %	percentage of a particle's surface <LF>        area in relation to the Total Area<LF>     8	Center of mass (X)	X coordinate of the center of gravity<LF>     9	Center of mass (Y)	Y coordinate of the center of gravity<LF>     10 	Left column (X)	left X coordinate of bounding rectangle <LF>     11	Upper row (Y)	top Y coordinate of bounding rectangle <LF>     12	Right column (X)	right hand X coordinate of bounding <LF>          rectangle <LF>     13	Lower row (Y)	bottom Y coordinate of bounding rectangle <LF>     14	Width 	width of bounding rectangle in user units<LF>     15	Height 	height of bounding rectangle in user units<LF>     16	Longest segment length	length of longest horizontal line <LF>         segment<LF>    17	Longest segment left column (X)	left-most X coordinate of <LF>         longest horizontal line segment<LF>   18	Longest segment row (Y)	Y coordinate of longest horizontal <LF>         line segment<LF>    19	Perimeter	length of outer contour of particle in user units<LF>    20	Hole's Perimeter	perimeter of all holes in user units<LF>    21	SumX	sum of the X-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>    22	SumY	sum of the Y-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>    23	SumXX	sum of the X-axis squared, for each pixel of the <LF>         particle<LF>    24	SumYY	sum of the Y-axis squared, for each pixel of the <LF>         particle<LF>    25	SumXY	sum of the X-axis and Y-axis for each pixel of the <LF>        particle<LF>    26	Corrected projection X	projection corrected in x<LF>    27	Corrected projection Y	projection corrected in y<LF>    28	Moment of inertia Ixx	inertia matrix coefficient in xx<LF>    29	Moment of inertia Iyy	inertia matrix coefficient in yy<LF>    30	Moment of inertia Ixy	inertia matrix coefficient in xy <LF>    31	Mean chord X	mean length of horizontal segments<LF>    32	Mean chord Y	mean length of vertical segments<LF>    33	Max intercept	length of longest segment <LF>    34	Mean intercept perpendicular 	mean length of the chords in <LF>        an object perpendicular to its max intercept<LF>     35	Particle orientation	direction of the longest segment <LF>     36	Equivalent ellipse minor axis	total length of the axis of the <LF>        ellipse having the same area as the particle and a major axis <LF>        equal to half the max intercept.<LF>     37	Ellipse major axis	total length of major axis having the same <LF>          area and perimeter as the particle in user units <LF>    38	Ellipse minor axis	total length of minor axis having the same <LF>        area and perimeter as the particle in user units<LF>    39	Ratio of equivalent ellipse axis	fraction of major axis to minor <LF>         axis<LF>    40	Rectangle big side	length of the large side of a rectangle   <LF>         having the same area and perimeter as the particle in user   <LF>         units<LF>     41	Rectangle small side	length of the small side of a rectangle <LF>         having the same area and perimeter as the particle in user <LF>         units<LF>     42	Ratio of equivalent rectangle sides	ratio of rectangle big side <LF>         to rectangle small side<LF>    43	Elongation factor	max intercept / mean perpendicular <LF>         intercept<LF>    44	Compactness factor	particle area (breadth × width)<LF>    45	Heywood circularity factor	particle perimeter / perimeter of <LF>         circle having same area as particle<LF>   46	Type Factor	a complex factor relating the surface area to the <LF>         moment of inertia <LF>    47	Hydraulic Radius	particle area / particle perimeter <LF>    48	Waddel disk diameter	diameter of the disk having the same <LF>         area as the particle in user units<LF>    49	Diagonal	diagonal of an equivalent rectangle in user units<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coefficients (2D) is a 2D array containing the specified measurements. This array is used only when the user has specified multiple coefficients (measurements) for each particle. The data is stored by particle followed by the coefficients.<LF>	<LF>Coefficients (1D) is a 1D array containing the specified measurements. This array is used only when the user has specified either multiple coefficients (measurements) for a single particle or a single coefficient for multiple particles. <LF><LF>Coefficient is the measurement specified for a single particle. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The output from this VI can be in one of three forms: Coefficients (2D), Coefficients (1D), or Coefficient. The final type of output is dependent on the connected inputs, as shown in the following table.<LF><LF>Possible Inputs	Resulting Type of Output<LF>Complex Reports and Parameters  	Coefficients (2D)<LF>Complex Reports and Parameter    	Coefficients (1D)<LF>Complex Report and Parameters    	Coefficients (1D)<LF>Complex Report and Parameter	      Coefficient
Calculates the histogram from an image. This VI returns a data type (cluster) compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph.<LF>    	<LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the region in the image to use for calculating a histogram. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for calculating the histogram (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). A histogram on the complete image occurs if the Image Mask is not connected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to classify the pixels. The number of obtained classes differs from the specified amount in a case in which the minimum and maximum boundaries are overshot in the Interval Range. You are advised to specify an even number of classes (for example, 2, 4, or 8) for 8-bit or 16-bit images. The default value is 256, which is designed for 8-bit images. This value gives a uniform class distribution or one class for each pixel in a 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Interval Range is a cluster specifying the minimum and maximum boundaries for the histogram calculation. Only pixels having a value that falls in this range are taken into account by the histogram calculation. This cluster is composed of the following elements. <LF><LF>Minimum is the minimum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real minimum value is determined by the source image, as described in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type	           Minimum Value Used<LF>  8 bit                                 (0, 0)<LF>  16 bit                      Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF>  32 bit                      Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>Maximum is the maximum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real maximum value is determined by the source image, as shown in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type	              Maximum Value Used<LF>   8 bit                                 255<LF>  16 bit                       Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF>  Float                        Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the histogram values. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>Starting Value returns the smallest pixel value from the first class calculated in the histogram. It can be equal to the Minimal value from the Interval Range or the smallest value found for the image type connected. <LF>	<LF>Incremental Value returns the incrementing value that specifies how much to add to Starting Value in calculating the median value of each class from the histogram. The median value xn from the nth class is: xn = Starting Value + n × Incremental Value.<LF><LF>Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements found in this array are the number of pixels per class. The n class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval [(Starting Value + (n - 1) × Interval Width), (Starting Value + n × (Interval Width - 1))].<LF><LF>Mean Value returns the mean value of the pixels used in calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>Standard Deviation returns the standard deviation from the histogram. The higher this value, the better the distribution of the values in the histogram and the image. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Calculates the histogram of an image.<LF>    	<LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the region in the image to use for calculating a histogram. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for calculating the histogram (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). A histogram on the complete image occurs if the Image Mask is not connected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to classify the pixels. The number of obtained classes differs from the specified amount in a case in which the minimum and maximum boundaries are overshot in the Interval Range. It is advised to specify an even number of classes (for example, 2, 4, or 8) for 8-bit or 16-bit images. The default value is 256, which is designed for 8-bit images. This value gives a uniform class distribution or one class for each pixel in a 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Interval Range is a cluster specifying the minimum and maximum boundaries for the histogram calculation. Only pixels having a value that falls in this range are taken into account by the histogram calculation. This cluster is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF>Minimum is the minimum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real minimum value is determined by the source image, as described in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type	        Minimum Value Used<LF> 8 bit                            (0, 0)<LF> 16 bit                 Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF> Float                  Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>Maximum is the maximum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real maximum value is determined by the source image, as shown in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type                     	Maximum Value Used<LF>  8 bit                                          255<LF>  16 bit                           Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF>  Float                            Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the histogram values. <LF>This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>  Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements   <LF>  found in this array are the number of pixels per class. The nth   <LF>  class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval [(Starting  <LF>  Value + (n - 1) × Interval Width), (Starting Value + n × (Interval <LF>  Width - 1))].<LF>	<LF>  Minimal Value returns the smallest pixel value used in calculating   <LF>  the histogram. <LF>	<LF>  Maximal Value returns the largest pixel value used in calculating <LF>  the histogram. <LF><LF>  Starting Value returns the smallest pixel value from the first class   <LF>  calculated in the histogram. It can be equal to the Minimal value <LF>  from the Interval Range or the smallest value found for the image   <LF>  type connected. <LF>	<LF>   Interval Width returns the length of each class. <LF>	<LF>   Mean Value returns the mean value of the pixels used in <LF>   calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>    Standard Deviation returns the standard deviation from the <LF>    histogram A higher value corresponds to a better the distribution<LF>    of the values in the histogram and the image. <LF><LF>    Area (pixels) returns the number of pixels used in the histogram   <LF>    calculation. This is influenced by the values specified in Interval <LF>    Range and the contents of Image Mask.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Calculates the histograms extracted from the three planes of an image. This VI can function in one of three modes corresponding to the three color models (RGB, HSL, or HSV). IMAQ ColorHistograph, a variant of the IMAQ ColorHistogram VI, has the advantage that its output data is directly compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the input source image used for calculating the histogram. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Mask, if connected, must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to classify the pixels. The default is 256.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on a red or hue plane (depending on the Color Mode). This cluster is the same as the cluster used by IMAQ Histogram. It contains the following elements.<LF><LF>Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements found in this array are the number of pixels per class. The nth class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval <LF>[Starting Value + (n - 1) × Interval Width, Starting Value + n × Interval Width - 1].<LF><LF>Minimal Value returns the smallest pixel value used in calculating the histogram. <LF><LF>Maximal Value returns the largest pixel value used in calculating the histogram. <LF><LF>Starting Value is always equal to 0 here. It returns the smallest pixel value from the first class calculated in the histogram. It can be equal to the Minimal value from the Interval Range or the smallest value found for the image type connected. <LF><LF>Interval Width returns the length of each class.<LF><LF>Mean Value returns the mean value of the pixels used in calculating the histogram. <LF><LF>Standard Deviation returns the standard deviation from the histogram. A higher value corresponds to a better the distribution of the values in the histogram and the image. <LF>	Area (pixels) returns the number of pixels used in the histogram calculation. This is influenced by the contents of Image Mask.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the green or saturation plane (depending on the Color Mode). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Report.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the blue, lightness, or value planes (depending on the Color Mode<LF>). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Report.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
Calculates the histograms extracted from the three planes of an image. This VI can function in one of three modes corresponding to the three color models (RGB, HSL, or HSV). The output from this VI is directly compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the RGB-chunky input source image used for calculating the histogram.<LF><LF>Image Mask, if connected, must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to class the pixels. The default is 256.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on a red or hue plane (depending on the Color Mode). This cluster is the same as the cluster used by IMAQ Histograph. It contains the following elements.<LF><LF>Starting Value is always equal to 0 here. This parameter is returned in the type Histogram Report, as in the VI IMAQ Histograph.<LF><LF>Incremental Value returns the incrementing value that specifies how much to add to Starting Value in calculating the median value of each class from the histogram. The median value xn from the nth class is xn = Starting Value + n × Incremental Value.<LF><LF>Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements found in this array are the number of pixels per class. the nth class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval <LF>[Starting Value + (n – 1) × Interval Width, Starting Value + n × Interval Width – 1].<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the green or saturation plane (depending on the Color Mode). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the blue, lightness, or value planes (depending on the Color Mode<LF>). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Calculates the inter-pixel variation between the pixel being processed and those pixels surrounding it. If the pixel being processed has a variation greater than a specified percentage, it is set to the average pixel value as calculated from the neighboring pixels.<LF>   	    <LF>Size & Tolerance is a cluster that specifies the following variables:<LF><LF> X Size is the size of the horizontal matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF><LF> Y Size is the size of the vertical matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF>	% Tolerance is the maximum variation authorized. The default is  <LF> 40%.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	See the Nonlinear Filters section of Chapter 5, Spatial Filtering, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about the lowpass filter.<LF><LF>Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image.<LF>The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the convolution matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix must have a minimum border of 1, a 5 × 5 matrix must have a minimum border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.
Calculates the mean value of a Data Set and <LF>displays a line at the corresponding value on the graph.
Calculates the profile of a line of pixels. This VI returns a data type (cluster) compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph. The relevant pixel information is taken from the specified vector (line).<LF>    	<LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the line profile. <LF>	<LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the pixel coordinates that form the end points of the line. <LF><LF>Note:	A line with the coordinates [0, 0, 0, 255] is formed from 256 pixels. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are set to 0 in Line Graph.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Line Graph is a cluster that contains the line profile with an X origin at 0 and an increment of 1. The cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF> x0 always returns 0. <LF>	dx always returns 1.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Line returns the line profile calculated in an array in which elements represent the pixel values belonging to the specified vector. <LF><LF>Line Information is a cluster containing relevant information about the pixels found in the specified vector. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF>  <LF>  Min returns the smallest pixel value found in the line profile. <LF> 	Max returns the largest pixel value found in the line profile. <LF>	 Mean returns the mean value of the pixels found in the line profile. <LF> 	Var returns the standard deviation from the line profile. <LF> 	Count found in the line profile.<LF><LF>Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes the following parameters:<LF><LF>   	x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>    rectangle.<LF>   	y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>    rectangle.<LF>	  x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of    <LF>   the rectangle.<LF>  	y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>   the rectangle.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Calculates the profile of the pixels along the boundary of an ROI descriptor. This VI returns a data type (cluster) that is compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph. This VI also returns other information such as pixel statistics and the true coordinates of the ROI boundary.<LF>    	  <LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the ROI profile. <LF>	<LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>ROI Graph is a cluster that contains the ROI profile with an X origin at 0 and an increment of 1. The cluster contains the following elements.<LF><LF>   x0 always returns 0. <LF>  	dx always returns 1.<LF>	<LF>Pixels Line returns the ROI profile calculated in an array in which elements represent the pixel values belonging to the specified vector.<LF><LF>Pixel Coordinates is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates of each pixel along the ROI boundary.<LF>	<LF>ROI Pixel Statistics is a cluster containing relevant information about the pixels found along the ROI boundary. This cluster contains the following elements.<LF><LF>  Min returns the smallest pixel value found in the ROI profile. <LF>	 Max returns the largest pixel value found in the ROI profile. <LF>	 Mean returns the mean value of the pixels found in the ROI <LF>  profile. <LF> 	Var returns the standard deviation from the ROI profile. <LF>	 Count returns the count of pixels found in the ROI profile.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes the following parameters.<LF><LF> 	 x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>   rectangle.<LF>  	y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>   rectangle.<LF>	  x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>   the rectangle.<LF>	  y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>   the rectangle.
Calculating
Calculating Plot.  Please wait....
Calibration
Caliper Parameters
Caliper Report
Camera 1 Enabled?
Camera 2 Enabled?
Camera 3 Enabled?
Camera Equal Fork
Camera Port
Camera Sensor 1
Camera Sensor 2
Camera Sensor 3
Camera Sensor Container
Camera Sensor Fork
Cancel
Cancel this operation and go back to Pilot.
Cancel?
Canceled?
Caps Lock
Celsius
Celsius Equal Fork
Celsius Fork
Center
Center Point
Center out
CenterLight (1-1020)
Central
Centroid
Change Inventor Level
Change Motor Speed
Change Program On RCX
Change View On RCX
Change between the greater than or less than sign used for comparisons.
Change the direction of the motor, forward of backwards.
Change the direction of the motor, forward or backward.
Change the direction of the motor, forward or backwards.
Change the motor speed on specified ports.<LF>The default is to turn change the motor speed on all ports to power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to change motor speed on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
Change the motor speed on specified ports.<LF>The default is to turn change the motor speed on all<LF>ports to power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to change motor speed on <LF>by stringing together any combination of output port <LF>modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
Change which program will be run on the RCX and run it.<LF><LF>Wire in a constant from 1 to 5.  The default is selecting program 3.<LF>
Change which sensor or motor is being viewed on the RCX.  The modifier chooses which view you want.  Modifiers can be Containers or constants.<LF><LF>The default is to set the view to sensor port 1.<LF><LF>0 ... the clock<LF>1 ... Sensor port 1<LF>2 ... Sensor port 2<LF>3 ... Sensor port 3<LF>4 ... Output port A<LF>5 ... Output port B<LF>6 ... Output port C
Changes a line of pixels from a color image. This VI receives an array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls. An array of clusters coding the color three values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) can be converted into an array of pixels (unsigned 32-bit integer controls) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the two endpoints of the line to modify. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are not replaced.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line(U32) contains the pixel values as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Changes the intensity values in a line of pixels from an image. <LF>    	<LF>Note:	Each Pixels Line input is specific for a particular type of data.<LF><LF>Line Coordinates are the coordinates of the line to change. These coordinates are in the form of an array specifying the endpoints of the line. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are not replaced.<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (U8) is an array containing the coordinates of the pixel line to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is an 8-bit image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels Line. <LF><LF>Pixels Line (I16) is an array of 16-bit integers. This input must be used if the image connected is a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (Float) is an array of floating-point values. This input must be used if the image connected is a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Changes the intensity values in either a row or a column of pixels in an image. <LF>    	<LF>Note:	Each Pixels input is specific for a particular type of data.<LF><LF>Row / Column uses the row Number by default (the default is FALSE). When the TRUE value is connected, the column Number is used. <LF>	<LF>Number is the row or column number to be replaced in the image. <LF>	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Pixels (U8) is an array specifying the coordinates of the pixel row or column to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is an 8-bit image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels.<LF><LF>Pixels (I16) is an array of 16-bit integers specifying the coordinates of the pixel row or column to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is a 16-bit image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels.<LF><LF>Pixels (Float) is an array of floating-point values specifying the coordinates of the pixel row or column to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is a 32-bit floating-point image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Changes the pixel value for a color image. This VI receives the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer control. The values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) can be converted into an unsigned 32-bit integer control using the VI IMAQ ColorValueToInteger.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal position of the pixel. <LF><LF>Y Coordinate is the vertical position of the pixel.<LF><LF>Pixel Value contains the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer control.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Changes the pixel value in an image. <LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal coordinate of the pixel to modify.<LF><LF>	Y Coordinate is the vertical coordinate of the pixel to modify.<LF><LF>Pixel Value contains the replacement pixel value. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Channel
Character
Check - Is there?
Check Value
Check character (False)
Check the battery level of the RCX.<LF>Outputs a value (V)  between 0 and 9.
Check the battery level of the RCX<LF>Outputs a value (V)  between 0 and 9.
Check to see if the RCX is in front of tower.<LF>Outputs true if RCX is in view and false if it is not.
Choose a Bin for your computed data (only visible data is placed in the bin).
Choose a Bin or a number.
Choose a Bin.
Choose a Bin.<LF><LF>In the View Area, the view all bins (1..10), including Compute data.
Choose a Container
Choose a page of your Project to be displayed below.
Choose a path depending on whether the <LF>sound level is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF><LF>If the sound level is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sound level is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sound level to <LF>60 dB.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (dB):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound level sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the Clock value is <LF>greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the Clock value is greater than the specified number, <LF>the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Clock value is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
Choose a path depending on whether the Clock value is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the Clock value is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Clock value is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
Choose a path depending on whether the Clock value is equal to or not equal to a specified number.If the Clock value is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.If the Clock value is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
Choose a path depending on whether the Clock value is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the Clock value is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Clock value is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
Choose a path depending on whether the Timer is equal to or not equal to a specified number.   If the Timer is equal to the specified number the program will follow the top string.  If the Timer is not equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.  The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Choose a path depending on whether the Timer is equal to or not equal to a specified number. <LF>If the Timer is equal to the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Timer is not equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Choose a path depending on whether the Timer is greater-than or <LF>less-than a specified number. <LF>If the Timer is greater-than the specified number the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>If the Timer is less-than or equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to <LF>compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you<LF>want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Choose a path depending on whether the Timer is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF>If the Timer is greater-than the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Timer is less-than or equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Choose a path depending on whether the container value is <LF>greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the container value is greater than the specified number, <LF>the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the container value is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that <LF>corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the container.
Choose a path depending on whether the container value is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the container value is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the container value is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the container.
Choose a path depending on whether the container value is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the container value is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the container value is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the container.
Choose a path depending on whether the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the <LF>Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>number of clicks of the touch sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is equal to or not equal to a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is equal to the specified number the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is not equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. 
Choose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is equal to or not equal to a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is equal to the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is not equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. <LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is greater-than or <LF>less-than a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is greater-than the specified number the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is less-than or equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. 
Choose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is greater-than the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is less-than or equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. <LF><LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the number of touches and releases of the Touch Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the number of touches and releases of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the To<LF>uch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>number of clicks of the touch sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the number of touches and releases of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the sound level is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF><LF>If the sound level is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sound level is less than or equal to the specified value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sound level to <LF>60 dB.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (dB):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound level sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of mail <LF>in the mailbox is greater-than or less-than a <LF>specified number.<LF>If the mail is greater than the specified number, the<LF> program will follow the top string.<LF>If the mail is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command <LF>somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and <LF>have not received any mail from another RCX, the <LF>mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the <LF>string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with <LF>the mail value.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of mail in the mailbox is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the mail is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  If the mail is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and have not received any mail from another RCX, the mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the mail value.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of mail in the mailbox is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the mail is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the mail is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and have not received any mail from another RCX, the mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the mail value.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of mail in the mailbox is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the mail is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the mail is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and have not received any mail from another RCX, the mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the mail value.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the  Light Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified  number.  If the light sensor is equal to the specified  number, the program will follow the top string. If the light sensor is not equal to the specified  number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to  55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1  (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that  corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the  value of the light sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Light Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified <LF>number. <LF>If the light sensor is equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is not equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to <LF>55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Light Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF>If the light sensor is greater than the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to <LF>55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a <LF>specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF> corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees). 
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a <LF>specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF> corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees). 
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Voltage Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor to <LF>2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>humidity sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF>If the relative humidity is greater than the specified <LF>percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified <LF>humidity, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the humidity sensor to <LF>50%.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (%RH):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the humidity sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>pH is greater-than or less-than a specified  number. <LF><LF>If the pH is greater than the specified  value, the program <LF>will follow the top string.<LF>If the pH  is less than or equal to the specified  value, the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the value of the pH to 7.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (pH):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pH sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>position sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF>If the position is greater than the specified <LF>percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter is less than or equal to the specified <LF>position, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the position sensor to <LF>180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>pressure sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF><LF>If the pressure is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the pressure is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the pressure sensor to <LF>100 kPa.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (kPa):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter lux is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter lux is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>10000 lux.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (Lux):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter pressure is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter pressure is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (hPa):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (m/s/s):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>625 mV.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (mV):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>temperature sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF><LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified <LF>value (in degrees Celsius), the program will follow the top<LF>string.<LF>If the sensor adapter is less than or equal to the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the temperature sensor<LF>to 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (Celsius):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle <LF>Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than the <LF>specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is less than or equal to the <LF>specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16<LF>(one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero <LF>Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.If the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF><LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Camera Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  <LF>If the Camera Sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Camera sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the red container.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier.<LF><LF>Compare to:  Compare to the camera sensor value.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Camera Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the defined sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.If the defined sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the value of the defined sensor to the red container.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in a container modifier.<LF><LF>Compare to:  Compare to the camera sensor value.<LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Camera Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.   If the camera sensor is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  If the camera sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Camera Sensor to 55.<LF><LF>Note: The Camera Sensor reads a value defined in the vision center.<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to where the camera sensor used.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the camera sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Light Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF>If the light sensor is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to 55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the light sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF>
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.If the light sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the Voltage Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF><LF>If the voltage is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the voltage is less than or equal to the specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string. The default is to compare the value of the sensor to 2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the humidity sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF>If the relative humidity is greater than the specified percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified humidity, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the humidity sensor to 50%.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (%RH):  String in the number to compare with the value of the humidity sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the pH is greater-than or less-than a specified  number. <LF><LF>If the pH is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the pH  is less than or equal to the specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the value of the pH to 7.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (pH):  String in the number to compare with the value of the pH sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the position sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF>If the position is greater than the specified percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified position, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the position sensor to 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the value of the position sensor.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the pressure sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF><LF>If the pressure is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the pressure is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the pressure sensor to 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (kPa):  String in the number to compare with the value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the sensor adapter is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the value of the sensor adapter.
Choose a path depending on whether the value of the temperature sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF><LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified value (in degrees Celsius), the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the temperature sensor to 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (Celsius):  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor.
Choose a statistic (Min, Max, Mean, Standard Deviation) - the result is the number below
Choose between editing Programmer Vaults or Investigator Themes.
Choose between your RCX and one over the network.
Choose the Bin for the X-axis.
Choose the Bin for the Y-axis.
Choose the bin color, plot style, and statistic that you want to see.
Choose the number of plots you wish to print.
Choose the operation you want to perform on your bin.
Choose the statistic or mathematical operation you want to perform on your bin.  The function will be applied to each data set in the bin.
Choose to wait for a specific amount of time or for a random amount of time.
Choose two Bins to be plotted against each other.
Choose two different Bins and their plot style to be displayed in the graph below.
Choose what port the sensor is connected to.
Choose which port the sensor is connected to.
Choose which value you want to read from the RCX, a Container, Timer, Sensor, the Clock, or the Mail.<LF><LF>
Circle Points
Circles Data
Cities and Transportation
Classical
Clear All Events
Clear Data Buffer
Clear Data Log Memory
Clear Sound Buffer
Clear all of the memory allocated for data logging and free that memory up for bigger programs.
Clears data logging buffer.  This frees up the space for longer programs.
Click
Click Counter (0-15)
Click Equal Fork
Click Fork
Click event
Click here for instructions on how to view the RCX set-up movie.
Click here to accept changes and exit this window.
Click here to add a new page to this section.
Click here to add a new theme after typing its name in the field above.
Click here to automatically go to this web site through your default web browser.
Click here to automatically go to this website through your default web browser.
Click here to begin an Invent and Investigate Project.
Click here to calculate a sensor value and send it to the blue container in the RCX (assuming that the RCX is in view and that vision center is talking to it).
Click here to calculate a sensor value and send it to the red container in the RCX (assuming that the RCX is in view and that vision center is talking to it).
Click here to calculate a sensor value and send it to the yellow container in the RCX (assuming that the RCX is in view and that vision center is talking to it).
Click here to cancel changes and exit this window.
Click here to cancel the operation.
Click here to cancel this command.
Click here to cancel this operation.
Click here to cancel.
Click here to change between the greater than or less than sign used for comparisons.
Click here to change the RCX IR Power Setting.<LF><LF>High sets the power for long distance communication.<LF><LF>Low sets the power for short distance communication. (This helps save batteries!)
Click here to change the path to the where you will save your programs or projects.
Click here to change the power setting for output A.
Click here to change the power setting for output C.
Click here to change the power setting of Output A.
Click here to change the power setting of Output A.  Use the sensor on Port 1 to control Output A by selecting the Port 1 indicator.
Click here to change the power setting of Output C.
Click here to change the power setting of output A.
Click here to change the power setting of output B.
Click here to change the power setting of output C.
Click here to change the sensor that is being data logged on Port 1.
Click here to change the sensor that is being data logged on Port 3.
Click here to choose an operation to transform the picture.
Click here to choose the computer COM port to which the IR transmitter cable is connected.
Click here to choose the length of time for the outputs to be on or choose to wait for the touch sensor or light sensor.
Click here to choose the length of time to wait.
Click here to choose what to wait for.  <LF>The program can wait for:<LF>     -a number of points to be collected<LF>      -an amount of time<LF>      -the touch sensor is pushed or released, <LF>     -light sensor to detect a darker or brighter value<LF>     -temperature, rotation or other adapter sensor to be greater or less than a certain value<LF>
Click here to choose what to wait for.  <LF>The program can wait for:<LF>     -a number of points to be collected<LF>     -a certain amount of time<LF>     -the touch sensor to be pushed or released<LF>     -the light sensor to detect a darker or brighter value<LF>     -the temperature, rotation or other adapter sensor to be greater or less than a certain value<LF>
Click here to choose what to wait for.  The program can wait for an amount of time, or  until the touch sensor is pushed or until the touch sensor is released.
Click here to choose what to wait for.  The program can wait for an amount of time, until the touch sensor is pushed or released or for a light sensor to read a darker or brighter value.
Click here to choose whether or not you want the sensor(s) to be collecting data during this step. 
Click here to choose which output to turn on.<LF><LF>You can turn on a motor in the forward or reverse direction or you can turn on a lamp.
Click here to choose which output to turn on.<LF><LF>You can turn on a motor in the forward or reverse direction or you can turn on a lamp.  If the stop sign is selected, the output will turn off.
Click here to close the display.  This shortens the amount of time needed to take a data point and allows programs to run faster.
Click here to create a name for your Bin.
Click here to create a new Invent and Investigate Project.
Click here to create this theme.
Click here to define a sensor for the camera to use.
Click here to delete this step.
Click here to delete this theme.
Click here to download and run this program on the RCX in direct mode.  The RCX must remain in front of the IR tower during direct mode.   You must sample slower than 1 sec per point to use this feature.
Click here to download and run this program on the RCX in direct mode.  The RCX must remain in front of the IR tower during direct mode.  You must sample slower than 1 sec per point to use this feature.
Click here to download the firmware into the RCX.
Click here to download this program into the RCX.
Click here to download this program to the RCX.
Click here to download this song to the RCX.
Click here to enable or disable autothresholding.  Autothresholding can help in situations where ambiant light is constantly changing.
Click here to end all server connections and close the window.
Click here to enter Programmer.
Click here to expand the template to the full screen size.
Click here to expand the templates to the full screen size.
Click here to finish selecting an ROI
Click here to go back to ROBOLAB.
Click here to go back to the introductory screen.
Click here to go back to the previous screen
Click here to go to the Administrator Settings.
Click here to go to the Compute Area<LF><LF>· Used to adjust the data with arithmetic functions, for calibration or<LF> scientific understanding.<LF>· Has five levels of computation available, from: simple statistics to <LF>taking derivatives and integrals. <LF>
Click here to go to the Journal Area.<LF><LF>· Used to document your project.<LF>· Used to import images to support your project.<LF>· Useful for: <LF>    problem statement, <LF>    hypothesis, <LF>    predictions (text and images), <LF>    images of any experimental set-up, including digital photographs, <LF>    discussion of results,<LF>    and conclusions.<LF>
Click here to go to the Program Area.<LF><LF>· Used to write the programs for the RCX.<LF>· Has five levels of data logging programming.<LF>· Used for downloading the programs to the RCX.<LF>
Click here to go to the RCX settings.
Click here to go to the ROBOLAB settings.
Click here to go to the Upload Area.<LF><LF>· 'Upload' means to transfer the data from the RCX to the computer.<LF>· Every set of uploaded data is stored individually within the upload area, one set of data per page.<LF>
Click here to go to the View and Compare Area.<LF><LF>· Used to View at all of the data that has been gathered.<LF>· Used to Compare data of different types.<LF>· Used to Measure statistics about the data such as maximum and minimum<LF><LF>
Click here to highlight a song to be played during your program.
Click here to insert a step after the current step.
Click here to load a Pilot 3 program.
Click here to load a Pilot 4 program.
Click here to open a file.
Click here to open a song.  Once a song is opened, it's title will be displayed here.
Click here to open an Inventor program window.
Click here to open an Inventor programming window for data analysis.
Click here to open and close the help window.
Click here to open the Music Component of the Media Bar.
Click here to open the Piano Player
Click here to open the control panel of your camera.
Click here to open the music section of the Media Bar.
Click here to open the vision section of the Media Bar.
Click here to pause the video screen.
Click here to play the selected song on the computer.
Click here to print selected pages.
Click here to print this screen.
Click here to publish your project as a presentation, web page, or print out. 
Click here to quit ROBOLAB.
Click here to remove the selected page.
Click here to return to the Program Area.
Click here to return to the introduction menu.
Click here to return to the introductory screen.
Click here to return to the investigator project.
Click here to return to the main menu.
Click here to save the video image as a file.
Click here to save this image and exit.
Click here to save this program listing as a text file.
Click here to save this program.
Click here to save this sensor and exit.
Click here to save this song and exit.
Click here to save your PILOT file in a different location other than in one of the Themes.  This is useful for advanced users who want to save their file ona  floppy disk or on the desktop, etc.
Click here to select a Compute Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - Arithmemtic Operations<LF>Level 2 - Bin 1 vs. Bin 2<LF>Level 3 - Advanced Operations (integrals, derivatives, best fit lines)<LF>Level 4 - Inventor-style Computing<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming<LF><LF>
Click here to select a Compute Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - Arithmemtic Operations<LF>Level 2 - Bin 1 vs. Bin 2<LF>Level 3 - Advanced operations (integrals, derivatives, best fit lines)<LF>Level 4 - Inventor-style Computing<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming<LF><LF>
Click here to select a Compute Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - Arithmetic Operations<LF>Level 2 - Bin 1 vs. Bin 2<LF>Level 3 - Advanced Operations (integrals, derivatives, best fit lines)<LF>Level 4 - Inventor-style Computing<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming<LF><LF>
Click here to select a Journal Template.<LF><LF>Describe Page - Import an image of a page of your Project and label it<LF>Describe Project - Describe your Project in words<LF>Import JPEG - Import an image file and label it to help explain your Project
Click here to select a Journal Template<LF><LF>Describe and Draw - allows writing and illustrating<LF>Draw - allows only illustrating<LF>Describe - allows only writing
Click here to select a Programming Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - One Sensor<LF>Level 2 - Two Sensors and Motors<LF>Level 3 - Two Sensors with 3 Steps<LF>Level 4 - Inventor Level Programming<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming <LF><LF>
Click here to select a constant to apply to the image.
Click here to select a folder where Invent and Investigate Projects reside.
Click here to select an Upload Template<LF>
Click here to select different folders of music or the ""No Song"" Option.
Click here to select the Non Lego Sensor you are using.  Your sensor will only appear of you have loaded the setup from the disk or downloaded it from the web
Click here to select the Sensor you are using with the Sensor Adapter.  
Click here to select the arithmetic operation you wish to use.
Click here to select the final operation.  This will reduce the processed image (defined below) into a single number.  Vision Center will then send that number to the RCX container.
Click here to select the level you have chosen.
Click here to select the new communications port.
Click here to select the time between captured data points.  <LF><LF>The options include preset times (1 sec, 1 min, 1 hr), any time in seconds, or the touch sensor.  If the touch sensor is selected, data will be captured each time the touch sensor is pushed in.  The touch sensor must be on input port 2 to be used as the trigger for data capturing.
Click here to select the time between captured data points.  <LF><LF>The options include preset times (1 sec, 1 min, and 1 hr), any time in seconds, or the touch sensor.  If the touch sensor is selected, data will be captured each time the touch sensor is pushed in.  The touch sensor must be on input port 2 to be used as the trigger for data capturing.
Click here to select the type of binary morphology to be applied.  For counting particles, auto-median works the best in most cases.
Click here to select the type of blob calculation.  This can change the blob count by changing which blobs are filtered.  This also affects your choice in Sensor Operation.  For instance, if you have not enabled blobs, then the sensor operation ""Maximum"" will return the maximum intensity of the image.  If you have selected Blob Area, then ""Maximum"" will give you the maximum blob area instead.
Click here to select what input port the touch sensor is on.
Click here to select what is to be arithmatically applied to the image.  Toggle between a number, new image that you can snap from the camera, or an image from a file.  
Click here to select which camera to use.
Click here to send the recorded song to a new file.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
Click here to send the recorded song to the blue scroll.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
Click here to send the recorded song to the red scroll.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
Click here to send the recorded song to the yellow scroll.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
Click here to set the amount of time the RCX will sit idle before turning off.  The range is from 0 to 255 minutes.  A time of 0 means the RCX will never turn off.
Click here to show or hide the administrator button on the introductory screen.  To show the button again, hit the function key F5 in the main ROBOLAB screen.
Click here to show the details and credits of ROBOLAB.
Click here to snap an image from your USB camera.
Click here to start a remote RCX (hitting the green RUN button)
Click here to start a slide presentation of selected pages from your Project.
Click here to switch between continuous play and single play.
Click here to test communication with the RCX.  The RCX will beep if communication was successful.
Click here to test the communication or to change which hardware you are using. (RCX, Scout, or Control Lab Interface).
Click here to toggle between No Connection with the RCX, Slow Connection, or Fast Connection.  If you are in Slow Connection mode, then your RCX can request Vision Center to save the current image to the Pictures folder in the Vision folder (in My Data). A red light appears on the Vision Center panel when it receives the ""Snap"" command from the RCX.
Click here to toggle between having a program run once or having a program run continuously.
Click here to toggle between having the program execute once or having the program run continuously.
Click here to toggle between masking the area inside or outside of the selected area.
Click here to try the operation again.
Click here to turn your Project into a set of web pages.
Click here to type in the number to compare to the value of the sensor.
Click here to upload data from the RCX.
Click here to view the Administrator Menus.
Click here to view the next page in this Presentation.
Click here to view the next step in this program.
Click here to view the previous page in the Presentation.
Click here to view the previous step in this program.
Click in this space to type infomation about your JPEG image.
Click in this space to type infomation about your project.
Click in this space to type the name of your page.  This title will appear in the navigator. 
Click in this space to type the name of your page.  This title will appear on the navigator. 
Click on a Pilot Theme to select which programs will appear in the Program window.
Click on a page title to switch to that page.  Double clicking on a page allows you to mark that page as the top page of your project.  This means that next time you open the project, it will be the first one to be shown.
Click on an Inventor Theme to select which programs will appear in the Program window.
Click on the desired Inventor Level
Clicking here will allow you once more to see what the camera is seeing.
Clicking on this button transposes your song down one semitone.
Clicking on this button transposes your song up one semitone.
Clicking on this list allows you to choose between editing Programmer and Investigator vaults.
Clicks
Clicks Container
Clicks Counter
Clicks Threshold
Clipboard has an image?
Clock Container
Clock Equal Fork
Clock Value
Clock fork
Close
Close &W
Close All Windows? (N)
Close Camera
Close Display
Close Mic
Close error code
Close event
Closes a user window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindClose, which is used for closing image windows.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Close All Windows? (N) specifies if all the image windows are to be closed. The default value FALSE (No) closes only the specified window. Setting this value to TRUE closes all windows simultaneously.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Closes the WindTools window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindClose, which is used for closing image windows. Note that this function also destroys the space reserved in memory for the WindTools window. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Cluster
Cmd
Codabar Character set
Code
Coefficient
Coefficients
Coefficients (1D)
Coefficients (2D)
Col
Col of Max
Col of Min
Color
Color (red)
Color LUT
Color Mode
Color Palette
Color Pixel Value
Color Replace Value
Color Value
Color of ROI (white)
Color sensor ID
Color titles
Colors (Red)
Column
Columns
Com port
Combine
Combine Bins
Combine the X and Y values into a plot.  If a plot is wired to <LF>Data Set in, the new plot is appended to the old.
Combine the X and Y values into a plot.  If a plot is wired to Data Set in, the new plot is appended to the old.
Combines two plots together.
Command listing
Commands
Communication Error
Compare
Compare Sensors
Compare Tools
Compare to
Compare to (#)
Compare to (%)
Compare to (%RH)
Compare to (Celsius)
Compare to (Fahrenheit)
Compare to (Lux)
Compare to (Number of Points)
Compare to (V)
Compare to (Volts)
Compare to (dB)
Compare to (degrees)
Compare to (hPa)
Compare to (kPa)
Compare to (lux)
Compare to (m/s/s)
Compare to (mV)
Compare to (min)
Compare to (pH)
Compare to (tenths of seconds)
Comparison
Comparison Value
Complex Pixel Value
Complex Report
Complex Reports
Complex Reports Out
ComplexBlob
Compute
Compute 1
Compute 2
Compute 3
Compute Area
Compute Data
Compute Tools
Compute Tools 1
Compute Tools 2
Compute Tools 3
Compute Tools 4
Compute Tools 5
Computer Error
Computes a ratio between two images. Each pixel in input Image Src A is multiplied by the integer value specified in the input Constant before being divided by the equivalent pixel found in input Image Src B. If the background is lighter than the image, this function can be used to correct the background. In a background correction image, Image Src A is the acquired image, and Image Src B is the light background. <LF>    	  <LF>Constant. Each pixel in Image Src A is multiplied by the Constant value prior to being divided by the equivalent pixel in Image Src B. The default is 255, which corresponds to the maximum value for a pixel encoded in an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = (SrcA(x, y) × Constant) ÷ SrcB(x, y)<LF><LF>All input images must be of the same image type. <LF><LF>Division by 0 is not allowed. If this value is found in Image Src B, the equivalent pixel value from Image Src A is directly applied to Image Dst. If one of the two source images is empty, the result is a copy of the other.<LF>
Computes the FFT of an image.<LF>    	    <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image. The image must have a resolution of 2n × 2m.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point), which is an image created with IMAQ Create using type 3. The complex image is resized to the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	The FFT that is calculated is not normalized; you can use IMAQ ComplexDivide to normalize the complex image.<LF><LF>The FFT is a complex image in which high frequencies are grouped at the center, while low frequencies are located at the edges.
Computes the angles formed by sets of four points in an image or between sets of two points and a common vertex.<LF>  <LF>Use Vertex (No) specifies whether a vertex point is used while computing the angle.<LF>	<LF>Points is an array of point clusters. If the vertex point is not used, then four points at a time are considered while computing the angle, as shown in the illustration the left. If Use Vertex is TRUE, then the angle made by two consecutive points in the array and the vertex is computed.<LF><LF>Vertex specifies the vertex point to use if the Use Vertex option is TRUE.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Angles (deg) is an array containing the computed angles in degrees.<LF>	<LF>Angles (rad) is an array containing the computed angles in radians.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Computes the average pixel intensity (mean line profile) on whole or part of the image.<LF>    	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to extract. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>X Axis Averages is the linear average along each column in the image.<LF>	<LF>Y Axis Averages is the linear average along each row in the image.<LF>	<LF>X+Y Axis Averages is the linear average along each diagonal running from bottom-left to top-right.<LF>	<LF>X-Y Axis Averages is the linear average along each diagonal running from top-left to bottom-right.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Computes the center of the circle described by three points or more located on its circumference. It returns also the diameter of the circle in pixels, the area of the disk and its perimeter.<LF><LF>- 	Radial Points is an array of Point Coordinates clusters. This array must contain three Points Coordinates clusters (or more) corresponding to three points (or more) on the circumference of the circle.<LF>	Three points on the circumference of the circle determine a unique center. When more than three points are provided, the function computes the barycenter of the set of centers (each center given by a group of three points).<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Center is the coordinates of the center of the circle.<LF><LF>- 	Diameter (pixels) is the diameter of the circle.<LF><LF>- 	Area (pixels^2) is the area of the disk in square pixels.<LF><LF>- 	Perimeter (pixels) is the perimeter of the circle in pixels.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Computes the conjugate of a complex image. This VI converts the complex pixel data z = a + ib of an FFT image into z' = a - ib.<LF>  <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image for the image that is used to measure the conjugate. This input can accept only a complex image. <LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Computes the distance in pixels between consecutive pairs of points.<LF>  <LF>Points is an array of point-coordinate clusters. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Distances is an array containing the computed distances. Distance i is computed between points i and i + 1.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Computes the energy center of the image.<LF>    	  <LF>Image is the reference to the image whose centroid has to be calculated.<LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the region in the image to use for calculating a centroid. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for calculating the centroid (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). A centroid on the complete image occurs if the Image Mask is not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Centroid is a cluster containing the X and Y coordinates of the centroid of the image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Computes the inverse FFT of a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point).<LF>    <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image. This input can accept only a complex image. The image must have a resolution of 2n × 2m.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image that contains the resulting spatial image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	This VI uses a buffer equal to the size of the complex image. An 8-bit image with a resolution of 256 × 256 pixels uses 64 KB of memory. The FFT associated with this image requires eight times the memory, or 64 × 8 = 512KB. The calculation of the inverse FFT also requires a temporary buffer of 512 KB. Therefore, the total memory necessary for this operation is 1080 KB.
Computes the normalized cross correlation between the source image and the template image.<LF>    <LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region in the source image that is used for the correlation process. Correlation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF><LF>Image Src is a reference to the source image. The normalized cross correlation is performed between this image and the template image. This image must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Template is a reference to a template image. This image must be an 8-bit image. For the correlation, the center of the template image is used as the origin.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is an 8-bit image that contains the cross-correlation values normalized to lie in the range [0, 255]. A value of 255 indicates a very high correlation and a value of 0 indicates no correlation.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	Correlation is a time-intensive operation. You can reduce the time required to perform a correlation by keeping the template size small and reducing the search area in the source image by using the optional rectangle.
Concatenated String
Configures the appearance and availability of the region tools found in the WindTools palette. By default, with no input connections, a palette is displayed containing all nine region tools. The WindTools palette is a floating palette. It is always visible.<LF><LF>Show Coordinates? (T) specifies if the active pixel coordinates are shown. Coordinates are shown (TRUE) by default. <LF><LF>Note:	Unlike an image window, the WindTools window is not visible unless activated by calling IMAQ WindToolsShow.<LF><LF>The user must have LabVIEW version 3.1 (or higher) to access the pixel-coordinate and parameter information.<LF><LF>Tools specifies which icons are displayed in the WindTools window. There are seven regions tools available: <LF><LF>Number	Icon	Tool Name	Function<LF>0	NA	No Selection	NA<LF>1		Point	Select a pixel in the image.<LF>2		Line	Draw a line in the image.<LF>3		Rectangle	Draw a rectangle (or square) in the image.<LF>4		Oval	Draw an oval (or circle) in the image.<LF>5		Polygon	Draw a polygon in the image.<LF>6		Free	Draw a freehand region in the image.<LF>7	NA	Unused 1	NA<LF>8		Zoom	Zoom-in or zoom-out in an image.<LF>9	NA	Unused 2	NA<LF>10		Broken Line	Draw a broken line in the image.<LF>11		Freehand Line	Draw a free hand line in the image.<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Icons per line (4) determines the number of icons per line. The subsequent lines are set as a function of the number of remaining available icons. <LF><LF>Note:	The WindTools palette automatically displays cursor information if the input Icons per Line is set to 3 (or higher) for the Macintosh version and 4 (or higher) for the Windows version.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Configures the appearance of a thumbnail that is selected on the browser. A selected image will be framed using the Focus Color.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>- Focus Color  is the color used to draw the frame around a selected thumbnail image.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this Vi executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Configures the browser. This VI sets all the required parameters that determine the aspect and the thumbnail organization on the browser.<LF><LF>A browser is created and configured using the IMAQ Browser Setup. These two steps, creation and configuration, are mandatory because all the functions of this library act on browsers and not on standard images.<LF><LF>-	Image In  is the RGB image used by the browser. This image forms  the base of the the browser. All thumbnails that are placed in the browser are actually pasted on to this image.<LF><LF>-	Browser Info is the cluster configuring the initial aspect of the browser. The parameters are :<LF>   - Browser Size (X,Y)  is the browser screen size.<LF>   - Images per Line is the number of thumbnail images per line on the browser.<LF>   - Background Color is the color filling the background of the browser.<LF>   - Frame Size  is the width of the frame that contains each thumbnail.<LF>   - Frame Style  see below.<LF><LF>  The available frame styles are ( for a width of 5 pixels) :<LF>	Raised	 	Hidden	 <LF>	Bevelled	 	Step	 <LF>	Outline	 	Raised Outline	 <LF><LF><LF>-	Image Ratio is the width on height ratio of the thumbnail images of the browser. This value is 3/2 for PAL images and 4/3 for NTSC images.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out  is the configured browser image.<LF><LF>- Images per Line is the number of thumbnail images per line on the browser.<LF><LF>- Images per Column is the number of thumbnail images per column on the browser.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Configures the look and attributes of an image window<LF><LF>Window Number (0...22) selects the window to configure. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Window can grow? (Yes) enables or disables the user resize window box. Default is TRUE, which indicates user-resizable windows.<LF><LF>Window can close? (Yes) shows or does not show the close box of the window. The default is TRUE, which shows the close box.<LF><LF>Window has title bar? (Yes) shows or does not show the title bar. The default is TRUE, which shows the title bar.<LF><LF>Window is floating? (No) produces either a normal or a floating window. The default is FALSE, which produces a floating window.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Configures the shape of a brush used in ROI tracing in conjunction with freehand tools. A brush is a mask that indicates the neighborhood of pixels that are colored when painting. Normally you use a brush in which the only pixel involved in drawing is the one under the cursor. However, with this VI you can define any shape.<LF><LF>Note:	Do not use this VI in zoom mode.<LF><LF>Color LUT is an array of clusters with the following fields: Pixvalue, R, G, and B. This array of clusters changes the value of a pixel in the image, making a multicolored brush possible. The new pixel value is given by Pixvalue. On the display window, the appearance of this pixel changes to the color specified by R, G, and B.<LF><LF>This array of clusters has 256 entries. Each entry defines the following fields.<LF><LF>Pixvalue. This field indicates the new pixel value. Pixels affected include those in the last image connected to the window specified by the parameter Brush Window. When touched by the brush, each pixel that has a value equal to the array entry is changed. For example, if entry 7 of the Color LUT array parameter specifies a Pixvalue of 127, every pixel with a value of 7 that the brush touches is changed to 127.<LF><LF>R, G, and B. These three parameters specify the color on the display window of the pixels that have a value equal to Pixvalue. For example, if entry 7 of the Color LUT array parameter specifies (R = 255, G = 0, B = 0), every pixel with value 7 that the brush touches is painted red.<LF><LF>Get/Set? (Set) specifies that input parameters are set when the value is TRUE (Set). If the value is FALSE (Get), input parameters are ignored. Output parameters are always effective.<LF><LF>Brush shape in. This Boolean 2D array specifies the shape of the brush. TRUE values (in conjunction with brush width) define the pixels that are affected in your drawing. If your shape is described in a 3 × 3 grid, use a pen size of 3 for viewing a complete portion of the shape. If all values are FALSE, the brush shape is not changed.<LF><LF>Brush element size in specifies parameters that define the dimension of the brush element.<LF><LF>Brush Parameters in is a cluster consisting of the following parameters:<LF><LF>Brush Window is the number of the window in which the brush is active.<LF><LF>Density is a parameter with a value between 1 and 100 that defines the probability (D/100) that a pixel will be written. Use this parameter to generate spray effects.<LF><LF>Left 1 pix? (No) is a Boolean that specifies whether a separation pixel is used between brush elements.<LF><LF>Synchronous. If this parameter is TRUE, the drawing of the brush is denied until the previous ROI is recovered using IMAQ WindGetROI. Use this parameter to synchronize brush drawing with ROI recovering.<LF><LF>Brush active? (False) activates or deactivates the special brush feature.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Brush shape out indicates the current shape of the brush.<LF><LF>Brush element size out indicates the X and Y dimensions of the brush.<LF><LF>Brush Parameters out indicates the current settings of the brush parameters Brush Window, Density, Left 1 pix? (No), and Synchronous.<LF><LF>Brush active out indicates whether the brush is active.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Connection Speed
Connectivity
Connectivity 4/8 (8)
Constant
Constant (-32768-32767)
Constructs a convolution matrix by converting a string. This string can represent either integers or floating-point values. <LF>  <LF>Kernel String is a string listing the coefficients forming the matrix.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Kernel is the resulting matrix converted from the input string. This output can be connected directly to the input Kernel in IMAQ Convolute. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The column separator can be either a comma, a semi-colon, or a blank space. The line separator is a hard return. For example, the string 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 produces a 3 × 3 matrix with all coefficients set to 1.
Container
Container #
Container Equal Fork
Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select <LF>the Blue Container.
Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select <LF>the Yellow Container.
Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the <LF>Red Container.
Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the Blue Container.
Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the Red Container.
Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the Yellow Container.
Container Threshold
Container Value
Container fork
Container's Container
Container's Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a <LF>generic container.  You can string in a number <LF>anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 <LF>available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined <LF>container variables.
Contains the Formula string for the Formula Container.   Precedence is given for multiplication and division only.  The formula can contain:<LF>+...addition<LF>-...subtraction<LF>*...multiplication<LF>/...division<LF>&...bitwise and<LF>|...bitwise or<LF><LF> and<LF><LF>c...container [0-20]  (e.g. c0 is the red container)<LF>m...mail value<LF>r...random number with max value [1-32767]  (e.g. r5 is a # from 1 to 5)<LF>s...sensor value [1-3]  (e.g. s1 is sensor 1)<LF>t...timer [1..3]   (e.g. t1 is the red timer)<LF>w...clock value<LF><LF>For example:  s1/10 + 3*m would be one tenth of the value of sensor 1 plus three times the mail value.  Remember that all math is carried out on integers so it is an integer divide.<LF>
Contents and Index &?
Continue
Contours
Contrast
Control a motor or lamp connected to Port A.
Control a motor or lamp connected to Port B.
Control a motor or lamp connected to Port C.
Control btns
Control buttons
Controls
Controls global sound settings (allows a 'mute' functionality)<LF>and selects which scheme is currently used for system sounds.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_enable':       0 (disregard 'sound_onoff' and select <LF>                                                       'soundset_number' for the system <LF>                                                        sounds),  <LF>                                                      1 (disregard 'soundset_number' and <LF>                                                         use 'sound_onoff' to globally control<LF>                                                         all sounds).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_onoff':         0 (mute all sounds) and <LF>                                                      1 (allow sounds to pass through).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'soundset_number': 0 (NoSoundset), 1 (Basic), 2 (Bug),<LF>                                                      3 (Alarm), 4 (Random), 5 (Science).
Controls global sound settings (allows a 'mute' functionality)<LF>and selects which scheme is currently used for system sounds.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_enable':       0 (disregard 'sound_onoff' and select <LF>                                                       'soundset_number' for the system <LF>                                                        sounds),  <LF>                                                      1 (disregard 'soundset_number' and <LF>                                                         use 'sound_onoff' to globally control<LF>                                                         all sounds).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_onoff':         0 (mute all sounds) and <LF>                                                      1 (allow sounds to pass through).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'soundset_number': 0 (NoSoundset), 1 (Basic), 2 (Bug),<LF>                                                      3 (Alarm), 4 (Random), 5 (Science).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Sound_enable:  String in a modifier.<LF>Sound_onoff:  String in a modifier.<LF>Soundset_number:  String in a modifier.
Convert to array
Convert to image
Convert to picture
Convert to picture - autoscale
Converts a 16-bit image to an 8-bit image. The VI executes this conversion by shifting the 16-bit pixel values right by the specified number (from 1 to 8) of shift operations and then truncating to get an 8-bit value.<LF><LF>Shift Value specifies the number of right shifts (between 1 and 8) by which each pixel value in the input image is shifted.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the 8-bit output image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Converts an HSL or HSV color value into an RGB color value.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format conversion to perform. The default is 0, which specifies no change.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert from HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert from HSV<LF>Red (or Hue) value is the input value for the first color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Green (or Sat) value is the input value for the second color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) value is the input value for the third color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Red value is the output red value. <LF><LF>Green value is the output green value. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Blue value is the output blue value. 
Converts an RGB color value into another format (HSL or HSV).<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format conversion to perform. The default is 0, which specifies no change.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert to HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert to HSV<LF>Red value is the input red value. <LF><LF>Green value is the input green value. <LF><LF>Blue value is the input blue value. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) value is the output value for the first color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Green (or Sat) value is the output value for the second color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) value is the output value for the third color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Converts an image by using a lookup table which is encoded in floating-point values. <LF><LF>    <LF>Lookup Table is an array consisting of 256 elements maximum if Image Src has an 8-bit or a maximum of 65536 elements if the Image Src has a 16-bit image. This array is filled with values equal to the index if it has less elements than the amount demanded by the image type in Image Src. The lookup table can be used to calculate a polynomial giving a relation between a gray-level value and an user value. VIs capable of analyzing floating-point type images can be used to directly quantify an image, or regions from an image, in user values after converting the image into a floating-point type images.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image to be converted. It must be an 8-bit or 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the image that receives the conversion. The image type for Image Dst can take the following values:<LF><LF>·	16-bit if Image Src has an 8-bit image<LF><LF>·	32-bit floating point if Image Src has an 8-bit or 16-bit image <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Converts clusters composed of three colors in mode (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) into colors encoded in the form of an unsigned 32-bit integer control. The elements of these clusters can contain single values, 1D arrays, 2D arrays, or a combination of the above.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the output. The default is 0, which specifies that the input and output values are the same.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert to HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert to HSV<LF>Color Value is a cluster containing a color in (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Red (Hue) Value is the first color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Green (Sat) Value is the second color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Blue (Light,Val) Value is the third color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>1D Color value array is a 1D array of clusters containing the color values. The values are in (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) depending on the status of the set Color Mode. These clusters are the same type as Color Value.<LF><LF>2D Color value array is a 2D array of clusters containing the color values. The values are in (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) depending on the status of the set Color Mode. These clusters are the same type as Color Value.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>U32 value receives the color value resulting from the input Color Value and it is encoded as an unsigned 32-bit integer control.<LF><LF>1D U32 array receives the color value resulting from the input 1D Color Value Array and it is encoded as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>2D U32 array receives the color value resulting from the input 2D Color Value Array and it is encoded as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Converts colors in the form of an unsigned 32-bit integer control into a cluster composed of the three colors in mode (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V). These colors can be entered as a single value, a 1D array, a 2D array, or a combination of the above.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the output. The default is 0, which specifies that the input and output values are the same.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert to HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert to HSV<LF>U32 value a color value encoded as an unsigned 32-bit integer control.<LF><LF>1D U32 array a set of color values encoded as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>2D U32 array a set of color values encoded as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Color Value is a cluster containing the color value resulting from the input U32 Value. This cluster can contain the values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V), depending on the status of the set Color Mode. The cluster is composed of the following elements.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Value is the first color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Value is the second color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Value is the third color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>1D Color value array is a 1D array containing the color value resulting from the input 1D U32 Array. This array can contain the values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V), depending on the status of the set Color Mode. <LF><LF>2D Color value array is a 2D array containing the color value resulting from the input 2D U32 Array. This array can contain the values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V), depending on the status of the set Color Mode. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Converts the current image type of an image to the image type specified by Image Type. <LF>        	<LF>Image is both the image to be converted (input) and the image that receives the conversion (output). With this VI, only the image type of the image changes. The conversion rules are the same as described in IMAQ Convert.<LF><LF>Image Type determines into what image type the input Image is converted. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>  0		8 bits per pixel (unsigned, standard monochrome)<LF>  1		16 bits per pixel (signed)<LF>  2		32 bits (floating point) per pixel<LF>  3	unused	<LF>  4		32 bits per pixel (RGB chunky, standard color)<LF>  5	unused	<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the input image with the new image type.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The conversion rules are the same as the rules for IMAQ Convert.
Converts the image type specified by Image Src into the image type specified by Image Dst.<LF>        	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The conversion rules are performed as a function of the image type specified by Image Src and Image Dst. The image type encoded by Image Dst defines the how the conversion is performed. The conversion rules are described in the following table.<LF><LF>   	Pixel values are recopied (0 to 255).<LF>   	Pixel values are copied into each of the three color planes    (red, green, and blue).<LF>  	Pixel values less than 0 are set to 0. <LF>   Pixel values between 0 and 255 are recopied.<LF>   Pixel values greater than 255 are set to 255.<LF>  	Pixel values are recopied (–32768 to 32767).<LF>  	Pixel values are copied into each of the three color planes (red,    <LF>  green, and blue) with the same conversion rule as 16-bit to 8-bit.<LF>  Pixel values less than 0 are set to 0.<LF>  Pixel values between 0 and 255 are recopied. <LF>  Pixel values greater than 255 are forced to 255.<LF>	 Pixel values less than –32768 are set to –32768.<LF>  Pixel values between –32768 and 32767 are recopied.<LF>  Pixel values greater than 32767 are set to 32767.<LF>     	Same conversion rule as 16-bit to RGB.
Converts the pixel values of an image by replacing them with values from a defined lookup table. This VI modifies the dynamic range of either part of an image or the complete image, depending on the type of curve chosen. <LF>    	  <LF>Note:	This VI is fundamental for many image processing procedures. You can use this VI with 8-bit and 16-bit images to create your own lookup table. You can then apply your new curve with the VI IMAQ UserLookup.<LF><LF>Range is a cluster containing the minimum and maximum values for the range to modify. The dynamic range of the entire image is modified if this cluster is not connected (or the defaults 0 and 0 are used as input). The dynamic range of the destination image is dependent on the type of input image. The dynamic range for an 8-bit image is between 0 and 255. The dynamic range for 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images is the smallest and largest pixel value contained in the original image prior to processing. The default is (0, 0). <LF><LF>Note:	The dynamic range for 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images is not modified. Only the distribution of the values is changed. <LF><LF>The following elements are specified in the Range cluster.<LF><LF> Minimum is the smallest value used for processing. After     <LF> processing, all pixel values that are less than or equal to the  <LF> Minimum (in the original image) are set to 0 for an 8-bit image. In  <LF> 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to  <LF> the smallest pixel value found in the original image.<LF>	<LF> Maximum is the largest value used for processing. After  <LF> processing, all pixel values that are greater than or equal to the <LF> Maximum (in the original image) are set to 255 for an 8-bit image. In   <LF> 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to <LF> the largest pixel value found in the original image.<LF><LF>X Value is a value used only for the operators Power X and Power 1/X.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Operator specifies the remapping procedure used. The horizontal axis represents the pixel values before processing (between<LF><LF>Minimum and Maximum) and the vertical axis represents the pixel values (between Dynamic Minimum and Dynamic Maximum) after processing. The default is 0, which specifies linear remapping.<LF><LF>   0	Linear 	Linear remapping.<LF>   1	Log	A logarithmic remapping operation that gives extended   <LF>     contrast for small pixel values and less contrast for large pixel    <LF>     values.<LF>   2	Exp	An exponential remapping operation that gives extended <LF>      contrast for large pixel values and less contrast for small pixel    <LF>     values.<LF>   3	Square	Similar to Exponential but with a more gradual effect.<LF>   4	Square Root 	Similar to Logarithmic but with a more gradual <LF>     effect. <LF>   5	Power X 	Gives variable effects depending on the value of X.   <LF>     The default value of X is 1.5.<LF>  6	Power 1/X 	Gives variable effects depending on the value of X.      <LF>     The default value of X is 1.5.<LF><LF>Note:	For an 8-bit image, the minimum is always 0 and the maximum is always 255. For 32-bit floating-point images, the minimum and maximum are the endpoint values found in the image prior to processing. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Coordinate  Origin
Coordinate Angle (deg)
Coordinate Points
Coordinate Reference
Coordinate of the current pixel on the X-axis.
Coordinate of the current pixel on the Y-axis.
Coordinates
Coordinates (screen)
Coordinates out of space?
Copies a C character string to a G programming language string. In LabVIEW 4.0 and BridgeVIEW 1.0, the Call Library function does not directly support entry points returning a character pointer (char*). This VI allows the use of a char* pointer to get the associated string.<LF><LF>char* is the C character string pointer. The end of the character string is marked with a 0 (\00) value. The following table gives the pointer type for different platforms.<LF><LF>Platform	Pointer Type<LF>   IMAQ Vision for LabVIEW 4 for Windows 3.1	16-bit FAR<LF>   Other platforms	32-bit flat (universal type)<LF>The copied string size is limited to 65536 bytes.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>G programming language string is a G programming language string containing all characters before \00 (end of string mark in C).<LF>	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Copies a memory zone in a G programming language string. In LabVIEW 4.0 and BridgeVIEW 1.0, the Call Library function does not directly manipulate a C structure; this VI provides this function.<LF><LF>void* is the pointer on the memory zone to be copied. The following table gives the pointer type for different platforms.<LF><LF>Platform	Pointer Type<LF>    IMAQ Vision for LabVIEW 4 for Windows 3.1	16-bit FAR<LF>    Other platforms	32-bit flat (universal type)<LF>The size of the memory zone is not limited.<LF><LF>Bytes count is the number of bytes to be copied in the G programming language string.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Data string is the G programming language string containing the bytes of the specified memory zone.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Copies a small image into part of another larger image. This VI is useful for making thumbnail sketches from multiple miniature images. <LF>      	<LF>Offset Left/Top is an array specifying the Image Dst pixel coordinates that receive the image copied from Image Src.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Copies the clipboard data into an image.<LF>  	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out contains a copy of the clipboard if the clipboard is an image. <LF>	<LF>Color Palette is the color palette that is stored in the clipboard. A gray ramp is returned if no color palette is found in the clipboard.<LF><LF>Clipboard has an image? returns a TRUE value if the clipboard contains an image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Copies the image to the clipboard.<LF>  	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Color Palette can be affected to an 8-bit image. It can be directly taken from the output of IMAQ GetPalette or the user can specify their own. It is formed from an array of clusters composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of affecting a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained. (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white). By default the palette is a gray-scale ramp. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Copies the specifications and pixels of one image into another image of the same type. This function is used for keeping an original copy of an image (for example, before processing an image).<LF>        	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note :	The images to be copied must be the same type. The full definition of the source image as well as the pixel data are copied to the destination image. The border size of the destination image also is modified be equal to that of the source image.
Copyright 1997 by Tufts University
Copyright 1998 Tufts University
Copyright 1998 by Tufts University
Core Area
Correlation
Correlations
Count
Counter (0,1,2)
Counter 0 on limit
Counter 1 on limit
Cover
Create IMAQ
Create Subroutine
Create Theme
Create a Program for taking data with the RCX.
Create a new Theme:<FONT color=FFFF00> 
Create a new subroutine with this command. <LF>Run the subroutine elsewhere in the program with the Run Subroutine command.  The subroutine will not run at this point in the program.<LF><LF>The main program follows the top string.<LF>The subroutine consists of the bottom string.<LF>The default subroutine is subroutine 0.<LF><LF>Note: Each subroutine that splits off will need its own separate End command (Red Traffic Light).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Subroutine Number: String in a number to define your subroutine.  You can have up to 8 different subroutines.<LF>
Creates a color image from a 2D array. This VI receives the values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls. A 2D array of clusters coding the three color values as either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) can be converted into a 2D array of pixels (unsigned 32-bit integer controls) using the VI IMAQ ColorValueToInteger.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels contains the pixel values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Creates a complex image, starting from a complex 2D array ([CSG]).<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the complex image to be created.<LF>	<LF>Image Pixels (Complex) is the complex 2D array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that form the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the image is equal to the size of the array. The image passed in the input Image is forced to the same size as the complex 2D array encoded by Input Pixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Creates an image from a 2D array. <LF>    	<LF>Note:	For this VI, you have a choice of inputs, depending on how the data is encoded (see the following descriptions). <LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (U8) is a 2D array  (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that form the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final  size of the image is  equal to the size of the array. The image passed in the input image is forced to the same size as the array encoded by <LF>Input Pixels. This input should only be used to create an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (I16) is a 2D array of 16-bit integers. This input must be used if the image connected is a 16-bit image. This input should only be used to create a 16-bit signed image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (Float) is a 2D array of floating-point values. This input must be used if the image connected is a 32-bit floating-point image. This input only should be used to create single plane images that are not encoded as 8-bit, 16-bit signed, or complex.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>See the additional VIs in the Complex VIs section for performing array-to-image transformations with complex images.
Creates an image mask by extracting a region surrounding a reference pixel, called the origin, and using a tolerance (+ or –) of intensity variations based on this reference pixel. Using this origin, the VI searches for its neighbors with an intensity equal to, or falling within the tolerance value, of the point of reference. The resulting image is binary. The image passed as input for Image Dst must be an 8-bit image. If the same image is entered for Image Src and <LF>Image Dst then both must be 8-bit images.<LF>    	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) determines the type of connectivity to be used by the algorithm creating the mask. The default is 8.<LF>	<LF>Fill Value is the value that is used for the lit pixels in the destination image. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be an 8-bit or RGB image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. It must be and <LF>8-bit image.<LF><LF>Hot spot (x,y) is an array counting the (x, y) coordinates of the origin pixel chosen from the image source. <LF><LF>Tolerance is the maximum authorized deviation from the origin. All pixels satisfying the tolerance criteria (origin pixel – tolerance / origin pixel + tolerance) and connectivity criteria, as specified in Connectivity 4/8 (8), are lit and all other pixels are turned off. The default is 20.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Creates an image.<LF><LF>Border Size: determines the width in pixels of the border created around an image. These pixels are used only for specific VIs. You should create a border at the beginning of your application if an image is to be processed later using functions that require a border (for example, labeling and morphology). The default value, 0, creates no border. To optimize transfer time, especially for real-time acquisition, use a border that is an even number of pixels wide. <LF><LF>Image Name: is a name that is associated with the created image. Each image created must have a unique name.<LF><LF>	Image Type: specifies the image type. This input can accept the following values:<LF><LF>  0		8 bits per pixel (unsigned, standard monochrome)<LF>  1		16 bits per pixel (signed)<LF>  2		32 bits (floating point) per pixel<LF>  3		2 × 32 bits (floating point) per pixel (native format after an FFT)<LF>  4		32 bits per pixel (RGB chunky, standard color)<LF><LF>error in (no error): is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>	New Image: is the Image structure that is supplied as input to all subsequent (downstream) functions used by IMAQ Vision. Multiple images can be created in a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW application. Activating the IMAQ ImageStatus VI shows you all created images and the space they occupy in memory during the execution of your application. <LF><LF>error out: is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Ctrl
Currect Source
Current
Current LogIT
Current Note
Current Page
Current Path
Current Template
Current Theme
Current page
Cursor 0
Cursor 1
Cursor 2
Curve Fit
Curve fit order
Curves fit to Data Sets
Cutoff Acceleration (m/s/s)
Cutoff Accelertation (m/s/s)
Cutoff Angle (degrees)
Cutoff Brightness (%)
Cutoff Clicks
Cutoff Humidity (%RH)
Cutoff Lux (Lux)
Cutoff Position (degrees)
Cutoff Pressure (hPa)
Cutoff Pressure (kPa)
Cutoff Rotation (sixteenths)
Cutoff Sound Level (dB)
Cutoff Temperature (C)
Cutoff Temperature (F)
Cutoff Voltage (V)
Cutoff Voltage (mV)
Cutoff pH
Cutoff value
D#
DCP Humidity
DCP Light
DCP SPL
DCP Temperature
DEL
DIsplay
DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE
Damping
Dark
Dash
DashDot
DashDotDot
Data
Data Array
Data Logging Interval
Data Points Equal Fork
Data Points Fork
Data Rate
Data Set
Data Set  Number
Data Set 1
Data Set 2
Data Set In
Data Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the <LF>Blue Data Set.
Data Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the <LF>Red Data Set.
Data Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the <LF>Yellow Data Set.
Data Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the Blue Data Set.
Data Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the Red Data Set.
Data Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the Yellow Data Set.
Data Set Value
Data Set values between cutoffs
Data Sets
Data Sets Compared
Data Sets Extracted
Data Sets In
Data Sets Out
Data string
DataPrint
Database
Date Modified
Debug Mode
Decimal point
Dedicated to Oma, Dan, and Anne - CBR, MDP and JPO
Def Sensor
Default Path
Defaults
Define Event
Define Sensor
Define how many seconds you want to wait (resolution is 10 msec).
Define sensor
Defines a pen with user specified features. The user pen affects each region tracked with the freehand tools. No other ROI selection tools work with user pen.<LF><LF>Paint mode indicates the mode of painting in zoom mode. Paint mode has three possible values: don't change, Paint, or Frame.<LF><LF>Note:	This mode is useful only in positive zoom mode greater than 3: in this mode the ROI is tracked using pen size 1 and ignoring the pen width value.<LF><LF>Pen transfer mode describes the mode in which the foreground and the background of the pen affect the image. Pen transfer mode has four possible values:<LF><LF>don't change	(Default)<LF>srcCopy	Overwrites the background and foreground with specified colors.<LF>srcOr	Overwrites only the foreground.<LF>srxXor	Inverts the pixels below the foreground pixels. The new value equals 255 minus the old value; this operation occurs for each plane of an RGB image.<LF>srcBic	Forces the background color on foreground pixels.<LF>Pen style specifies the pen style. Pen style has six possible values: Don't change (default), Solid, Dash, Dot, DashDot, and DashDotDot.<LF><LF>Foreground Color specifies the color of the foreground pixels. Use a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW color box for color specification.<LF><LF>Background Color specifies the color of the background pixels. Use a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW color box for color specification.<LF><LF>Pen pattern (8x8). This Boolean 2D array describes the pattern associated with the user pen. TRUE value is associated to foreground, while FALSE is associated to background. The pattern is always an 8 × 8 matrix. The default is FALSE, which specifies that the current pattern is not changed.<LF><LF>User pen active? (no) enables the pen when set to TRUE. The default value is FALSE, which specifies the use of the standard pen.<LF><LF>Pen width specifies the pen width. The default value is 0, which specifies no change.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	In zoom mode greater than 3, the values of Paint mode and Pen style are ignored.
Defines the position of an image mask in relation to the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0). <LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Offset specifies the horizontal offset of the image mask.<LF><LF>Y Offset specifies the vertical offset of the image mask.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Defines the sensor and the type of data acquired by the sensor connected to Port 1.
Defines the sensor and the type of data acquired by the sensor connected to Port 2.
Defines the sensor and the type of data acquired by the sensor connected to Port 3.
Defines the settings for Enter (low, normal, and high) events<LF><LF>If an event doesn't use a specification than it is ignored (example: Enter Low Event only uses the lower threshold so all others are ignored).<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers<LF><LF>Hysteresis: A non-zero hysteresis means that the trigger value for increasing sensor values is different from the trigger value if the sensor value is decreasing.<LF><LF>Upper Threshold: String in the value to be used for upper threshold<LF>(Enter Normal and Enter High Events)<LF> <LF>Lower Threshold: String in the value to be used for lower threshold<LF>(Enter Normal and Enter Low Events)<LF><LF>Event: String in the event you are defining settings for:  red, yellow, blue<LF><LF>Duration: The minimum time event must happen to count as an event (time in seconds).<LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF>
Defines the settings for Enter (low, normal, and high)<LF>events<LF><LF>If an event doesn't use a specification than it is ignored<LF>(example: Enter Low Event only uses the lower threshold<LF>so all others are ignored).<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers<LF><LF>Hysteresis: A non-zero hysteresis means that the trigger value for<LF>increasing sensor values is different from the trigger value if thesensor value is decreasing.<LF><LF>Upper Threshold: String in the value to be used for upper threshold(Enter Normal and Enter High Events)<LF> <LF>Lower Threshold: String in the value to be used for lower threshold<LF>(Enter Normal and Enter Low Events)<LF><LF>Event: String in the event you are defining settings for:  red, yellow, blue<LF><LF>Duration: The minimum time event must happen to count as an event (time in seconds).<LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF>
Defines the total duration of the note
Defines the type of sensor used.
Delete
Delete Page
Delete Subroutine
Delete Task(s)
Delete Theme
Delete all Tasks
Delete any Subroutine that has been created.<LF><LF>The default subroutine is to delete subroutine 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Subroutine Number: String in a number (0-7) to pick which subroutine to delete.<LF>
Deletes all tasks in current program level.
Deletes one or all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>The default is to delete all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to delete.  
Density
Depending on the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>, this VI can be used to fill holes and smooth right angles along the edges of particles.
Depending on the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>, this VI can be used to remove single pixels isolated in the background and right angles along the edges of particles.
Depending on the value of Connectivity, this <LF>VI can be used to fill holes and smooth right angles <LF>along the edges of particles.
Depending on the value of Connectivity, this <LF>VI can be used to remove single pixels isolated in the <LF>background and right angles along the edges of <LF>particles.
Describe
Describe Page
Describe Project
Description
Description 1
Destroys an image and the frees of the space it occupied in memory. <LF><LF>Image: is the name of the image to be destroyed.<LF><LF>	All Images ? (No): determines whether the user wants to destroy a single image or all previously created images. Giving a TRUE value on input destroys all images previously created. The default is FALSE. This function must be used at the end of an application to free the memory occupied by the images.<LF><LF>	error in (no error): is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out: is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	When a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW application is aborted the image space remains occupied. 
Detects and measures particles. This VI returns a set of measurements made from particles in a binary image. <LF>  <LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the matrices. The image must be binary. A particle is considered to consist of pixels that do not contain a null (0) value. The source image must have been created with a border size of at least 2. <LF>	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies the type of connectivity used by the algorithm for particle detection. The connectivity mode directly determines whether an adjacent pixel belongs to the same particle or a different particle. The default is 8. The following values are possible.<LF><LF>  TRUE	Connectivity 8	(Default) Particle detection is performed in    <LF>  connectivity mode 8.<LF>  FALSE	Connectivity 4	Particle detection is performed in   <LF>  connectivity mode 4.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Complex Reports is an array that returns a set of measurements from the detected particles. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>  Area (pixels) indicates the surface area of a particle in number of <LF>  pixels. <LF>	<LF>   Area (calibrated) indicates the surface area of a particle in   <LF>   user-defined units. <LF><LF>  	Perimeter is the perimeter size in user units. <LF>	<LF>  Number of Holes is the number of holes in the particle. <LF><LF>  	Hole's Area (pixels) is the total surface area of all the holes in a   <LF>  particle (in pixels). <LF><LF>	  Hole's Perimeter is the total perimeter size calculated from all the <LF>   holes in a particle (in user units).<LF><LF>  Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a  <LF>  bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes <LF>  the following parameters:<LF><LF>       x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>      rectangle.<LF>	<LF>       y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>       rectangle.<LF><LF>      	x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>       the rectangle.<LF>        <LF>       	y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner <LF>        of the rectangle.<LF><LF>  Sum x is the sum of the X-axis for each pixel of the particle. <LF>	<LF> Sum y is the sum of the Y-axis for each pixel of the particle. <LF><LF>	 Sum xx is the sum of the X-axis squared for each pixel of the   <LF>  particle.<LF><LF> 	Sum yy is the sum of the Y-axis squared for each pixel of the<LF>   particle.<LF><LF>  	Sum xy is the sum of the X-axis and Y-axis for each pixel of the <LF>   particle.<LF>	<LF>  Longest Segment Length is the longest segment length of the <LF>   particle.<LF><LF>    Longest Segment Coordinates are the coordinates of the left <LF>    most pixel in the Longest Segment Length of the particle. The <LF>    topmost segment coordinates are used in a case in which more <LF>    than one   <LF> <LF>   Longest Segment Length exist. This cluster contains the following   <LF>   parameters:<LF><LF>           x is the x-axis (coordinate) of the pixel the furthest left in the <LF>            Longest Segment Length in the particle.<LF><LF>            	y is the y-axis (coordinate) of the pixel the furthest left in the <LF>             Longest Segment Length in the particle.<LF><LF>     Projection x is half the sum of the horizontal segments in a    <LF>     particle that do not overlap another adjacent horizontal   <LF>     segment. <LF><LF>     	Projection y is half the sum of the vertical segments in a particle <LF>      that do not overlap another adjacent vertical segment.<LF><LF>Number of Particles returns the number of detected particles. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Detects and measures particles. This VI returns the area and position of particles in a binary image. <LF>  <LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the matrices. The image must be binary. A particle is considered to consist of pixels that do not contain a null (0) value. The source image must have been created with a border size of at least 2.<LF>	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies the type of connectivity used by the algorithm for particle detection. The connectivity mode directly determines whether an adjacent pixel belongs to the same particle or a different particle. The default is 8. The following values are possible:<LF><LF>  TRUE	Connectivity 8	(Default) Particle detection is performed in <LF>  connectivity mode 8.<LF>  <LF>  FALSE	Connectivity 4	Particle detection is performed in   <LF>  connectivity mode 4.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Basic Reports is an array that returns a set of measurements from the detected particles. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>Area (pixels) indicates the surface area of a particle in number of pixels. <LF>	<LF>Area (calibrated) indicates the surface area of a particle in user-defined units. <LF>	<LF>Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes the following parameters:<LF><LF>   	x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the   <LF>    rectangle.<LF>	   y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the  <LF>    rectangle.<LF>	  x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of   <LF>   the rectangle.<LF>	  y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner of   <LF>   the rectangle.<LF><LF>Number of Particles returns the number of pixels detected in a particle.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Detects the rotational shift between two images. This process is generally applied between a Reference Image (with the inspected part at a known orientation) and another image, corresponding to the unknown position of the part. The process extract the pixel values around a circular region of the Reference Image. These values are compared to the same region on the Image 2. The algorithm looks for the rotational shift between those two samples. In order to speed up the process, the requested precision of the result can be adjusted. <LF><LF>- 	Reference Image is the reference of the image to be processed. This image represents the inspected part in a known position.<LF><LF>- 	Image 2 is the reference of the image to be processed. This image represents the inspected part in the searched position.<LF><LF>-  Reference Center are the Point Coordinates of the center of a circular region on the reference image. The pixel values of this region on the reference images are used to detect the rotation angle between the two images.<LF><LF>- 	Image 2 Center are the Point Coordinates of the center of a circular region in Image 2. The pixel values of this region in image 2 are used to detect the rotation angle between the two images.<LF><LF>- 	Radius of the circular region in the image. The pixel values of this region on the two images are used to detect the rotation angle between the two images.<LF><LF>- 	Precision (Default = 5) is the sampling period (in degrees) of the pixel values of the circular region. The aim of this control is to speed up the process. A precision better than 5 degrees is not often needed to position the regions of inspection of a part.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF><LF>- 	Angle (rad) returns the angle (in radian) corresponding to the shift giving the best match between the two samples.<LF><LF>- 	Angle (deg) returns the angle (in degrees) corresponding to the shift giving the best match between the two samples.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Determines the maximum value in a Data Set and <LF>displays a line at the corresponding value on the graph.
Determines the minimum value in a Data Set and <LF>displays a line at corresponding value on the graph.
Device
Diagonal
Diagram
Dialog box
Diameter (pixels)
Differentiate
Differentiated Data Sets
Dilation
Direct
Direct Commands
Direct Mode
Direction
Direction (NW)
Display
Displays an image in an image window. The image window appears automatically when the VI is executed. Note that by default the image window does not have scroll bars. Scroll bars can be added by using the IMAQ WindSizeVI.<LF>        	<LF>Window Number (0...15) specifies the image window in which the image is displayed. As many as 16 windows can be displayed simultaneously. Each window is specified with an indicator ranging from 0 to 15. Only the specified image window is affected, and all other image windows remain the same. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Image specifies the image reference for the displayed image. <LF><LF>Note:	16-bit and floating-point images can be displayed by using an 8-bit image buffer (Tmp). This 8-bit image buffer, used only to display the image, is calculated as a function of the dynamic range from the image source. The minimum value (min) and the maximum value (max) are calculated automatically. Then the following formula is applied to each pixel:<LF><LF>Tmp(x, y) = (Src(x – y)–Min) × 255/(Max – Min).<LF><LF>Title is an image window name. If a string is attached to this input then the image window automatically takes that name. The default name for the image window is Image #<<Window Number>>.<LF>	<LF>Color Palette is used to apply a color palette to an image window. Color Palette is an array of clusters constructed by the user or supplied by IMAQ GetPalette. This palette is composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of applying a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained. (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white).<LF><LF>Note: A color palette is not used for a true color image (RGB).<LF><LF>You should use a screen capable of displaying thousands (15/16-bit) or 16 million colors (24-bit). Currently, LabVIEW and BridgeVIEW do not display a full palette of 256 colors (or gray scales) unless your monitor has a display capability of 16 million colors. A true color image does not use a display palette and therefore displays in true color if your monitor is in a 24-bit display mode.<LF><LF>(Macintosh only) You can change the palette tolerance in a Macintosh or Power Macintosh. You can display a full palette of 256 colors (or gray scales) even with an 8-bit display mode. In this case it is necessary to pass by the IMAQ PaletteTolerance VI and change from Tolerant mode to Exact mode.<LF><LF>Resize to Image Size? (Y) specifies whether the user wants to resize the image window automatically to fit the image size. The default is set to TRUE (Yes), in which case the user does not have to know the size of a source image prior to displaying it. <LF><LF>Note:	You must use the IMAQ WindSize function to place scroll bars in an image window.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Displays an image using an isometric view. Each pixel from the image source is represented as a column of pixels in the 3D view. The pixel value corresponds to the altitude.<LF>  	<LF>3D Options is a cluster containing the elements alpha, beta, border, background, and plane.<LF><LF>alpha defines the angle between the horizontal and the base line (see figure). The value can be between 0° and 45°. The default value is 30°.<LF>	<LF>beta defines the angle between, the horizontal and the second baseline. The value can be between 0° and 45°. The default value is 30°.<LF>	<LF>border defines the border size in the 3D view. The default value is 20.<LF>	<LF>background defines the background color for the 3D view. The default is 85.<LF><LF>plane specifies the view to display if the image is complex. There are four possible planes that can be visualized from a complex image. For complex images, the default is the magnitude.<LF><LF>  0	real<LF>  1	imaginary<LF>  2	(Default) magnitude<LF>  3	phase<LF><LF>Direction (NW) defines the viewing orientation shown for the 3D view. Four viewing angles are possible. The default is North-West.<LF><LF>  0	(Default) North-West<LF>  1	South-West<LF>  2	South-East<LF>  3	North-East<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst must be an 8-bit image.<LF>	<LF>Size reduction is a factor applied to the source image to calculate the final dimensions of the 3D view image. This factor is a divisor that is applied to the source image when determining the final height and width of the 3D view image. A factor of 1 uses all of the pixels of the source image when determining the 3D view image. A factor of 2 uses every other line and every other column of the pixels of the source image to determine the 3D view image. The default is 2.<LF><LF>Maximum height defines the maximum height of a pixel from the image source that is drawn in 3D. This value is mapped from a maximum of 255 (from the source image) in relation to the baseline in the 3D view. A value of 255, therefore, gives a one-to-one correspondence between the intensity value in the source image and the display in 3D view. The default value of 64 results in a reduction of 4-fold between the original intensity value of the pixel in the source image and the final displayed 3D image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Displays the value the sensor reads.
Displays the value the sensor reads. 
Displays uploaded data as a table.
Dispose IMAQ
Distance  
Distances
Divide
Divide Container
Divide the container by a number.  <LF>The default is to divide the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to divide:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>divided.
Divide the container by a number. (This is an integer divide)<LF>The default is to divide the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Note:  Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to divide:  String a number to which the container will be divided.
Divider
Divider (kernel sum)
Divides one image by another or an image by a constant.<LF>    	  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is divided by the Constant value for image-constant operations. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Divides one image by another where the first is a complex image, or divides a complex image by a complex constant. <LF>  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is divided by this complex constant for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Note:	Division by 0 is not allowed. If the constant is 0, it automatically is replaced by 1. If one of the two source images is empty, the result is a copy of the other.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B s the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations. <LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) ¸ SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) ¸ Constant.
Do you want to save changes to your project?
Don't Read Raw File 
Don't Save
Don't Use TIFF Options
Done
Done/Running
Done?
Dot
Double Click here to open an Invent and Investigate Project.
Double click
Double click on a page name to select or deselect it.  Deselected pages will not be published.  <LF><LF>To change the order of the pages click on the page name.  While holding the mouse button down drag the page to the desired location.
Double-Click on a Pilot Level to open a default PILOT program.<LF><LF>Click on Pilot Vault to view all Pilot 3 and Pilot 4 programs in the Program window for a particular theme.<LF><LF>Single-Click on Pilot 3 or Pilot 4 to view the themes in the Themes window that correspond to that Pilot Level.
Double-Click on an Inventor Level to program the RCX with that Inventor Level.<LF><LF>Click on Inventor Vault to view all Inventor programs in the Program window for a particular theme.<LF><LF>Single-Click on an Inventor Level to view the programs in the Program window that correspond to that Inventor Level and Theme.
Double-Click on the name of a program to launch that program with Inventor.<LF><LF>To delete a program, highlight it and hit the F10 key.
Double-Click on the name of a program to launch that program with Pilot.<LF><LF>To delete a program, highlight it and hit the F10 key.
Down 2
Down an Octave
Download Firmware
Download Remote Program
Download s sequence of commands as a program to remote RCX(S)<LF><LF>Commands located between this command and  Start Direct RCX Communication will be downloaded to the remote RCX(s) as a program.
Download s sequence of commands as a<LF> program to remote RCX(S)<LF><LF>Commands located between this command and <LF>Start Direct RCX Communication will be downloaded<LF>to the remote RCX(s) as a program.<LF>
Downloads
Draw
Draw Flattened Pixmap
Draw Mode
Draw event
Draws geometric objects in an image.<LF>    	<LF>Draw Mode defines how to draw the object and has the following choices: <LF><LF>   0	Frame	(Default) Specifies the use of Pixel Color in tracing the   <LF>     contour.<LF>   1	Paint	Specifies the use of Pixel Color in tracing the contour and <LF>     the interior of the shape.<LF>   2	Invert Frame	Specifies the use of the inverse of the pixel values        <LF>     when drawing the contour.<LF>  3	Invert Paint	Specifies the use of the inverse of the pixel values      <LF>     when drawing the contour and the interior of the shape.<LF><LF>Pixel Color is the pixel value used for tracing the design. This value is not used when in the mode Invert Frame or Invert Paint. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Coordinates is an array of four elements. A line is specified by the two points forming it. Rectangles and ovals are specified by their bounding rectangle, possessing the format (Left / Top / Right / Bottom). In these cases, the tracing of a rectangle or oval stops at the column (Right - 1) and at the row (Bottom - 1). The values by default are (0, 0, SizeX, SizeY) where (SizeX, SizeY) is the resolution of the image. The default is used if the input is 0 or is not connected. <LF><LF>Shape to draw is the form to draw. The following shapes are available: <LF><LF>   0	Line	(Default) Defined by the two points specified in the array <LF>     Coordinates.<LF>   1	Rectangle	Defined by the bounding rectangle specified in the <LF>     array Coordinates.<LF>  2	Oval	Defined by the bounding rectangle specified in the array    <LF>     Coordinates.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Draws the contours of a ROI descriptor in a LabVIEW picture.<LF>Note: This function needs the Picture Control toolkit in order to be executable.<LF><LF>-  	Picture in is the picture to which you want to add the contours of the ROI descriptor. It defaults to an empty picture if you do not wire it.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G.<LF><LF>- 	Point Symbol is an optional control. This 2D array of boolean represents the shape used to symbolize a point ROI. The default value is a cross of size 7 x 7 pixels.<LF><LF>- 	Color (red) is an array of  numerical values coding the color of each contour of the ROI descriptor. If you want the contours to be drawn in the same color, enter only one color element. By default, the first color element is set to red color so that all the contours will be drawn in red.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	New Picture is the returned LabVIEW picture.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Duplicate
Duration
Duration 
Duration (-32768 -  32767)
Duration (0-15)
Duration (sec)
Duration Value
Dwnld
ERROR
Edge Coordinates
Edge Information
Edge Parameters
Edge1 Contrast
Edge1 Position
Edge2 Contrast
Edge2 Position
Edges Coordinates
Edit Blue
Edit Red
Edit Yellow
Eighth note
Eliminates or keeps particles resistant to a specified number of 3 × 3 erosions. The particles that are kept are exactly the same as those found in the original source image. The source image must be an 8-bit binary image. This function requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is twice the size of the source image. <LF>  <LF>Connectivity 4/ 8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Number of Erosion specifies the number of 3 × 3 erosions to apply to the image. The default is 2.<LF><LF>Low Pass/High Pass (Low) specifies whether the objects resistant to n erosions are discarded or kept (default).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Eliminates particles that touch the border of an image. The source image must be an 8-bit binary. This operation requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is equal to the size of the source image.<LF>  <LF>Connectivity 4/ 8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Empty
Empty Container
Empty Mailbox
Empty the mailbox and wait until mail received from another RCX is equal to a given number.<LF>The default is to wait for any non-zero number to be received.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until mail equals:  String in a number <LF>to wait for.
Empty the mailbox and wait until mail received from another RCX is equal to a given number.<LF>The default is to wait for any non-zero number to be received.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until mail equals:  String in a number to wait for.
Enabled?
Encodes a pixel value of a particle as a function of the location of that pixel in relation to the distance to the border of the particle. The source image must have been created with a border size of at least 1 and must be an 8-bit binary image. This function requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is twice the size of the source image.<LF>  <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
End
End (# of Rotations is << or = )
End (# of Rotations is =)
End (# of Rotations is >>)
End (# of Rotations is not = )
End (# touch and releases are =)
End (# touch and releases are not =)
End (% Relative Humidity is << or = )
End (% Relative Humidity is >> )
End (Clicks is << or =)
End (Clicks is >>)
End (Clock is << or = )
End (Clock is =)
End (Clock is >>)
End (Clock is not = )
End (Container is << or = )
End (Container is =)
End (Container is =) 
End (Container is >>)
End (Container is not = )
End (Count is << or =)
End (Count is >>)
End (FALSE)
End (Light is << or = )
End (Light is = )
End (Light is >>)
End (Light is not = )
End (Lux is << or = )
End (Lux is >> )
End (Mail is << or = )
End (Mail is =)
End (Mail is >>)
End (Mail is not =)
End (Number of Clicks is =)
End (Number of Clicks is not =)
End (Number of Points is = )
End (Number of Points is not = ) 
End (Points is << or = ) 
End (Points is >> )
End (Pressure is << or = )
End (Pressure is >> )
End (TRUE)
End (Temp << or =)
End (Temp >>)
End (Temp is = )
End (Temp is =)
End (Temp is not = )
End (Temp is not =)
End (Temperature (Celsius) is >> )
End (Temperature (Celsius)is << or = )
End (Value of Timer is << or = ) 
End (Value of Timer is = )
End (Value of Timer is >> )
End (Value of Timer is not = )
End (Volts is << or = )
End (Volts is >> )
End (container is not =)
End (dB is >> )
End (degrees are << or = )
End (degrees are >> )
End (hPa is << or = )
End (hPa is >> )
End (m/s/s is << or = )
End (m/s/s is >> )
End (mV is << or = )
End (mV is >> )
End (pH is << or = )
End (pH is >> )
End (pushed in)
End (released)
End 1
End 2
End Direct Mode
End Direct RCX Communcation
End Internet Direct Mode
End Task or Sub
End an Inventor program being downloaded over the internet.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every Internet Inventor program and will send the program to an RCX that is on a remote computer.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need the End command at the end of each task.   Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.<LF><LF>
End an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every <LF>Inventor program.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need <LF>the End command at the end of each task.
End an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every Inventor program and will send the program to an RCX that is on a remote computer.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need the End command at the end of each task.  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.
End an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every Inventor program.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need the End command at the end of each task.
End of Loop
End of a direct Internet mode program.<LF><LF>This completes the Internet direct mode calls. It must be on the end of every direct Internet mode string.
Ends direct communication sequence with remote RCX(s)<LF><LF>Commands between this icon and the Start Remote RCX Communication will be sent to the RCX as direct commands.
Enter IP number of remote site.
Enter a name for your PILOT program:
Enter a name for your saved Pilot program.
Enter a number to use in the mathematical operation on your Bin.
Enter high
Enter low
Enter normal
Enter the IP address of the remote destination (leave blank if local machine)
Enter the name of the theme you want to create.
Enters looping forever playing a sequence of beeps at a rate proportional<LF>to the light level.<LF>In the loop (kLightOffset-LightValue) will be added to the integrator<LF>followed by a 10ms Wait. <LF>If the integrator exceeds lvIntgLimit a tone of kGeigerL2F *<LF> (kToneOffset - LightValue) Hz is played for 10ms and the integrator is reset.<LF><LF>The local variable IntgLimit and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>IntgLimit:  String a single modifier.
Enters looping forever playing a sequence of<LF>beeps at a rate proportional to the light level.<LF>In the loop (kLightOffset-LightValue) will be<LF>added to the integrator followed by a 10ms Wait.<LF>If the integrator exceeds lvIntgLimit a tone of<LF>kGeigerL2F * (kToneOffset - LightValue) Hz is<LF>played for 10ms and the integrator is reset.<LF><LF>The local variable IntgLimit and LocalVar4-8 <LF>are preserved by the sub.
Equal to? or Random time?
Equalizes a color image. This VI equalizes either the lightness plane (default) or all three planes (red, green, and blue).<LF><LF>Light / R,G,B (Light) specifies whether the operation is performed on the lightness plane or on all three planes (red, green, blue). An equalization on the lightness plane conserves the hue and saturation from the color image. An equalization of the three planes (red, green, blue), gives a stronger contrast but changes the hue and saturation of the color image. The default is FALSE.<LF><LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to the source image. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Dst (RGB) is the reference to the destination image. If connected, it must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out (RGB) is the reference to the output RGB image that is obtained after equalization of the source image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Equation String
Equations
Erases the active region of interest associated with an image window. <LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	You can erase an ROI in an image window by pressing <<Backspace>> when the current image window is active.
Erosion
Error
Error Code
Error Descriptions
Error IO
Error IO 2
Error Processing
Error code
Error codes will be displayed in this box.  Refer to the images above to find out what is wrong with your hardware setup.
Error?
Errors
Event
Event #
Event Fork
Event Landing
Event Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Blue Event.
Event Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Generic Event.
Event Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Red Event.
Event Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Yellow Event.
Event Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the Blue Event.
Event Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor to select the Red Timer.
Event Register Container
Event Source
Event State (0-15)
Event State Container
Event Type
Event Value
Events
Events list (User Event Only)
Events list (all)
Examine
Examples
Examples...
Examples<LF>My Projects
Executes modulo division (remainder) of one image by another or an image by a constant.<LF>    	  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is divided by the Constant value for image-constant operations. The default is 1.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations:<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) % SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) % Constant.<LF><LF>If the Image Src A is a 32-bit floating-point image then the following operation is performed:<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – SrcB(x, y) × E(SrcA(x, y) ÷ SrcB(x, y) ), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – Constant × E(SrcA(x, y) ÷ Constant),<LF>where E(x) is the integer part of x.
Exists?
Exit &Q
Exit direct mode display.
Exiting...
Expand
Expand the graph to the size of the screen.
Expands (duplicates) an image or part of an image with adjustment of the horizontal and vertical resolution. <LF>     	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to expand. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>X Duplication Step specifies the number of pixel duplications per column. The column is recopied if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>Y Duplication Step specifies the number of pixel duplications per line. The row is recopied if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>For example, if a 256 × 256 image is connected and the X Duplication Step and Y Duplication Step are both equal to 2, then the resulting image has a resolution of 512 × 512. Each pixel in the original image now is represented by four pixels in new image (2 × 2). <LF><LF>The input images must be the same image type.<LF>
Explain Error...
Export...
Exported VI list
External Clock
External edges only (T)
External_Edge
Extract
Extract Plane
Extracted Data Set
Extracts (copies) the pixels from an image, or part of an image, into a 2D array encoded in 8 bits, 16 bits, or floating point, which is determined by the type of input image. Various processing can be applied to this array. These arrays can be programmed either from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW, or from standard programming languages (such as C) via a Code Interface Node. <LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing  the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to extract. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (U8) returns the extracted pixel values into a 2D array (line, column). This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF>	Image Pixels (I16) returns the extracted pixel values into a 2D array (line, column). This output is only used for a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (SGL) returns the extracted pixel values into a 2D array (line, column). This output is only used for a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts (reduces) an image or part of an image with adjustment of the horizontal and vertical resolution. <LF>      	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to extract. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>	Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>	X Step Size is the vertical sampling step, which defines the columns to be extracted (the horizontal reduction ratio). For example, with an X Step Size equal to 3, one out of every three columns is extracted from the Image Src into the Image Dst. Each column is extracted if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>Y Step Size is the horizontal sampling step, which defines the lines to be extracted (the vertical reduction ratio). Each row is extracted if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>For example, if a 512 × 512 image is connected and the X Step Size and Y Step Size are both equal to 2, then the resulting image has a resolution of 256 × 256. The resulting image contains the lines from the Image Src 0, 2, 4, …, 510 and the columns 0, 2, 4, …, 510 from the Image Src.<LF><LF>The input images must be the same image type.<LF>
Extracts a line of pixels from a color image. This VI returns an array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators. This array can be converted into an array of clusters coding the three color values as either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the two endpoints of the line to extract. <LF><LF>Note:	A line designated by the coordinates [0, 0, 0, 255] consists of 256 pixels. The output Pixels Line contains the values specified by this line. Any pixel values outside the image automatically is set to 0 in Pixels Line.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixels Line(U32) returns the pixel values as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts a range of pixels values, either a row or column, from an image.<LF>    	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Number is the row or column number to be extracted. <LF><LF>Row / Column uses the row Number by default (the default is FALSE). When the TRUE value is connected, the column Number is used. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixels (U8) returns the intensity values for the specified row or column of pixels. This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels (I16) returns the intensity values for the specified row or column of pixels. This output is only used for a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels (SGL) returns the intensity values for the specified row or column of pixels. This output is only used for a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts odd and even fields from an interlaced image or builds an image using two field images.<LF>        	<LF>Interlace/Separate (Interlace). The default is the interlace mode, which specifies that an interlaced image is built using two field images (Image even and Image odd).In the separate mode, the odd and even fields from an interlaced image (Image frame) are extracted. <LF>	<LF>Image frame is the reference to the image in which odd and even fields have to be extracted.<LF>	<LF>Image even is the reference to the image that forms the even lines of the interlaced image.<LF><LF>Image odd is the reference to the image that forms the odd lines of the interlaced image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image frame Out contains the interlaced image.<LF>	<LF>Image even Out contains the even lines of the input image.<LF><LF>Image odd Out contains the odd lines of the input image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	When two fields are interlaced, the first line in the resulting frame comes from the even field and the second comes from the odd field.
Extracts the contours (detects edges) in gray-level values. Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image. The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the processing matrix. For example, a 3 × 3 matrix has a minimum border size of 1. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF><LF>Threshold Value is the minimum pixel value to appear in the resulting image. It is rare to use a value greater than 0 for this type of processing because the results from this processing are usually very dark and are not very dynamic. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Method specifies the type of edge-detection filter to use. The following table lists some of the available filters.<LF><LF>  0 (default)	Differentiation	processing with a 2 × 2 matrix<LF>  1	Gradient	processing with a 2 × 2 matrix<LF>  2	Prewitt 	processing with a 3 × 3 matrix<LF>  3	Roberts	processing with a 2 × 2 matrix<LF>  4	Sigma 	processing with a 3 × 3 matrix<LF>  5	Sobel	processing with a 3 × 3 matrix<LF>Note:	See the Nonlinear Filters section of Chapter 5, Spatial Filtering, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about these filters.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the intensity values of a line of pixels. <LF>    	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Line Coordinates are the coordinates of the line to extract. These coordinates are in the form of an array specifying the endpoints of the line. Note that a line with the coordinates (0, 0, 0, 255) is formed from 256 pixels. The output Pixels Line is an array containing the intensity values of the pixels in the selected line. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are set to zero in Pixels Line.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (U8) returns the intensity values for the specified line of pixels. This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (I16) returns the intensity values for the specified line of pixels. This output is only used for a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (SGL) returns the intensity values for the specified line of pixels. This output is only used for a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the pixels from a color image, or from part of a color image, into a 2D array. This VI returns the values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators. This 2D array can be converted into a 2D array of clusters coding the three color values as either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Optional Rectangle designates a rectangular region (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) within an image in which the pixels are to be changed. . If this array is empty the entire image is changed.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (U32) returns the pixel values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the pixels from a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point) into a 2D complex array ([CSG]).<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the complex image.<LF>	<LF>Optional Rectangle specifies a rectangular region of the complex image to be extracted. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (Complex) is a 2D array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that comprise the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the array is equal to the size of the image or to the size of the optional rectangle.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the pixels from an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image into the real part or imaginary part of a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point). <LF>    	  <LF>Plane specifies which component of the complex image is replaced. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>    0	  (Default) Real<LF>    1  	Imaginary<LF> <LF>Image Src must be an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image.<LF> <LF>Image Dst must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the pixels from the real part, imaginary part, magnitude, or phase from a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point) into an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>Plane indicates which component of the complex image is extracted. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>   0	(Default) Real<LF>   1	Imaginary<LF>   2	Magnitude<LF>   3	Phase<LF><LF>Image Src must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst must be an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. It is the same as Image Dst.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the pixels from the real part, imaginary part, magnitude, or phase from a complex image into a floating-point 2D array.<LF><LF>Plane indicates which component of the complex image is extracted into an array. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>   0	(Default) Real<LF>   1	Imaginary<LF>   2	Magnitude<LF>   3	Phase<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the input complex image.<LF><LF>Optional Rectangle specifies a rectangular region of the complex image to be extracted. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (float) is a 2D floating-point array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that comprise the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the array is equal to the size of the image or to the size of the optional rectangle.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Extracts the three planes (RGB, HSV, or HSL) from an image.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to an image that has its three planes extracted: RGB, HSV or HSL. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Plane is the reference to the destination image. It contains the first color plane. This plane can be either the red plane (Color Mode 0) or the hue plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not extracted if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Plane is the reference to the destination image. It contains the second color plane. This plane can be either the green plane (Color Mode 0) or the saturation plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not extracted if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Plane is the reference to the destination image. It contains the third color plane. This plane can be either the blue plane (Color Mode 0), the lightness plane (Color Mode 1), or the value plane (Color Mode 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The input must be connected for the color plane to be extracted.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Plane out is the reference to the image containing the red (or hue) plane of the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Plane out is the reference to the image containing the green (or saturation) plane of the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Plane out is the reference to the image containing the blue (or lightness or value) plane of the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
F#
FALSE
FF
FFT
FIll Value
Fahrenheit
Fahrenheit Equal Fork
Fahrenheit Fork
False
File
File Data Type
File Options
File Path
File Type
File name
Files
Fill Container
Fill Mailbox
Fill Remote Container
Fill Value
Filling Value (255)
Fills an image and its border with a specified value.<LF>        	<LF>Complex Pixel Value specifies the value used for filling a complex image.<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected.<LF><LF>Pixel Value (U8, I16, Float) specifies the value with which the image is to be filled. This value is used for 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images.<LF><LF>Color Pixel Value specifies the value used for filling a color image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out contains the image that has been filled with the specified pixel value.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Fills the border of an image.<LF>        	<LF>Image in is the reference to the image that has to be modified.<LF>	<LF>Function indicates the method used to fill the border of the image. <LF>This parameter has three possible values:<LF><LF>  0	Border Mirror	Repeats the pixel values of the image near the <LF>     border into the border by symmetry.<LF>  1	Border Copy	Sets the value of the border pixels to the value of <LF>    the image pixel near the border.<LF>  2	Border Clear	Sets all border pixels to 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Fills the holes found in a particle. The holes are filled with a pixel value of 1. The source image must be an 8-bit binary image. This operation requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is equal to the size of the source image.<LF>  <LF>Connectivity 4/ 8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Filter
Filter width
Filters an image using a linear filter. The calculations are performed either with integers or floating points, depending on the image type and the contents of the kernel.<LF>    	    <LF>Divider (kernel sum) is a normalization factor that can be applied to the sum of the obtained products. Under normal conditions the divider should not be connected. If connected (and not equal to 0), the elements internal to the matrix are summed and then divided by this normalization factor.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be and 8-bit or RGB image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Kernel is a 2D array that contains the convolution matrix to be applied to the image. The size of the convolution is fixed by the size of this array. The array can be generated by using standard G programming techniques or the VIs IMAQ GetKernel or IMAQ BuildKernel. If the dimensions (XY) produced by this array are not greater than 3, the filter is considered null and the output image is identical to the input image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image.<LF>The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the convolution matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix must have a minimum border of 1, a 5 × 5 matrix must have a minimum border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF><LF>A convolution matrix must have odd-sized dimensions so that it contains a central pixel. The function does not take into account the odd boundary, furthest out on the matrix, if one of the Kernel dimensions is even. For example, if the input Kernel is 6 × 4 (X = 6 and Y = 4), the actual convolution is 5 × 3. Both the sixth line and the fourth are ignored. Remember, the second dimension in a G array is the vertical direction (Y).<LF>Calculations made with an 8-bit or 16-bit Image Src input are made in integer mode provided that the kernel contains only integers. Calculations made with a 32-bit floating-point Image Src input are made in floating-point mode. Note that the processing speed is correlated with the size of the kernel. A 3 × 3 convolution processes nine pixels while a 5 × 5 convolution processes 25 pixels.
Final data
Finds edge pairs along a specified path in the image. This VI performs an edge extraction similar to IMAQ Edge Tool then finds edge pairs based on specified criteria such as the distance between the leading and trailing edges, edge contrasts, and so forth.<LF>    	  <LF>Edge Parameters is a cluster defining the characteristics of the filter used to detect edges. This cluster consists of the following parameters.<LF><LF>   contrast specifies the threshold for the contrast of the edge. Only   <LF>   edges with a contrast greater than this value are used in the  <LF>   detection process. Contrast is defined as the difference between <LF>   the average pixel intensity before the edge and the average pixel <LF>   intensity after the edge. <LF><LF>	filter width specifies the number of pixels that are averaged to find   <LF>  the contrast at either side of the edge.<LF><LF>	 Steepness specifies the slope of the edge. This value represents   <LF>  the number of pixels that correspond to the transition area of the   <LF>  edge.<LF><LF>Image is the input source image. 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images are supported.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Coordinates is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates of pixels in the image.<LF>	<LF>SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>   Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the <LF>   interpolation. Two values are possible.<LF><LF>   1	Quadratic<LF>   2	Cubic Spline<LF>  <LF>  SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are    <LF>  obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies    <LF>  that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Caliper Parameters specifies the following parameters for finding edge pairs.<LF><LF>  Polarity specifies the polarity of the leading and trailing edge in the   <LF>   search process.<LF><LF>  0	None	Polarity of the edges is ignored.<LF> 1	Dark-Light	The leading edge has a dark-to-light polarity while the <LF>   trailing edge has a light-to-dark polarity.<LF>  2	Light-Dark	The leading edge has a light-to-dark polarity while <LF>  the  trailing edge has a dark-to-light polarity.<LF>  3	Dark-Dark	The leading edge has a dark-to-light polarity while <LF>   the  trailing edge has a dark-to-light polarity.<LF>  4	Light-Dark	The leading edge has a light-to-dark polarity while   <LF>   the trailing edge has a light-to-dark polarity.<LF><LF>    Separation specifies the desired separation between the edge <LF>    pairs. Edge pairs with separation greater or less than this value <LF>    within some tolerance are ignored. If this parameter is set to 0, all <LF>   edge pairs are found.<LF>	  Separation Deviation specifies a tolerance value for the <LF>   separation between the edges. This value influences the score of <LF>   the detected edge pairs.<LF><LF>Caliper Report is an array of clusters that contain the following information about the detected edge pairs.<LF><LF>  Separation is the computed distance in pixels between the edges <LF>  in the edge pair.<LF>  	Edge1 Position is the location of the leading edge.<LF>  	Edge1 Contrast is the contrast of the leading edge.<LF>  	Edge2 Position is the location of the trailing edge.<LF>  	Edge2 Contrast is the contrast of the trailing edge.<LF>  	Score is unused.<LF><LF>Edge Coordinates is an array of point clusters consisting of the spatial coordinates of the detected edges.<LF>	<LF>Number of Edge Pairs returns the number of detected edge pairs.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Finds edges along a path defined in the image. Edges are determined based on their contrast, width, and steepness.<LF>    	  <LF>Edge Parameters is a cluster defining the characteristics of the filter used to detect the edges. This cluster consists of the following parameters.<LF><LF>    Contrast specifies the threshold for the contrast of the edge. Only <LF>    edges with a contrast greater than this value are used in the<LF>   detection process. Contrast is defined as the difference between <LF>    the average pixel intensity before the edge and the average pixel <LF>    intensity after the edge. <LF>	<LF>   Filter width specifies the number of pixels that are averaged to <LF>   find the contrast at either side of the edge.<LF><LF> 	 Steepness specifies the slope of the edge. This value represents   <LF>   the number of pixels that correspond to the transition area of the   <LF>   edge.<LF><LF>Image is the input source image. 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images are supported.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Coordinates is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates of pixels in the image. <LF>	<LF>SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>  Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the       <LF>  interpolation. Two values are possible.<LF><LF>    1	Quadratic<LF>    2	Cubic Spline<LF><LF>  SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are   <LF>  obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies <LF>  that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Edge Report is a cluster containing the following information.<LF> <LF>Number of Edges returns the number of edges found.<LF><LF>Edge Information is an array that contains the following information about each detected edge.<LF><LF>   Position indicates the position of the edge from the first point in   <LF>   the Pixel Coordinates array.<LF>	<LF>   Contrast specifies the intensity contrast at the edge.<LF>	<LF>  Polarity indicates the polarity of the edge.<LF>    0	Rising edge (going from dark to light)<LF>    1	Falling edge (going from light to dark)<LF>  <LF>   Score is unused.<LF><LF>Edge Coordinates is an array of point clusters consisting of the spatial coordinates of the detected edges.<LF>	<LF>Number of Edges specifies the number of edges found.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Finds objects in an image whose shape matches the shape of the object specified by a template. The matching process is invariant to rotation and can be set to be invariant to the scale of the objects. This VI requires that the objects have been separated from the background (the input image is binary). This VI labels the image to give each object in the image a unique ID before performing the match operation.<LF>  <LF>Scale Invariance (Yes) specifies whether to use size or scale invariance when matching objects in the source image to the template object.<LF>	<LF>Tolerance indicates the percentage difference allowable between the template shape and similar shapes in the image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is an 8-bit binary image that contains objects of different shapes. <LF>	<LF>Image Template is an 8-bit binary image that contains the object to match. <LF><LF>Image Dst is a reference to an 8 bit binary image that will contain the objects from the Image Src that match the object in the Image Template. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out contains the objects that match the template object.<LF>	<LF>Number of  Matches	specifies the number of objects in the source image that match the template object within the specified tolerance.<LF>	<LF>Shape Report is an array of clusters in which each cluster contains the following information on the matched objects:<LF><LF>  Global Rectangle contains the bounding rectangle of the object.<LF>	<LF>    Centroid is a point-coordinate cluster containing the location of   <LF>    the centroid of the object.<LF><LF>	   Object Size is the size in pixels of the object.<LF><LF>   	Score (between 1 and 1000) specifies how similar the object in <LF>    the image is to the template. A score of 1000 implies a perfect <LF>    match.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Finds the direction of lowest or highest light intensity.<LF><LF>The local variable Time and LocalVar6-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  Choose between Seek Dark (=0) or Seek Light (=1) by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.
Finds the direction of lowest or highest<LF>light intensity.<LF><LF>The local variable Time and LocalVar6-8 <LF>are preserved by the sub.
Finds the direction with a light level lower than the local variable BrightTH.  Samples the local variable BrightSteps times.<LF><LF>The local variable BrightTH and LocalVar5-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>BrightTH:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>BrightSteps:  String a single modifier.
Finds the direction with a light level lower<LF>than the local variable BrightTH.  Samples<LF>the local variable BrightSteps times.<LF><LF>The local variable BrightTH and LocalVar5-8 <LF>are preserved by the sub.
Finds the location, amplitude, and second derivative of peaks or valleys in a dataset. The dataset can be passed to the VI as a single array or as consecutive blocks of data. <LF><LF>The VI is based on an algorithm that fits a quadratic polynomial to sequential groups of data points. The number of data points used in the fit is specified by the width control. <LF><LF>For each peak/valley, the quadratic fit is tested against the threshold level: peaks with heights lower than the threshold or valleys with troughs higher than the threshold are ignored. Peaks/valleys are detected only after about width/2 data points have been processed beyond the peak/valley location. This delay has implications only for realtime processing.<LF>
FirmWare
Firmware
Firmware Version (0)
Firmware description.
Firmware type
Firmware version
First flag character
First flag character encodation
Fit Curve
Fit Data
Fit Exponential
Fit Line
Fit Lines
Fit Ln
Fit Spline
Flip Direction
Flip the directions of the motors.<LF>The default is to flip the direction of all motors.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String the modifiers for the ports whose <LF>direction you want to change.
Flip the directions of the motors.<LF>The default is to flip the direction of all motors.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String the modifiers for the ports whose direction you want to change.
Flip?
Float
Float Outputs
Float the motors and lamps.  If you use the Stop command, <LF>the motors will brake and stop quickly.  This command will <LF>just stop powering the outputs (i.e. they will gradually stop).<LF>The default is to Float all motors and lamps.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to float.
Float the motors and lamps.  If you use the Stop command, the motors will brake and stop quickly.  This command will just stop powering the outputs (i.e. they will gradually stop).  The default is to Float all motors and lamps.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to float.
Focus Color
Folder
Folder Name
Font Name:
Font, Size & Style
Force an Event
Forces the firmware to behave as if the events, whose bits are set in the calculated 16 bit value, had actually happened. <LF><LF>Modifiers:  String in the value of the event you want to force: red, yellow, blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number.  The bit corresponds to an event number.<LF><LF>1 (2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1<LF>3 (2^0+2^1) correponds to events 0 and 1<LF>
Forces the firmware to behave as if the events, whose bits are set in the calculated 16 bit value, had actually happened. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the value of the event which you want to force:  red, yellow, blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number.  The bit corresponds to an event number.<LF><LF>1 (2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1<LF>3 (2^0+2^1) corresponds to events 0 and 1<LF><LF>
Foreground Image
Foreground color
Fork Merge
Format of the sound configuration.
Formula Container
Forward
Frame
Frame Size
Frame Style
Free
Free Sampling
Free Sampling with Time Stamp
FreeLine
Freeze
Frequency
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency Analysis
From this window you can compute statistics and other mathematical functions on your bin.
From this window you can upload data from the RCX, choose a Bin color and name, choose a plot style, and adjust the graph.
Frontmost Window?
FullCorrelate
Function
Function 2
Function Code
G programming<LF>language string
G#
GS
Generate Color Table
Generic
Generic Container
Generic Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a <LF>generic container.  You can string in a number <LF>anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 <LF>available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined <LF>container variables.
Generic Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a generic container.  You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
Generic Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a generic container.  You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
Generic Event
Generic Sensor Container
Generic Sensor Fork
Get Image Subset
Get Pixel Value
Get/Set (Set)
Get/Set ? (Set)
Get/Set Status? (Set)
Gets or sets the status of images on the browser. The possible status values are : selected or not selected. Selected images are framed using the color Focus Color (see Cvi Browser Focus Setup).<LF><LF>-	Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>-	State In  image status value.<LF><LF>- Selection Mode  Two modes are available : Multiple selection or single selection.<LF><LF>- Get/Set  is the Vi action<LF><LF>- Index  is the position of the image to select.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes is the (column,line) position of the selected thumbnail.<LF><LF>- Pixel Position  is the pixel coordinates of the area where the thumbnail is selected.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF> 	<LF>- State Out  is the image status.<LF><LF>- Index Out is the index of the position of the selected image.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the selected thumbnail.<LF> <LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is selected.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Gets the immediate state of motors A and B.<LF>Status A is returned in LocalVar1, Status B <LF>is returned in LocalVar 2.<LF><LF>Status:  0: Off, 1: Fwd, 2: Rwd.<LF><LF>LocalVar3-8 are preserved by the sub.
Gets the immediate state of motors A and B.<LF>Status A is returned in LocalVar1, Status B is returned in LocalVar 2.<LF><LF>Status:  0: Off, 1: Fwd, 2: Rwd.<LF><LF>LocalVar3-8 are preserved by the sub.
Gives information regarding the size (resolution) of the image. <LF><LF>        	<LF>Image is the reference to the image whose size has to be determined.<LF><LF>	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>	X Resolution gives the number of pixels per line.<LF><LF>	Y Resolution gives the number of pixels per column.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Global Motor Register (0,1,2)
Global Motor Status (0-2)
Global Rectangle
Global Rectangle
Global Report
Grab
Grab Blue
Grab Green
Grab Grey
Grab RGB
Grab Red
Grab Sound
Grab Sound Continuously
Graph
Graph Type
Graphic
Greater or Less Than
Green
Green (or Sat) Histogram Graph
Green (or Sat) Histogram Report
Green (or Sat) Lookup Table
Green (or Sat) Plane
Green (or Sat) Plane out
Green (or Sat) Range
Green (or Sat) value
Green Bin
Green Jump
Green Land
Green value
Grey Bkgrnd
Greyscale
Grid Size
Grow
HIDE ADMINISTRATOR BUTTON
HIGH
HPercent (1-100)
HT
HTML FILE NAMES
HTML PATHS
Half note
Hardware
Has Scrollbars?
Have the program choose between one of two paths <LF>depending on the state of the event.<LF>If the event happened, the program will  follow the top string.<LF>If the did not happen, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is the red event.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the event modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
Have the program choose between one of two paths <LF>depending on the state of the touch sensor.<LF>If the touch sensor is pushed in, the program will <LF>follow the bottom string.<LF>If the touch sensor is released, the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
Have the program choose between one of two paths <LF>randomly<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF><LF>
Have the program choose between one of two paths depending on the state of the event.<LF>If the event happened, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the did not happen, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is the red event.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the event modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
Have the program choose between one of two paths depending on the state of the touch sensor.<LF>If the touch sensor is pushed in, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>If the touch sensor is released, the program will follow the top string.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
Have the program choose between one of two paths randomly.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF><LF>
Header
Height
Help
Help Files *
Help for This VI
Here is a picture of the light sensor taped to the side of the door where it was taking measurements.
Here is a picture of the spinner that we made using a light sensor and a paper wheel.
Here one can see that the higher temperatures occured when the sun was down and the lower temperatures were at sunrise.  This is because the air was still cooling off from a previously hot day.
Here one can see that we had a mean reaction time of 0.5 sec.
Hi Power?
Hi/Low
Hide/Show (Show)
High
Histogram
Histogram 2
Histogram Graph
Histogram Report
Histograph
History
Hit #
Hit this button to cancel the printing operation.
Hit this button when all is done.
Hits
Hole's Area (pixels)
Hole's Perimeter
Horizontal
Host type
Hot spot (x,y)
Hours
HumiPro LogIT
Humidity Container (HumiPro LogIT)
Humidity Sensor Fork (HumiPro LogIT)
Hysteresis
Hysteresis (0-15)
Hysteresis Value
IInitializes the Touch Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.<LF>This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
IMAQ  WindUserSetup
IMAQ 3DView 
IMAQ Add
IMAQ AddPictToWindow
IMAQ And
IMAQ ArrayToColorImage
IMAQ ArrayToComplexImage
IMAQ ArrayToImage
IMAQ AutoBThreshold
IMAQ AutoMThreshold 
IMAQ BasicParticle 
IMAQ BinaryMorphology 
IMAQ Browser Focus
IMAQ Browser Focus Setup 
IMAQ Browser Insert
IMAQ Browser Replace
IMAQ Browser Setup
IMAQ BuildKernel
IMAQ Caliper Tool
IMAQ Cast
IMAQ Centroid 
IMAQ CharPtrToString
IMAQ ChooseMeasurements 
IMAQ Circles
IMAQ ClipboardToImage
IMAQ ColorEqualize
IMAQ ColorHistogram
IMAQ ColorHistograph
IMAQ ColorImageToArray 
IMAQ ColorThreshold
IMAQ ColorToRGB
IMAQ ColorUserLookup
IMAQ ColorValueToInteger
IMAQ Compare
IMAQ ComplexAdd
IMAQ ComplexAttenuate
IMAQ ComplexConjugate
IMAQ ComplexDivide
IMAQ ComplexFlipFrequency
IMAQ ComplexImageToArray 
IMAQ ComplexMeasure 
IMAQ ComplexMultiply
IMAQ ComplexParticle 
IMAQ ComplexPlaneToArray 
IMAQ ComplexPlaneToImage
IMAQ ComplexSubtract
IMAQ ComplexTruncate
IMAQ ConvertByLookup
IMAQ Convex
IMAQ Convolute 
IMAQ Coordinate Reference
IMAQ Copy
IMAQ Correlate  
IMAQ Create
IMAQ Danielsson 
IMAQ Dispose
IMAQ Distance 
IMAQ Divide
IMAQ Draw
IMAQ DrawText
IMAQ Edge Tool
IMAQ EdgeDetection 
IMAQ Equalize
IMAQ Error V 4.1
IMAQ Expand 
IMAQ Extract 
IMAQ ExtractColorPlanes
IMAQ FFT 
IMAQ FillHole 
IMAQ Fillimage 
IMAQ Get Angles
IMAQ Get Circle
IMAQ Get LCD ROI
IMAQ Get LCD ROI 1
IMAQ Get Meter
IMAQ Get Meter 2
IMAQ GetCalibration
IMAQ GetColorPixelLine
IMAQ GetColorPixelValue 
IMAQ GetFileInfo
IMAQ GetHostType
IMAQ GetImageInfo
IMAQ GetImagePixelPtr
IMAQ GetImageSize 
IMAQ GetKernel
IMAQ GetLastKey
IMAQ GetOffset
IMAQ GetPalette
IMAQ GetPixelLine
IMAQ GetPixelValue 
IMAQ GetRowCol
IMAQ GetScreenSize
IMAQ GrayMorphology 
IMAQ Group ROIs
IMAQ Histogram 
IMAQ Histograph 
IMAQ ImageBorderOperation
IMAQ ImageBorderSize
IMAQ ImageToArray 
IMAQ ImageToClipboard
IMAQ ImageToComplexPlane
IMAQ ImageToImage
IMAQ IntegerToColorValue
IMAQ Interlace
IMAQ Interpolate 1D
IMAQ InverseFFT 
IMAQ Label
IMAQ Line Gauge Tool
IMAQ LineProfile
IMAQ LinearAverages
IMAQ LogDiff
IMAQ LowPass 
IMAQ MagicWand 
IMAQ Mask
IMAQ MaskToROI
IMAQ MathLookup
IMAQ MemPeek
IMAQ Modulo
IMAQ MulDiv
IMAQ MultiThreshold
IMAQ Multiply
IMAQ NthOrder 
IMAQ Or
IMAQ Peak/Valley Detector
IMAQ PointDistances
IMAQ Quantify 
IMAQ RGBToColor
IMAQ ROI to Picture
IMAQ ROIProfile
IMAQ ROIToMask
IMAQ Read Cod128
IMAQ Read Cod25
IMAQ Read Cod39
IMAQ Read Cod93
IMAQ Read Codabar
IMAQ Read EAN13
IMAQ Read EAN8
IMAQ Read LCD
IMAQ Read LCD 1
IMAQ Read MSI
IMAQ Read Meter
IMAQ Read Single Digit
IMAQ Read Single Digit 1
IMAQ Read UPC A
IMAQ ReadFile
IMAQ RejectBorder 
IMAQ RemoveParticle 
IMAQ ReplaceColorPlane
IMAQ Resample 
IMAQ Rotate
IMAQ Rotation Detect
IMAQ Segmentation 
IMAQ Separation
IMAQ SetCalibration
IMAQ SetColorPixelLine
IMAQ SetColorPixelValue 
IMAQ SetImageSize 
IMAQ SetOffset
IMAQ SetPixelLine
IMAQ SetPixelValue 
IMAQ SetRowCol
IMAQ SetUserPen
IMAQ SetupBrush
IMAQ Shape Match Tool
IMAQ Shift
IMAQ Shift16To8
IMAQ Simple Edge
IMAQ Simple Edge<LF><LF>This function looks for step edges along an array of Pixel Coordinates. According to the Process chosen, the VI returns the first, the first and the last or all the edges found. <LF>The Threshold Parameters are the critera used to determine whether a change in the pixel values is considered as an edge or not. For the Simple Edge VI, the main criterion is a threshold level on the pixel values. This threshold value can be either relative or absolute. Relative threshold level is specified as a percentage of the pixel range found in the pixel path. Absolute value is directly based on the pixel values. The location of the edges can be computed with sub-pixel accuracy.<LF><LF>- 	Image Src is the reference of the image to be processed.<LF><LF>- 	Pixel Coordinates is an array containing the coordinates of the pixels to be inspected. The pixels coordinates may be returned from a ROI descriptor by the VI IMAQ ROIProfile.<LF><LF>- 	Process determines the type of search. The VI can return: the first edge,  the first and the last edge, or all edges found along the ROI path.<LF><LF>-  Threshold Parameters is a cluster containing the criterion used to determine whether a change in pixel values is considered as an edge or not. This cluster contains the following data:<LF><LF>- 	Level Type  (default Absolute value) is an enumerated type control determining if the Threshold Level is expressed in absolute or relative values. <LF><LF>- 	Threshold Level can be either absolute or relative. Absolute threshold is based on the pixel values. Relative threshold is expressed as a percentage of the pixel range found in the ROI.<LF><LF>- 	Hysteresis can be either absolute or relative. It determines a range of pixel values (or a range of percentage) after an edge detection where there is no detection. This feature enables a correct detection in noisy images.<LF><LF>- 	Sub-pixel Accuracy (default: False) determines the accuracy requested for the location of the edge coordinates. Setting this control to False enables a very quick edge detection. A sub-pixel localization of the edges is obtained when this control is True. The sub-pixel result is computed using a local quadratic interpolation.  <LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Edges Coordinates returns the detected edges coordinates. If the Sub-pixel Accuracy control is set to True, the result is given with sub-pixel accuracy.<LF><LF>- 	Nb Detected Edges returns the number of edges found.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
IMAQ Skeleton
IMAQ Status
IMAQ Substract
IMAQ Symmetry
IMAQ Threshold
IMAQ Transform ROI
IMAQ Ungroup ROIs
IMAQ UserLookup
IMAQ WindDraw
IMAQ WindDrawRect
IMAQ WindEraseROI
IMAQ WindGetMouse
IMAQ WindGetROI
IMAQ WindGrid
IMAQ WindLastEvent
IMAQ WindMove
IMAQ WindROIColor
IMAQ WindSetROI
IMAQ WindSetup
IMAQ WindShow
IMAQ WindSize
IMAQ WindToolsClose
IMAQ WindToolsMove
IMAQ WindToolsSelect
IMAQ WindToolsSetup
IMAQ WindToolsShow
IMAQ WindUserEvent
IMAQ WindUserMove
IMAQ WindUserShow
IMAQ WindUserStatus
IMAQ WindXYZoom
IMAQ WindZoom
IMAQ WriteFile
IMAQ Xor
IMAQTransform ROI
IP Address
IR Transmitter Error
Icons per Line (4)
Idle
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>It will do the Zig Zag motion with the local variable<LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local Variable Duration<LF>   >>0   ZigZag Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          ZigZag is performed until the event happenes<LF>   =0   ZigZags forever<LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the AvoidLeft motion with the local variable<LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the AvoidRight motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the AvoidRight motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the Bugshake motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the Bugshake motion with the local variable<LF> MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleLeft motion with the local variable <LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleLeft step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleLeft step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleLeft steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleLeft motion with the local variable <LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleLeft step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleLeft step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleLeft steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration: String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag: String a single modifier.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleRight motion with the local variable<LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleRight step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleRight step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleRight steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration: String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag: String a single modifier.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleRight motion with the local variable<LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleRight step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleRight step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleRight steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the LoopAB motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>it will do the AvoidLeft motion with the local variable<LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set Access Control is set up.<LF>It will do the Zig Zag motion with the local variable Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local Variable Duration<LF>   >>0   ZigZag Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          ZigZag is performed until the event happenes<LF>   =0   ZigZags forever<LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration: String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag: String a single modifier.
If Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the LoopAB motion with the local variable MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
If Loop#
If there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the IR Transmitter.  Try replacing the battery.
If there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the RCX.  Make sure the RCX is turned on and near the IR transmitter.  The batteries in the RCX could be low.
If there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the cable.  Make sure the cable is securely fastened or try a new cable.
If there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the serial port assignment.  Try reassigning the COM port:<LF><LF>1.  Select Change COM Port from the Administrator screen.<LF><LF>or<LF><LF>2.   From an Inventor window, select Change COM Port from the Project menu.
If this is true a dialog box will appear before the acquisition begins.
If true, text appears in bold.<LF>
If true, text appears in italic.<LF>
If true, text appears in outline.<LF>
If true, text appears in shadow.<LF>
If true, text appears in strikeout.<LF>
If true, text appears underlined.<LF>
If you want to use the Rcx with this window open, you need to use an RCX start.
Image
Image 1
Image 1 + 2
Image 1 - 2
Image 1 AND 2
Image 1 OR 2
Image 1/2 or 1/ct
Image 1x2 or 1xct
Image 2
Image 2 Center
Image Browser In
Image Browser Out
Image Dst
Image Dst (RGB)
Image Dst Out
Image Dst Out (RGB)
Image In
Image Manipulation
Image Mask
Image Model
Image Name
Image Operation
Image Out
Image Pixels
Image Pixels (Complex)
Image Pixels (I16)
Image Pixels (SGL)
Image Pixels (U32)
Image Pixels (U8)
Image Pixels (float)
Image Pixels(U8)
Image Plane
Image Ratio
Image Replacement
Image Src
Image Src (RGB)
Image Src A
Image Src B
Image Subset
Image Template
Image Type
Image border size
Image border size in 
Image border size out
Image even
Image even Out
Image frame
Image frame Out
Image in
Image odd
Image odd Out
Image out
Image to Add
Images per Column
Images per Line
Imaq 3DView
Imaq Add
Imaq AddPictToWindow
Imaq And
Imaq ArrayToColorImage
Imaq ArrayToComplexImage
Imaq ArrayToComplexPlane
Imaq ArrayToImage
Imaq AutoBThreshold
Imaq AutoMThreshold
Imaq BasicParticle
Imaq Browser Delete
Imaq Browser Focus
Imaq Browser Focus Setup
Imaq Browser Insert
Imaq Browser Replace
Imaq BuildKernel
Imaq Caliper Tool
Imaq Cast
Imaq Centroid
Imaq CharPtrToString
Imaq ChooseMeasurements
Imaq Circles
Imaq ClipboardToImage
Imaq ColorEqualize
Imaq ColorHistogram
Imaq ColorHistograph
Imaq ColorImageToArray
Imaq ColorThreshold
Imaq ColorToRGB
Imaq ColorUserLookup
Imaq ColorValueToInteger
Imaq Compare
Imaq ComplexAdd
Imaq ComplexAttenuate
Imaq ComplexConjugate
Imaq ComplexDivide
Imaq ComplexFlipFrequency
Imaq ComplexImageToArray
Imaq ComplexMeasure
Imaq ComplexMultiply
Imaq ComplexParticle
Imaq ComplexPlaneToArray
Imaq ComplexPlaneToImage
Imaq ComplexSubtract
Imaq ComplexTruncate
Imaq Convert
Imaq ConvertByLookup
Imaq Convex
Imaq Convolute
Imaq Coordinate Reference
Imaq Copy
Imaq Correlate
Imaq Create
Imaq Danielsson
Imaq Dispose
Imaq Distance
Imaq Divide
Imaq Draw
Imaq DrawText
Imaq Edge Tool
Imaq EdgeDetection
Imaq Equalize
Imaq Error
Imaq Expand
Imaq Extract
Imaq ExtractColorPlanes
Imaq FFT
Imaq FillHole
Imaq FillImage
Imaq Get Angles
Imaq GetCalibration
Imaq GetColorPixelLine
Imaq GetColorPixelValue
Imaq GetFileInfo
Imaq GetHostType
Imaq GetImageInfo
Imaq GetImagePixelPtr
Imaq GetImageSize
Imaq GetKernel
Imaq GetLastKey
Imaq GetOffset
Imaq GetPalette
Imaq GetPixelLine
Imaq GetPixelValue
Imaq GetRowCol
Imaq GetScreenSize
Imaq GetUserPen
Imaq GrayMorphology
Imaq Group ROIs
Imaq Histogram
Imaq Histograph
Imaq ImageBorderOperation
Imaq ImageBorderSize
Imaq ImageToArray
Imaq ImageToClipboard
Imaq ImageToComplexPlane
Imaq IntegerToColorValue
Imaq Interlace
Imaq Interpolate 1D
Imaq InverseFFT
Imaq Label
Imaq Line Gauge Tool
Imaq LineProfile
Imaq LinearAverages
Imaq LogDiff
Imaq LowPass
Imaq MagicWand
Imaq Mask
Imaq MaskToROI
Imaq MathLookup
Imaq MemPeek
Imaq Modulo
Imaq Morphology
Imaq MulDiv
Imaq MultiThreshold
Imaq Multiply
Imaq NthOrder
Imaq Or
Imaq PointDistances
Imaq Quantify
Imaq RGBToColor
Imaq ROI to Picture
Imaq ROIProfile
Imaq ROIToMask
Imaq ReadFile
Imaq RejectBorder
Imaq RemoveParticle
Imaq ReplaceColorPlane
Imaq Resample
Imaq Rotate
Imaq Segmentation
Imaq Separation
Imaq SetCalibration
Imaq SetColorPixelLine
Imaq SetColorPixelValue
Imaq SetImageSize
Imaq SetOffset
Imaq SetPixelLine
Imaq SetPixelValue
Imaq SetRowCol
Imaq SetUserPen
Imaq SetupBrush
Imaq Shape Match Tool
Imaq Shift
Imaq Shift16To8
Imaq Skeleton
Imaq Status
Imaq Subtract
Imaq Symmetry
Imaq Threshold
Imaq Ungroup ROIs
Imaq UserLookup
Imaq WindCIN V 4.02
Imaq WindDraw
Imaq WindDrawRect
Imaq WindEraseROI
Imaq WindGetMouse
Imaq WindGetROI
Imaq WindGrid
Imaq WindInterface
Imaq WindLastEvent
Imaq WindMove
Imaq WindROIColor
Imaq WindSetROI
Imaq WindSetup
Imaq WindShow
Imaq WindSize
Imaq WindToolsClose
Imaq WindToolsMove
Imaq WindToolsSelect
Imaq WindToolsSetup
Imaq WindToolsShow
Imaq WindUserClose
Imaq WindUserEvent
Imaq WindUserMove
Imaq WindUserSetup
Imaq WindUserShow
Imaq WindUserStatus
Imaq WindXYZoom
Imaq WindZoom
Imaq WriteFile
Imaq Xor
Import JPEG
Import a JPEG file from your computer into this space.
Import...
Improved Program
In Tools 4 and 5 you are free to label your axes as you wish.
Increment
Incremental Value
Index
Index Out
Index Page Links
Indicates all the images created and the space in memory occupied.<LF><LF>This VI cannot be used as a subVI; it must be executed from its front panel. All existing images are written at intervals or step-by-step depending on the action chosen. This VI also gives the total space in kilobytes occupied by the existing images. It can be used during the writing of an application. 
Indicates and sets the position of an image window.<LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Coordinates (screen) is a structure that contains the screen coordinates, in X and Y positions, where the image window is located or where the image window will be placed. This input is only necessary when the input Get/Set Status? is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know the coordinates of an image window or change the position of an image window. The default is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coordinates (screen) returns the present coordinates (X and Y) of an image window. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Indicates and sets the size of an image window. You also can use this VI to set scroll bars for image windows and test for the presence of scroll bars in an image window. <LF><LF>Window Number is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Width & Height is a cluster containing two elements. Setting the input Get/Set Status to TRUE (Set) allows the user to specify the width and height of an image window. If the input is not connected, or if the value is (0, 0), the image window is resized automatically to the image associated with it. <LF><LF>Note:	This value is independent of the size of the scroll bars. <LF><LF>Scrollbars? (N) controls the presence of scroll bars in an image window. By default, scroll bars are not used. An image window can be resized and moved by the user in the presence or absence of scroll bars. <LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) determines if the user wants to know the position of an image window or specify the position of an image window. The default value is TRUE (Set). <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Width & Height returns the present width and height of an image window. <LF><LF>Note:	The returned value includes the size of the scroll bars. <LF><LF>Has Scrollbars? returns the present scroll bar status for an image window. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Indicates the sample rate for sound input or the update rate for sound  output
Indicates whether the sound is (should be) configured for 8 bit or 16 bit.
Indicates whether the sound is (should be) configured for mono(one channel) or stereo (two channels).
Indirect Var (0-47)
Info
Init Internet Image
Init Large Image
Init Large Image.vi
Init Mic
Init Small Image
Init error code
Initial Point
Initialize Acceleration Sensor Logging
Initialize Barometeric Sensor Logging
Initialize Camera Sensor Logging
Initialize Clicks Sensor Logging
Initialize Container Logging
Initialize Fast Timer Logging
Initialize Generic Sensor Logging
Initialize HumiPro LogIT Sensor Logging
Initialize Light Sensor Logging
Initialize Lux Sensor Logging
Initialize Mail Logging
Initialize Position LogIT Sensor Logging
Initialize Pressure LogIT Sensor Logging
Initialize ProTemp LogIT Sensor Logging
Initialize Redox Sensor Logging
Initialize Rotation Sensor Logging
Initialize Sound LogIT Sensor Logging
Initialize Temperature (F) Sensor Logging
Initialize Temperature Sensor Logging
Initialize Timer Logging
Initialize Touch Sensor Logging
Initialize Voltmeter LogIT Sensor Logging 
Initialize pH LogIT Sensor Logging
InitializeTouch and Release Sensor Logging
Initializes a Container to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Conatiner is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the container can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container Value: String in the value of the container to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes a Container to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Container is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the container can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container Value: String in the value of the conatiner to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes a Container to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Container is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the container can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container Value: String in the value of the container to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes a Timer to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
Initializes a Timer to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
Initializes a fast Timer to take data and configures data logging settings. (logs every 1/100th of a sec).<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
Initializes a fast Timer to take data and configures data logging settings. (logs every 1/100th of a sec).<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
Initializes for a Acceleration Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Barometeric Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Generic Powered Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Generic Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Humidity Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the humidity sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Lux Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Position Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>By default the sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the Position Sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Position Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>By default the sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the Position sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Pressure Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the pressure sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Redox Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Sound Level Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sound level sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a Voltage Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes for a pH Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the pH sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
Initializes system registers.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Initializes the Light Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Light Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the light sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Light Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Light Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the light sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the RCX to take Mail data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the mail data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the mail can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the RCX to take Mail data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the mail data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the mail can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and  is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.   
Initializes the Rotation Sensor to take data (16ths of a rotation) and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Rotation Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.  <LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the rotation sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer. This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Rotation Sensor to take data (16ths of a rotation) and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Rotation Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the rotation sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the  program.
Initializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is  the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in Fahrenheit in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in Fahrenheit in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is recorded in Celsius in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.<LF>This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is recorded in Celsius in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount  of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Touch Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of  memory used by the program.
Initializes the Touch Sensor to take data based on the number of clicks and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Touch Sensor to take data based on the number of clicks and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer. This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Initializes the Touch Sensor to take data based on the number of touches and releases and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input Data
Input Parameters
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 1.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 2.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 3.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 4.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 5.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 6.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 7.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 8.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 1.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 2.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 3.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 4.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 5.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 6.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 7.
Input port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 8.
Inputs
Insert
Insertion Mode
Insertion Point 
Inserts text in an image.<LF>  	<LF>String (empty by default) is the text to write in an image. The string can be composed of multiple lines separated by a hard return.<LF>	<LF>Color is the mode for writing the text. The default is 0, which specifies white.<LF><LF>  0	White	(Default) White on the image background.<LF>  1	Black	Black on the image background.<LF>  2	Inverted	Text inverted on the image background.<LF>  3	Black on White	<LF>  4	White on Black	<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be an 8-bit or RGB image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected then it must be the same type as the Image Src. <LF><LF>Insertion Point is an array (x and y) specifying the location in which the text is inserted. The text position depends on the alignment mode chosen. The default is (0, 0).<LF><LF>Font, Size & Style is a cluster that enables the user to choose the font, size, style, and alignment and contains the following elements:<LF><LF>desired font specifies the character type of the text. The following values are possible:<LF><LF>  0	User-specified Font<LF>  1	(Default) Application Font<LF>  2	System Font<LF>  3	Dialog Font<LF><LF>user-specified font is a cluster containing the specific font characteristics for the text to draw. This specification is ignored unless the desired font control is set to User-specified Font.<LF><LF>Note:	The list of fonts on a Macintosh and Windows are different.<LF><LF>Font Name is the name of the user-specified font.<LF>	Strikeout? If TRUE, text appears in strikeout.<LF>	Italic? If TRUE, text appears in italic.<LF>	Underline? If TRUE, text appears underlined.<LF>	Outline? If TRUE, text appears outlined.<LF>	Shadow? If TRUE, text appears shadowed.<LF>	Bold? If TRUE, text appears in bold.<LF>	Size is the size of the font. The default is 9.<LF><LF>Alignment specifies the alignment of the text. The following values are possible: Left (default), Center, and Right.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>String width returns the string length from the text.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Integrate
Integrated Data Sets
Intensity
Intensity Graph
Intensity of current pixel.
Interactive Factory
Interlace/Separate (Interlace)
Internal Clk
Internal_Edge
Internet Begin
Internet End
Internet Upload
Interpolated array
Interpolation Type
Interrogate RCX
Interval Range
Interval Range 
Interval Width
IntgLimit (1-32767)
Invent Paths
Inventor 1
Inventor 2
Inventor 3
Inventor 4
Inventor Level
Inventor Path
Inventor Programs
Inventor Themes
Inventor Vault
Invert
Inverted
Investigator
Is RCX in View?
Italic?
Item Names
Itteration value of 0 will reload code into the RCX.  Any number other than 0 will run the existing code on the RCX.
Journal Area
Jump Number
Jump back to the Start of Loop command.<LF><LF>Note: The Start of Loop command is required earlier <LF>in the string.<LF>
Jump back to the Start of Loop command.<LF><LF>Note: The Start of Loop command is required earlier in the string.<LF>
Jumping
Keep original
Keep/Replace Value (Replace)
Keeps bits found in Image Src A that are absent from Image Src B.<LF>    	<LF>Constant is a constant value that can replace Image Src B for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) And Not (SrcB(x, y)).<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) And Not (Constant).
Kernel
Kernel Code
Kernel Family
Kernel Number
Kernel Size (3,5,...)
Kernel String
Kernel code
Key present
Key pressed
Kill all?
LASM View?
LCD
LCD / LED (LCD)
LCD/LED (LCD)
LED
LEGO Dacta
LEGO Image
LEGO Sensor ID
LF
LIST OF LINKS
LOCKED
LOW
Label the bin by typing in the white square.
Label1002:
Labels
Labels the particles in a binary image.<LF>  	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies the connectivity used for particle detection. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>Number of Particles indicates the number of particles detected in the image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>This operation applies a color to all pixels composing the same group of pixels (a particle). This color level is encoded in 8 or 16 bits, depending on the image type. Therefore, 255 particles can be labeled in an 8-bit image and 65535 particles in a 16-bit image. If you want to label more than 255 particles in an 8-bit image, you must perform a threshold operation with an interval of [255, 255] after processing the first 254 particles. The goal of this threshold operation is to eliminate the first 254 particles in order to visualize the next 254 particles. <LF><LF>Image Src is the input image and Image Dst is the resulting image. This operation requires that Image Src and Image Dst be the same image type and that the border for these images be greater or equal to 2. 
Lamp
Lamp A
Lamp B
Lamp C
Landing
Largetto
Largo
Last Error Code
Last Error Message
Last Path
Last filename
Last operation
Last theme
Last wait for
Latch
Lavender Bin
Left
Left 1 pix? (No)
Left hand A & Right hand
Left hand B
Legato
Level
Level Type
Light
Light (percent)
Light / R,G,B (Light)
Light Blue Bin
Light Container
Light Data
Light Measurements
Light Sensor
Light Sensor .05s
Light Sensor .05s with motor
Light Sensor Equal Fork
Light Sensor Fork
Light Threshold
Light and Angle Sensor
Light entering Dark state
Light entering Light state
Light entering Normal state
Light value
Lights up when an RCX is present.
Line
Line 1
Line Coordinates
Line Graph
Line Information
Line Slope
Line Titles
Line stuff
LineWidth(Pixels)
Lines
Little Endian (Intel)
Load Color Palette? (No)
Load Data
Load Program File
Load Scroll From File
Load Sound
Loading files...
Loading...
Loads and configures the user window. <LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. It is possible to manipulate six different user windows. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Foreground Image is an 8-bit or RGB user image. The corresponding part of the image is displayed when a zone within this image is FALSE.<LF><LF>Background Image is an 8-bit or RGB user image. The corresponding part of the image is displayed when a zone within this image is TRUE.<LF><LF>User Mechanical Actions specifies the method of operation of each zone. Two modes are possible: <LF><LF>0	Switch	The first click causes the zone to pass to TRUE. A second click on the same zone causes it to change to FALSE.<LF>1	Latch	A click on the zone causes it to change to TRUE temporarily. <LF>Note:	In both cases, the status of the zone can be determined using IMAQ WindUserEvent or IMAQ WindUserStatus.<LF><LF>User Rectangles is a 2D array that defines the coordinates of each zone in the user window. Each line in this array must contain the four coordinates that specify the position of the zone. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Locations
Lock Context Help &L
Log
Log 2
Log Clock
Log Time Stamp
Log the reading on the clock to a Data Set.<LF>The default is to log the clock to the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String in the Data Set to be used for logging.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size:  This ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the memory used by the computer.
Log the time to a Data Set.<LF>The default is to log the time since you began taking data to the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String in the Data Set to be used for logging.
Log/Don't Log
Logging info
Logs the value of the sensor or other item to a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is the value of Port 1 is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: Initialize Logging and Start Logging are still needed to use this command.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Sensor value: String in the port or item to read value from. 
Longest Segment Coordinates
Longest Segment Length
Lookup Table
Loop While Angle Sensor Is Greater Than
Loop While Angle Sensor Is Less Than 
Loop While Camera Sensor Is Greater Than
Loop While Camera Sensor Is Less Than
Loop While Celsius Is Less Than Or Equal To
Loop While Celsius is Greater Than
Loop While Clock Is Greater Than
Loop While Clock Value Is Less Than 
Loop While Container Is Greater Than
Loop While Container Value Is Less Than
Loop While Fahrenheit Is Greater Than
Loop While Fahrenheit Is Less Than 
Loop While Humidity is Greater Than (HumiPro LogIT)
Loop While Humidity is Less Than (HumiPro LogIT)
Loop While Light Sensor Is Greater Than
Loop While Light Sensor is Less Than 
Loop While Number Of Clicks Is Less Than 
Loop While Number Of Touches and Releases Is Less Than
Loop While Points in Data Set is Less Than
Loop While Pressure Is Greater Than (Pressure LogIT)
Loop While Pressure is Less Than (Pressure LogIT)
Loop While Sound Level is Greater Than (Sound LogIT)
Loop While Sound Level is Less Than (Sound LogIT)
Loop While Temperature (C) is Greater Than (ProTemp LogIT)
Loop While Temperature (C) is Less Than (ProTemp LogIT)
Loop While Touch Sensor Is Pushed
Loop While Touch Sensor Is Released
Loop While Value Of Mail Is Greater Than
Loop While Value Of Mail Is Less Than
Loop While Value Of Timer Is Greater Than
Loop While Value Of Timer Is Less Than 
Loop While Voltage Sensor Is Greater Than (Voltmeter LogIT)
Loop While Voltage Sensor is Less Than (Voltmeter LogIT)
Loop While pH is Greater Than (pH LogIT)
Loop While pH is Less Than (ph LogIT)
Low
Low Pass/High Pass (Low)
Low pass/High pass (Low pass)
Lower Cutoff
Lower Threshold
Lower Threshold (0-10)
Lower Threshold (0-15)
Lower Value
Lower value
Lux LogIT
Lux Sensor Container
Lux Sensor Fork
MAIN TEXT
Machine Access List
Mail Container
Mail Value
Mail box
Mail received
Mailbox Equal Fork
Mailbox Fork
Make Curve
Make the program jump to a specific place in the <LF>string.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the <LF>string.<LF>The default jump number is 1.<LF><LF>Note: The Landing command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to<LF> 20 to represent the jump number.  The same <LF>number must be used in the corresponding Landing command.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Land command is needed somewhere else <LF>in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
Make the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF>The default jump number is 1.<LF><LF>Note: The Landing command is needed somewhere else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to 20 to represent the jump number.  The same number must be used in the corresponding Landing command.
Manual
Mark
Mask
Mask BMP
Mask Color
Mask?
Math
Matrix Indexes
Matrix Indexes Out
Max
Max Info
Max Number
Max Radius
Max Random Number
Max number of vectors in ROI
Max random time (sec)
Maxima
Maximal Value
Maximum
Maximum Value
Maximum height
Mean
Mean Reaction Time
Mean Value
Means
Measure
Measure 
Measure Tools
Measurement
Measurement shows the current measurement retrieved by AI Single Scan.<LF><LF>For further details on the retrieved data values, please refer to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition On-Line Help.
Measures the distance between selected edges with high-precision subpixel accuracy. The IMAQ Line Gauge Tool VI supports different measurement modes. For example, you can use this VI to measure distances between points and edges and vice versa. The IMAQ Line Gauge Tool VI also can step and repeat its measurements across the image. Depending on the type of the measurement, this VI first determines the relevant edges in the image before computing the distances.<LF>    	  <LF>Base Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>   Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>   base-reference coordinate system.<LF>	<LF>   Angle is the angle the base-reference coordinate system makes   <LF>   with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>    Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the   <LF>    interpolation. Two values are possible.<LF><LF>      1	Quadratic <LF>      2	Cubic Spline<LF>  <LF>  SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are     <LF>  obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies     <LF>  that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>Image is the input source image. 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images are supported.<LF>	<LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the pixel coordinates that form the end points of the line. <LF>	<LF>Edge Parameters is a cluster defining the characteristics of the filter used to detect edges. This cluster consists of the following parameters.<LF><LF><LF>    contrast specifies the threshold for the contrast of the edge. Only <LF>    edges with a contrast greater than this value are considered in <LF>    the detection process. Contrast is defined as the difference <LF>    between the average pixel intensity before the edge and the<LF>    average pixel intensity after the edge. <LF>	<LF>   filter width specifies the number of pixels that are averaged to find <LF>   the contrast at either side of the edge.<LF> 	  <LF>  Steepness specifies the slope of the edge. This value represents <LF>   the number of pixels that correspond to the transition area of the <LF>   edge.<LF><LF>Measurement Type specifies the type of measurement you want to perform. The following values are possible.<LF><LF>   1	Edge To Edge	Measures the distance between two edge <LF>      locations in an image.<LF>   2	Edge To Point	Measures the distance between an edge in the <LF>     image and another point in the image.<LF>  3	Point To Edge	Measures the distance between a point and an  <LF>     edge in the image.<LF>   4	Point To Point	Measures the distance between two points in <LF>       the image.<LF>Note:	Subpixel information is not used when measuring distances between points. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Offset Array is an array of point clusters that specifies the shift in the start and end points of the pixel coordinates. The Offset Array is used for repeating the measurement across the image.<LF><LF>New Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>    Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>    new-reference coordinate system.<LF><LF>   	Angle is the angle the new-reference coordinate system makes <LF>    with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>Distances is an array containing the measured distances.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Measures the light level averaged over 5 samples and returns it in local variable AvrLight (LocalVar1).<LF><LF>LocalVar4-8 is preserved by the sub.
Measures the light level averaged over 5 samples<LF>and returns it in the local variable AvrLight <LF>(LocalVar1).<LF><LF>LocalVar4-8 is preserved by the sub.
Media
Mem Used
Mem total
Memory Allocation
Memory Map
Menu
Menu Bar
Merge the two strings of a Fork back together.<LF><LF>Note: All Forks need a Merge, so that there will <LF>always be an equal number of Merges as there are <LF>Forks.<LF>
Merge the two strings of a Fork back together.<LF><LF>Note: All Forks need a Merge, so that there will always be an equal number of Merges as there are Forks.<LF>
Method
Min
Min Info
Min Radius
Minima
Minimal Value
Minimum
Minor Incr
Mirror
Misc
Mode
Moderato
Modifier to read
Modifier to set
Modifier to view
Modifiers
Modifies the resolution of an image.<LF>     	<LF>Image is the reference to the image whose size has to be modified.<LF><LF>X Resolution gives the new horizontal resolution of the image. <LF><LF>Y Resolution gives the new vertical resolution of the image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the image whose size is modified to a resolution specified by the X Resolution and Y Resolution parameters.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	This function reuses the space previously occupied by the pixels of the image. This function is used in preparation for a fill-in and does not transfer the original image into a new memory space. The original image is lost.
Monel?
Monitors access control  of sound.<LF><LF>If any task of higher priority wants control of the sound,  the program will jump  to the red access land<LF><LF>Note: Task priority can be set using the Task Priority command
Monitors access control - if any task of higher priority wants control of the outputs,  jump to the red event land<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports Monitored: String in the ports of the output(s) to be monitored.<LF>
Monitors access control of motor(s) or output(s).<LF><LF>If any task of higher priority wants control of the motor(s) or output(s),  the program will jump  to the red access land<LF><LF>Note: Task priority can be set using the Task Priority command<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports Monitored:  String in the ports of the output(s) to be monitored.
Monitors events - if any events occur the program will jump to the Scout Event Landing.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event(s) is being watched.<LF>
Monitors events - if any events occur the program<LF>will jump to the  Scout Event Landing.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event(s) is being watched.<LF>
Morph_AutoMedian
Morph_Close
Morph_Dilation
Morph_Erosion
Morph_ExternalEdge
Morph_HitMiss
Morph_InternalEdge
Morph_Open
Morph_ProperClose
Morph_ProperOpen
Morph_Thick
Morph_Thin
Morphology
Motion
Motor A forward
Motor A reverse
Motor B forward
Motor B reverse
Motor C forward
Motor C reverse
Motor Current (2)
Motor Status (0,1,2)
Motor forward
Motor random
Motor reverse
Motor speeds
MovTime (1 - 32767)
Move event
Movement Type
Movie Cntrls
MultiLine
Multiplies two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is multiplied by the Constant value for image-constant operations. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Multiplies two images where the first is a complex image, or multiples a complex image and a complex constant.<LF>  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is multiplied by this complex constant for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B s the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) × SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) × Constant.
Multiply
Multiply a number to the container.<LF>The default is to multiply the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to multiply:  String a number to multiply to <LF>the container.
Multiply a number to the container.<LF>The default is to multiply the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to multiply:  String a number to multiply to the container.
Multiply to Container
Music
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Eighth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Eighth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Half note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Half note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Quarter note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Quarter note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Sixteenth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.<LF>
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Sixteenth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Whole note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Whole note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Down<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music <LF>commands to decrease the pitch by one octave <LF>or more.  When more than one 'Down an Octave' <LF>modifier is used the pitch is changed by multiple <LF>octaves.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Down<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to decrease the pitch by one octave or more.<LF>When more than one 'Down an Octave' modifier is used the pitch is changed by multiple octaves.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Up<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to increase the pitch by one octave or more.<LF>When more than one 'Up an Octave' modifier is<LF>used the pitch is changed by multiple octaves.
Music Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Up<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to increase the pitch by one octave or more.<LF>When more than one 'Up an Octave' modifier is used the pitch is changed by multiple octaves.
Music Note A
Music Note A# (Bb)
Music Note B
Music Note C
Music Note C# (Db)
Music Note D
Music Note D# (Eb)
Music Note E
Music Note F
Music Note F# (Gb)
Music Note G
Music Note G# (Ab)
Mute Sound
My Programs
My Projects
My Songs
N error code
NA
NK
NO
NU
Name
Name of Program
National Instruments
National Instruments Patents:<LF>US 4,901,221 US 5,291,587 5,301,301 5,497,500<LF>Euro 0242131  4,914,568 5,481,741 5,481,740<LF>Can 0242131  5,301,336 5,475,851 5,504,917
Nb Circles
Nb Detected Edges
Nb of Erosion
Needle Base
Needle color
New Image
New Page
New Picture
New Project
New Reference
New Task
New scroll
New value
New...
New... &N
Next
No  event
No Change
No RCX
No Song
No Trigger
None
None<CR>Switch<CR>Temperature<CR>Reflection<CR>Angle<CR>ID0 Switch<CR>ID1 Switch<CR>ID2 Switch<CR>
Normal
Not used<LF>NU<LF>Not used<LF>NU<LF>Not used<LF>NU<LF>SERIAL PORT INITIALIZATION ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB could not initialize the serial port - is there something already controlling that port?  (Mac Users - check AppleTalk)  Try another port.<LF>SERIAL PORT INITIALIZATION ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB could not initialize the serial port - is there something already controlling that port?  (Mac Users - check AppleTalk)  Try another port.<LF>BUFFER SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>BUFFER SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL WRITE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL WRITE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>NO TOWER RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB did not get any response from your tower - check that the green light turns on when you hit ""try again"" - make sure that the cable is well connected.  If you are still having problems, try a new battery in the tower or a different port.<LF>WRONG TOWER RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an incorrect response from your tower - check that the green light turns on when you hit ""try again"" - make sure that the cable is well connected. This error is usually a result of a bad cable connection (some garbled information is returned to the computer).  Set the switch on the bottom of the tower to Low. If you are still having problems, try a new battery in the tower, a new cable, or a different port.<LF>CHECKSUM ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error in the RCX reply.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX.<LF>CHECKSUM ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error in the RCX reply.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX.<LF>NO RCX RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB is not getting any response from your RCX.  Check to make sure it is on and that it has fresh batteries.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX..<LF>WRONG RCX RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB is getting a garbled response from your RCX.  Check to make sure it is on and that it has fresh batteries.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  Try switching the tower to Low power (switch at bottom of tower). This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX..<LF>Not used<LF>NU<LF>Not used<LF>NU
Note : 16 bits far for Win 3.1,<LF>32 bits flat pointer otherwise.
Note Length
Notes
Nothing
Num Plots
Num lines
Num of Pts
Number
Number (0 - 1)
Number of Basic Particles
Number of Classes
Number of Clicks
Number of Complex Particles
Number of Edge Pairs
Number of Edges
Number of Erosion
Number of Holes
Number of Loops
Number of Matches
Number of Particles
Number of Plots
Number of Points in Spline
Number of Points in curve
Number of data points (max 2000)
Number of points
Number to AND
Number to OR
Number to add
Number to divide
Number to find absolute value
Number to find sign of
Number to multiply
Number to send in mail?
Number to subtract
Numbers
Numeric
OCTAVE 5
OFF
OFF/ON
OK
OLD Inventor Level
OLD Pilot Level
OLD RCX
ON
OPEN EXAMPLE
OPENING...
OR Container
OR the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to OR the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to OR:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ORed.
OR the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to OR the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to OR:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ORed.
Object Size
Obtains a pointer on the pixels of an image. This VI also returns information on the organization of the image pixels in memory.<LF>   	<LF>Function has three modes:<LF><LF>   0	Map Pixel Pointer	Obtains the pointer on a pixel of an image <LF>     and obtains information related to the organization of the pixels      <LF>     of this image in memory.<LF>  1	Unmap Pixel Pointer	Frees the pointer and related information <LF>  previously obtained using Map Pixel Pointer.<LF>  2	Get Pixels Infos	Obtains information related to the organization   <LF>  of the pixels of an image in memory without mapping a pointer.<LF><LF>Image is the reference of the image on which the pointer is obtained.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Pointer in is only used in the Unmap Pixel Pointer mode (see the Function description). When the VI is executed to obtain a pointer (using the Map Pixel Pointer function), some information regarding the pointer that is required to unmap the pixel pointer is recorded.<LF><LF>Note:	You need to give this pointer to the VI to retrieve this information when executing the Unmap Pixel Pointer function.<LF><LF>X Coordinate allows you to select the X coordinate of the pixel in the image on which the pointer is required. This parameter is not used in the mode Unmap Pixel Pointer mode. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Y Coordinate allows you to select the Y coordinate of the pixel in the image on which the pointer is required. This parameter is not used in the mode Unmap Pixel Pointer mode. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image border size is the border size of the image.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Pointer Out is the pointer on the pixels of the image. This pointer is obtained only in the Map Pixel Pointer mode. The following table gives the pointer type for different platforms.<LF><LF>Platform	Pointer Type<LF>     IMAQ Vision for LabVIEW 4 for Windows 3.1	16-bit FAR<LF>     Other platforms	32-bit flat<LF><LF>LineWidth (Pixels) returns the total number of pixels in a horizontal line in the image. This is the sum of the X size of the image, the borders of the image, and the left and right alignments of the image, as shown in the following image. This number may not match the horizontal size of the image.<LF><LF>Pixel Size (Bytes) returns the size in bytes of each pixel in the image. This value multiplied with the LineWidth gives the number of bytes occupied by a line of the image in memory.<LF>	<LF>Transfer Max Size returns the number of bytes from the pixel pointer to the end of the image. This size represents the maximum size of bytes that can be transferred. For example, for an 8-bit image of size 256 × 256 and border 1, the line width is 272 and the maximum transfer size from pixel (0, 0) is 69632 bytes.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Obtains information regarding the contents of the file. This information is supplied only if the file has a standard file format (APD, BMP, TIF, PICT).<LF><LF>File Path: is the complete path name, including drive, directory, and filename, for the file to be loaded. This path can be supplied either by the user or the VI File Dialog from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW.<LF><LF>error in (no error): is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Calibration: is a cluster containing the following elements:<LF><LF>X Step: is the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in user units.<LF><LF>	Y Step: is the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in user units.<LF><LF>	Unit: is the user unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>Note :	This data is accessible only if the image is saved in the internal APD file format. For all other file types, this VI returns the values (in mm) X Step = 1, Y Step = 1, and Unit = 3.<LF><LF>File Type: indicates the file type that is read. This string contains the three indicative characters of the read file: APD (internal file format), BMP, TIF, or PICT (Macintosh only).<LF><LF>File Data Type: indicates the pixel size defined in the header for standard image file types.<LF><LF>	X Resolution: indicates the horizontal resolution in pixels of the image file.<LF><LF>	Y Resolution: indicates the vertical resolution in pixels of the image file.
Obtains or modifies the status of each zone in a user window.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Region status modifies the status of a user zone (TRUE or FALSE) when the input Get/Set Status? is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user needs to know the present status or modify the status of the zones. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Regions status returns the present status (TRUE or FALSE) of each zone. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Obtains or modifies the status of the grid. The grid can be used to help trace a region of interest accurately.<LF><LF>Grid Size is a structure containing two elements that encode the size of the horizontal and vertical steps for the grid. The cursor is moved by steps, as defined in this VI, when tracing a region of interest. The default value is (1, 1).<LF><LF>Get / Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user wants to know the present status or modify the step values for the grid. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Grid Size returns the present grid step size. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
Obtains or modifies the status of the regions tools.<LF><LF>Tool (Point) can have the following values:<LF><LF>Number	Icon	Tool Name	Function<LF>0	NA	No Selection	NA<LF>1		Point	Select a pixel in the image.<LF>2		Line	Draw a line in the image.<LF>3		Rectangle	Draw a rectangle (or square) in the image.<LF>4		Oval	Draw an oval (or circle) in the image.<LF>5		Polygon	Draw a polygon in the image.<LF>6		Free	Draw a freehand region in the image.<LF>7	NA	Unused 1	NA<LF>8		Zoom	Zoom-in or zoom-out in an image.<LF>9	NA	Unused 2	NA<LF>10		Broken Line	Draw a broken line in the image.<LF>11		Freehand Line	Draw a free hand line in the image.<LF>Get / Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the status of the available regions tools. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Tool returns the chosen region tool.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	This VI can be used even if the WindTools palette is not displayed.<LF><LF>
Obtains or modifies the status of the zoom factor.<LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Zoom Factor can have the following values: 1 to 16 and –1 to –16. The default value is 1 (image is displayed at its original size). <LF><LF>Center Point is a structure containing two elements containing the (x, y) coordinates used to center the image in the image window. This enables the user to center an image with respect to a user-chosen region. Additionally, Center Point can be used to place only a part of an image into an image window.<LF><LF>This value is adjusted automatically when Center Point is not coherent with the size of the image window and the zoom factor. For example, an image at 256 × 256 displayed in an image window of 256 × 256 containing a zoom factor of 1 by definition has a single Center point of (127, 127). An erroneously entered figure automatically is corrected, making the output value different than the input value.<LF><LF>Get / Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the Zoom Factor and Center Point. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor returns the present zoom factor. <LF><LF>Center Point returns the present coordinates of the Center Point. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Obtains or modifies the status regarding the visibility of a user window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindShow, which is used for displaying image windows.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Hide/Show (Show) specifies whether the tools palette is visible. Use this input only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user needs to know the present status or modify the status of the zones. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Visible? returns the present visibility status of the tools palette. A visible tools palette returns TRUE.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Obtains or sets the position of a user window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindMove, which is used for moving image windows.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Coordinates is a structure that contains the screen coordinates (in X and Y positions) where the tools palette is located or where the tools palette will be placed. This input is necessary only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user needs to know the present status or modify the status of the zones. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coordinates indicates the relative position of the event.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
Obtains or sets the position of the WindTools palette. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindMove, which is used for moving image windows.<LF><LF>Coordinates is a structure that contains the screen coordinates (in X and Y positions) where the tools palette is located or where the tools palette will be placed. This input is necessary only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status?(Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the status of the available region tools. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coordinates indicates the relative position of the event.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Obtains the present image calibration.<LF>        	  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Unit is the measuring unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>  0	undefined<LF>  1	Angstrom<LF>  2	micrometer<LF>  3	millimeter<LF>  4	centimeter<LF>  5	meter<LF>  6	kilometer<LF>  7	microinch<LF>  8	inch<LF>  9	feet <LF>  10	nautical miles<LF>  11	standard miles<LF><LF>X Step specifies the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>Y Step specifies the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Occurences
Octave
Offset Array
Offset Left/Top
Offset to Data
Offsets
Ok
Old Inventor Projects
Old Pilot Projects
Old choice
Old theme
Olive Bin
One can see that the temperature steadily dropped during the night.  As the sun came up, its rays hit the temperature sensor, raising the local temperature above ambient.
Op Type
Open
Open Display
Open File
Open Song
Open... &O
Open?
Opening http://www.ceeo.tufts.edu/<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>Tufts University
Opening http://www.ifactory.com<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>Interactive Factory Web site
Opening http://www.lego.com/dacta/<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>LEGO Dacta
Opening http://www.natinst.com/robolab/<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>National Instruments LabVIEW
Operation
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operator
Option
Optional Max Value
Optional Min Value
Optional Rectangle
Or
Or/Nor (Or)
Orange Bin
Order #
Orders (or classifies) the pixel values surrounding the pixel being processed. The data is placed into an array and the pixel being processed is set to the Nth pixel value, the Nth pixel being the ordered number. <LF>    	    <LF>Size & Order # is a cluster that specifies the following variables:<LF><LF> X size is the size of the horizontal matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF> Y size is the size of the vertical matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF> Order # is the order number chosen after classing the values. The   <LF>  default is 4.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	See the Nonlinear Filters section of Chapter 5, Spatial Filtering, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about the Nth order filter.<LF><LF>Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the convolution matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix must have a minimum border of 1, a 5 × 5 matrix must have a minimum border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF><LF>The default for this VI is a 3 × 3 Median operation with X = 3, Y = 3, and Order = 4. To change to a 5 × 5 Median operation, the cluster must take the values X = 5, Y = 5, and Order = 12. In this last example, the order number is determined by calculating the central pixel number in the array. For a 5 × 5 convolution, Order = 12 (the thirteenth pixel) because that pixel is the center pixel number for a 2D array of 25 pixels. <LF><LF>A lighter image results when using a higher order number (such as 7 in a 3 × 3 matrix). Darker images result when using a lower order number (such as 1 in a 3 × 3 matrix). <LF><LF>A median (center-pixel) operation is advantageous because it standardizes the gray-level values without significantly modifying the form of the objects or the overall brightness in the image.<LF>If the order value that is entered is 0, then the image obtained is representative of the local minimum from the source image. If the order value that is passed is equal to [(X Size × Y Size) – 1], then the obtained image is representative of the local maximum from the source image.
Orientation
Origin
Original Page Names
Original and fitted curves
Other
Other Parameters
Outline?
Output A
Output B
Output C
Output D
Output E
Output Element
Output F
Output G
Output H
Output Parameters
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to <LF>select Output Port A.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to <LF>select Output Port C.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to <LF>select Output Port H.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port B.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port C.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port D.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port E.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port F.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port G.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port A.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port B.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port C.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port D.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port E.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port F.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port G.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port H.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
Output string
Output value
Outputs
Oval
Overview
PICTURE PATHS
PICTURENAMES
PLANE
PLAY VIDEO
PWM Output Settings
Pad
Page
Page 1
Page Areas
Page Controls
Page Title
Pages
Paint
Paint mode
Palette Color
Palette Number (gray)
Parameter
Parameters
Path
Path To Project_Images
Path to Investigator
Path to Project
Path to ROBOLAB
Path to ROBOLAB program 
Path to RoboLAB
Path to Vault (Themes)   
Path to file
Path to lv_quit
Path to original project
Path to page
Path to program files
Path to project
Path to splash
Paths
Pause
Peak Time
Pen
Pen pattern
Pen pattern (8x8)
Pen style
Pen transfer mode
Pen width
Percent
Percent data
Percent done
Percent prgms
Percent used
Percentage of scale
Perform two mathematical operations on Bins and put the result into a new Bin.
Performs a user-chosen lookup table transformation by remapping the pixel values in an image.<LF>  	  <LF>Lookup Table is a color replacement table. This array can contain 256 elements (8-bit) or 65536 elements (16-bit) depending on the type of image. Individual pixels within the image are not modified in cases in which the lookup table is missing a corresponding value.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Performs an AND or NAND operation on two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>And/Nand (And) is the result from a logic operation. If set to TRUE, the result of a logic operation is the negative of the performed logic operation (NAND instead of AND). The default is FALSE, which specifies a positive operation (AND).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is a binary constant used for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>All connected images must be the same image type. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. <LF><LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) AND SrcB(x, y).<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) AND Constant.
Performs an OR or NOR operation on two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Or/Nor (Or) is the result from a logic operation. If set to TRUE, the result of a logic operation is the negative of the performed logic operation (NOR instead of OR). The default is FALSE, which specifies a positive operation (OR).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is a binary constant used for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>All connected images must be the same image type. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. <LF><LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) OR SrcB(x, y).<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) OR Constant.
Performs an XOR or XNOR operation on two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Xor/Xnor (Xor) is the result from a logic operation. If set to TRUE, the result of a logic operation is the negative of the performed logic operation (XNOR instead of XOR). The default is FALSE, which specifies a positive operation (XOR).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is a binary constant used for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>All connected images must be the same image type. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected.<LF> <LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) XOR SrcB(x, y)<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) XOR Constant.
Performs morphological transformations that can be directly applied to gray-level images. All source and destination image types must be the same. The connected source image for a morphological transformation must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the structuring element. A 3 × 3 structuring element requires a minimal border of 1, a 5 × 5 structuring element requires a minimal border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF>    	    <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Operation specifies the type of morphological transformation procedure to use. The default is 0.<LF><LF>  0	AutoM	(Default) Auto median.<LF>  1	Close	Dilation followed by an erosion<LF>  2	Dilate	Dilation<LF>  3	Erode	Erosion<LF>  4	unused	<LF>  5	unused	<LF>  6	unused	<LF>  7	unused	<LF>  8	Open	Erosion followed by a dilation<LF>  9	PClose	A succession of 7 closings and openings<LF>  10	POpen	A succession of 7 openings and closings<LF><LF>Structuring Element is a 2D array that contains the structuring element to be applied to the image. The size of the structuring element (the size of this array) determines the processing size. A structuring element of 3 × 3 is used if this input is not connected. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>A structuring element must have odd-sized dimensions so that it contains a central pixel. The function does not take into account the odd boundary, farthest out on the matrix, if one of the dimensions for the structuring element is even. For example, if the input structuring element is 6 × 4 (X = 6 and Y = 4), the actual processing is performed at 5 × 3. Both the sixth line and the fourth row are ignored. Recall that the second dimension in a G array is the vertical direction (Y). The processing speed is correlated with the size of the structuring element. For example, a 3 × 3 convolution processes nine pixels while a 5 × 5 convolution processes 25 pixels.
Performs movement sequences and plays sounds. <LF><LF>Ports: Select the movement type (Dance, Bug, <LF>Random, Jitter) and duration. <LF><LF>Time and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.
Performs movement sequences and plays sounds. <LF><LF>Ports: Select the movement type (Dance, Bug, <LF>Random, Jitter) and duration. <LF><LF>Time and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  String a modifier to choose a movement and sound sequence.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.
Performs one loop of the basic motion types.  The <LF>local variable Time sets the duration of each step<LF>in the motion. <LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Performs one loop of the basic motion types.  The <LF>local variable Time sets the duration of each step<LF>in the motion. <LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  Choose which type of motion you wish by stringing in a modifier.<LF><LF>Time: String in a modifier to set the duration of each step in the motion. The value can range from 1 to 32767.<LF><LF>
Performs primary morphological transformations. All source images must be 8-bit binary images. The connected source image for a morphological transformation must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the structuring element. A 3 × 3 structuring element requires a minimal border of 1, a 5 × 5 structuring element requires a minimal border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF>    <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Operation specifies the type of morphological transformation procedure to use. The default is 0.<LF><LF> 0	AutoM	(Default) Auto median<LF> 1	Close	Dilation followed by an erosion.<LF> 2	Dilate	Dilation (the opposite of an erosion)<LF> 3	Erode	Erosion that eliminates isolated background pixels<LF> 4 	Gradient 	Extraction of internal and external contours of a <LF>     particle<LF>  5	Gradient out	Extraction of exterior contours of a particle.<LF>  6	Gradient in	Extraction of interior contours of a particle<LF>  7	Hit miss	Elimination of all pixels that do not have the same <LF>    pattern as found in the structuring element<LF>  8	Open	Erosion followed by a dilation<LF>  9	PClose	A succession of 7 closings and openings<LF>  10	POpen	A succession of 7 openings and closings<LF>  11	Thick	Activation of all pixels matching the pattern in the <LF>       structuring element<LF>  12	Thin	Activation of all pixels matching the pattern in the   <LF>       structuring element<LF><LF>Structuring Element is a 2D array that contains the structuring element to be applied to the image. The size of the structuring element (the size of this array) determines the processing size. A structuring element of 3 × 3 is used if this input is not connected. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>A structuring element must have odd-sized dimensions so that it contains a central pixel. The function does not take into account the odd boundary, furthest out on the matrix, if one of the dimensions for the structuring element is even. For example, if the input structuring element is 6 × 4 (X = 6 and Y = 4), the actual processing is performed at 5 × 3. Both the sixth line and the fourth row are ignored. Recall that the second dimension in a G array is the vertical direction (Y). The processing speed is correlated with the size of the structuring element; for example, a 3 × 3 convolution processes nine pixels while a 5 × 5 convolution processes 25 pixels.
Performs the avoid sequence avoiding right or left.  <LF>Avoiding right has random turn time.<LF><LF>Local variable Time, Movement Type and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  String in a single modifier. <LF>                           (0= Avoid Left, 1= Avoid Right)<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.
Performs the avoid sequence avoiding right or left.  <LF>Avoiding right has random turn time.<LF><LF>Local variable Time, Movement Type and LocalVar4-8<LF>are preserved by the sub.
Perimeter
Perimeter (pixels)
Perio. Counter
Period
Photometric
Piano
Piano Cntrls
Piano Player
Picture
Picture 1
Picture 2
Picture in
Picture to add (none)
Pilot 1
Pilot 2
Pilot 3
Pilot 4
Pilot Cmds
Pilot Level
Pilot Paths
Pilot Programs
Pilot Themes
Pilot Vault
Pixel Array
Pixel Average
Pixel Color
Pixel Coordinates
Pixel Pointer in
Pixel Pointer out
Pixel Position
Pixel Position Out
Pixel Size (Bytes)
Pixel Sum
Pixel Value
Pixel Value (I16)
Pixel Value (SGL)
Pixel Value (U32)
Pixel Value (U8)
Pixel Value (U8, I16, Float)
Pixels (I16)
Pixels (SGL)
Pixels (U8)
Pixels Line
Pixels Line (I16)
Pixels Line (SGL)
Pixels Line (U32)
Pixels Line (U8)
Pixels Line(Float)
Pixels Line(I16)
Pixels Line(U32)
Pixels Line(U8)
Pixels(Float)
Pixels(I16)
Pixels(U8)
Pixvalue
Plane
Play
Play Any Note
Play Current Song
Play Sound
Play Sound #4
Play Video
Play a short beep  (sound #4).
Play any note according to a specified frequency.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Frequency: String in a frequency in Hertz (Hz) for <LF>the note to be played.<LF><LF>Duration:  String in a number in seconds.
Play any note according to a specified frequency.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Frequency: String in a frequency in Hertz (Hz) for the note to be played. <LF> <LF>Duration:  String in a number in seconds.
Play one of six different beeping sounds.<LF>The default sound (6) is a fast increasing sweeping <LF>sound.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Sound Type:  String a number between 1 and 6 to <LF>change the sound type:<LF><LF>1 = Key-click  <LF>2 = BeepBeep<LF>3 = Descending sweep<LF>4 = Rising sweep<LF>5 = Buzz<LF>6 = Fast rising sweep
Play one of six different beeping sounds.<LF>The default sound (6) is a fast rising sweep sound.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Sound Type:  String a number between 1 and 6 to change the sound type:<LF><LF>1 = Key-click  <LF>2 = BeepBeep<LF>3 = Descending sweep<LF>4 = Rising sweep<LF>5 = Buzz<LF>6 = Fast rising sweep
Play sound #4.
Play the musical note 'A# (Bb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'A# (Bb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half,<LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'A'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'A'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'B'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'B'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'C# (Db)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'C# (Db)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'C'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves..
Play the musical note 'C'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'D# (Eb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'D# (Eb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'D'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter <LF>or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'D'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'E'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'E'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'F# (Gb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'F# (Gb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'F'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'F'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'G# (Ab)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, <LF>half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'G# (Ab)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'G'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, <LF>half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the musical note 'G'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
Play the sound in a container.  <LF>The default is to play the sound in the Red Container for 1 sec.<LF><LF>Note: Frequencies are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Time (sec):  String  in a number for how long to play the note
Plays a system sound according to the local <LF>variable Status A and the local variable Status B.  <LF><LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>StatusA:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>StatusB:  String a single modifier.
Plays a system sound according to the local <LF>variable Status A and the local variable Status B.  <LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Plot
Plot 0
Plot 1
Plot 10
Plot 11
Plot 12
Plot 13
Plot 2
Plot 3
Plot 4
Plot 5
Plot 6
Plot 7
Plot 8
Plot 9
Plot Attributes
Plot Color
Plot Color 2
Plot Style
Plot of Area
Plot of Maximum
Plot of Mean
Plot of Minimum
Plot of Slope
Plot of Statistic
Plot of Statistic 2
Point
Point 0
Point Number
Point Symbol
Points
Points Arc
Points Container
Points and Lines
Polarity
Poll Interface Box
Polygon
Port
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port A
Port B
Port C
Port Value
Port or memory allocation where value is being read from.
Ports
Ports Monitored
Pos. X
Pos. Y
Position
Position Container (Position LogIT)
Position LogIT
Position Sensor Fork (Position LogIT)
Power
Power A
Power B
Power C
Power Level
Power Level 1
Power Level 2
Power Level 3
Power Level 4
Power Level 5
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 2.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 3.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 4.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 5.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands <LF>to set the power level to 1.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 1.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 2.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 3.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 4.
Power Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 5.
Powerdown time (min)
Precision (degrees)
Preloading
Present
Presentation
Pressed
Pressure Container (Pressure LogIT)
Pressure LogIT
Pressure Sensor Fork (Pressure LogIT)
Pressure sensor
Presto
Preview
Previous
Prgm#
Prgms
Print
Print ?
Print?
Priority
ProTemp LogIT
Process
Processed Image
Processor
Produces a histogram equalization of an image. This VI redistributes the pixel values of an image in order to provide an accumulated linear histogram. It is necessary to execute IMAQ Histogram prior to this VI in order to supply Histogram Report as input. The precision of the VI is dependent on the histogram precision, which in turn is dependent on the number of classes used in the histogram. <LF>    	  <LF>Histogram Report is the histogram from the source image. This histogram is supplied from the output of the VI IMAQ Histogram. No processing occurs if this input is not connected, therefore you need to connect the same image to both IMAQ Histogram and this VI. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Range is a cluster containing the minimum and maximum values for the range to equalize. The equalization of the entire image occurs if this cluster is not connected (or the defaults 0 and 0 are used as input). In this case, the Minimal Value and Maximal Value contained in Histogram Report are considered to be the min and max. The default is (0, 0).<LF><LF>The following elements are specified in this cluster:<LF><LF>Minimum is the smallest value used for processing. After processing, all pixel values that are less than or equal to the Minimum (in the original image) are set to 0 for an 8-bit image. In 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to the smallest pixel value found in the original image.<LF>	<LF>Maximum is the largest value used for processing. After processing, all pixel values that are greater than or equal to the Maximum (in the original image) are set to 255 for an 8-bit image. In 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to the largest pixel value found in the original image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	The modification to the pixel value is dependent on the histogram contents, regardless of the image type used. All pixels entering into the same histogram class have an identical value after equalization. 
Program
Program 1
Program Area
Program Level 1
Program Level 2
Program Level 3
Program Level 4
Program Level 5
Program Number
Program Page
Programmer
Programming 1
Programming 2
Project
Project Name
Project Name 2
Project Refnum OUT
Project Title
Projection x
Projection y
Projects
Proper close morph
Proper_Close
Proper_Open
Publish
Publish type
Purple Bin
Put the absolute value of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put the absolute value of 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to find absolute value:  String in the number.
Put the absolute value of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put the absolute value of 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to find absolute value:  String in the number.
Put the contents of a Plot into a bin.<LF>The default bin is the red bin.
Put the sign of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put a 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to <LF>the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Sign of Number:  String a number, the sign of which will be put into <LF>the container.  If you string a negative number, a -1 will be put into <LF>the container, a positive number will put a 1 in the container, and a <LF>0 will put a 0 in the container.
Put the sign of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put a 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Sign of Number:  String a number, the sign of which will be put into the container.  If you string a negative number, a -1 will be put into the container, a positive number will put a 1 in the container, and a 0 will put a 0 in the container.
Quantifies the contents of an image or the regions within an image. The region definition is performed with a labeled image mask. Each mask possesses a single unique value.<LF>    	  <LF>Image is the input source image.<LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the regions to quantify in the image. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for the quantification. Each pixel in this image (mask) indicates, by its value, which region belongs the corresponding pixel in  Image. 255 different regions can be quantified directly from the Image. A quantification is performed on the complete image if the Image Mask is not connected.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Global Report is a cluster containing the quantification data relative to all the regions within an image (or the entire image if the Image Mask is not connected). The following elements are contained in this cluster:<LF><LF>    Mean Value of the pixels is returned. <LF>	   <LF>    Standard Deviation of the pixel values is returned. It indicates <LF>    the distribution of the values in relation to the average. The   <LF>    higher this value, the better the distribution of the pixel values.<LF>	   <LF>     Minimal Value returns the smallest pixel value. <LF>   	<LF>     Maximal Value returns the largest pixel value. <LF>    	<LF>     Area (calibrated) returns the analyzed surface area in user-units. <LF>    <LF>     Area (pixels) returns the analyzed surface area in pixels.<LF>   <LF>     % returns the percentage of the analyzed surface in relation to <LF>     the complete image. <LF><LF>Regions Report is a cluster containing the quantification data relative to each region within an image (or the entire image if the Image Mask is not connected). The nth element in this array contains the data regarding the nth region. The size of this array is equal to the largest pixel value in Image Mask. The returned data is identical to the data in Global Report. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Quarter note
Quit
RCX
RCX BATTERY LEVEL
RCX Battery Level
RCX Battery Power
RCX Error
RCX FIRMWARE VERSION
RCX Firmware Version
RCX IR POWER SETTING
RCX IR Power Setting
RCX Location
RCX Multimeter
RCX Oscilloscope
RCX Output Control
RCX POWERDOWN TIME
RCX PROGRAMS 1 & 2
RCX Powerdown Time
RCX Present
RCX Programs 1 & 2
RCX Running and in range?
RCX Running?
RCX SETTINGS
RCX Settings
RCX Tower Power
RCX errors
RCX in View?
RGB
RGB Chunky
RIS
ROBO Text
ROBO Text 2
ROBOLAB
ROBOLAB Help
ROBOLAB Internet Server
ROBOLAB Settings
ROBOLAB was developed at the Tufts University College of Engineering.
ROI
ROI Descriptor
ROI Descriptor in
ROI Descriptor out
ROI Descriptors
ROI Descriptors out
ROI Graph
ROI Pixel Statistics
RS
Radial Points
Radius
Random Colors
Random Direction
Random Fill Container
Random Fork
Random Number
Random Number Modifier<LF><LF>A random value between zero and eight.
Range
Range Point
Raw
Reaction Time
Read BMP
Read JPEG
Read Last Error
Read Raw File
Read Run Status
Read Tower Power
Read Value
Read and Display Value
Read error code
Read the Run Status of the RCX.<LF><LF>(This tells you if the little person is running on the RCX screen)<LF><LF>This returns a TRUE if the RCX is out of range or if the RCX is in range and the person is running.
Read the transmitter power of the RCX.<LF><LF>(The transmitter power of the infrared transmitter has to be set manually with the switch on the front of the tower).<LF><LF>Outputs true if the RCX is set to Hi Power.
Reads LCD indicators, using an input image and the descriptor of the ROI calculated by the Vi Get LCD ROI . It returns the number as a double and as a string. It also indicates via the status output if the number was properly recognized or if one of the digit hasn't been well recognized, thanks to the status output. This output returns the status of each digits of the indicator.<LF>This Vi can read LCD or electroluminescent indicators. It is robust to light drift.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image to be treated.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor is the descriptor of the area of interest calculated by the Vi Get LCD ROI that contains the quadrilaterals surrounding each digit.<LF><LF>- 	Threshold (default=8) is used to determine if a segment is on or off. This value is compared to the standard deviation of the line profiles. This value may be increased when using contrasted images or lowered in case of poorly contrasted images.<LF><LF>- 	Search sign indicates if the algorithm has to read the sign of the indicator.<LF><LF>- 	Search Decimal Separator (default FALSE) search and not the decimal separator after each digit.<LF><LF>- 	LCD/LED (LCD) (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the indicator type. FALSE corresponds to LCD indicators, TRUE to electroluminescent indicators.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read number. If the decimal separator is on and the control Search Decimal Separator is true, it is represented in the string by a dot “.” symbol.<LF><LF>- 	Output value is the double containing the value of the number represented by the indicator number.<LF><LF>-  Segments status is a array of clusters of booleans that contains the state of the segments.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Reads a predefined kernel. This VI uses the contents of a convolution catalog (imaqknl.txt). This VI outputs a specified kernel after reading the kernel-associated code. This code consists of three separate units: Kernel Family, Kernel Size, and Kernel Number. If you already know the code, then you can enter directly it with Kernel Code.<LF><LF>Kernel Family determines the type of matrix. The valid values are between 1 and 4, each associated with a particular type. This value corresponds to the thousandth unit in the researched code.<LF><LF>  1	Gradient <LF>  2	Laplacian <LF>  3	Smoothing<LF>  4	Gaussian<LF><LF>Kernel Size (3,5,...) determines the horizontal and vertical matrix size. The values are 3, 5, and 7, corresponding to the convolutions 3 × 3, 5 × 5, and 7 × 7 supplied in the matrix catalog. This value corresponds to the hundredth unit in the researched code.<LF><LF>Kernel Number is the matrix family number. It is a two-digit number, between 0 and n, belonging to a family and a size. A number of predefined matrices are available for each type and size. <LF><LF>Kernel Code is a code that permits direct access to a convolution matrix cataloged in the file imaqknl.txt. Each code specifies a specific convolution matrix. This input is used under the conditions that it is connected and is not 0. The kernel located in the file then is transcribed into a 2D G array that is available from the output Kernel. The user can use the codes to specify a predefined kernel as well as to create new user-coded kernels. The coding syntax is simple to employ and is broken down in the following manner. <LF> <LF>  FSnn where F is the kernel family (1 to 4),<LF>  S is the kernel size (3,5, and so forth), and<LF>  nn is the kernel number (based on the family and size of the   <LF>  kernel).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Divider is the normalization factor associated with the retrieved kernel.<LF><LF>Kernel is the resulting matrix. It corresponds to a kernel encoded by a code specified from the inputs Kernel Family, Kernel Size, and Kernel Number or from a code directly passed through the input Kernel Code. This output can be connected directly to the input Kernel in IMAQ Convolute.<LF><LF>Kernel code indicates the code that was used to retrieve the kernel.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Reads a single seven segment digit from a rectangular area of interest drawn around this digit. It can read LCD and electroluminescent indicators. It returns a value as a string and a cluster that contains the state of each segment (on or off).<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image containing the seven segment digit.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user that corresponds to a quadrilateral surrounding the digit. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi. The type of ROI must be rectangle or polygonal.<LF><LF>- 	Threshold (default=8) is used to determine if a segment is on or off. This value is compared to the standard deviation of the line profiles. This value may be increased when using images with high contrast or lowered in case of poor contrast images.<LF><LF>- 	LCD/LED (LCD) (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the indicator type. FALSE corresponds to LCD indicators and TRUE to electroluminescent indicators.<LF><LF>- 	Search Decimal Separator (default FALSE) determines whether to look for the decimal separator after each digit.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	String contains the value of the digit and decimal separator. If the decimal separator is on and the control Search Decimal Separator is true, it is represented in the string by a dot “.” symbol.<LF><LF>- 	Number contains the read digit.<LF><LF>- 	Segments status is a cluster of booleans that contains the state of the segments.  <LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Reads an image file. The file format can be a standard format [APD, TIF, BMP , and PICT (Macintosh Only)] .<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the image structure to which the data from the image file is applied.<LF><LF>Load Color Palette? (No) determines whether the user wants to load the color table present in the file (if it exists). If loaded, this table is read and made available to the output Color palette. The default is FALSE.<LF><LF>File Options is a cluster of user-optional values that permits the user to read non-standard file formats. The file structure must be known to the user. This cluster consists of the following elements:<LF><LF>File Data Type indicates how the image file is encoded. The possible formats are :<LF><LF>  0	1-bit <LF>  1	2-bits<LF>  2	4-bits<LF>  3	8 bits (default)<LF>  4	16 bits (unsigned)<LF>  5	16 bits (signed)<LF>  6	16 bits (RGB chunky)<LF>  7	24 bits (RGB chunky)<LF>  8	24 bits (RGB planar)<LF>  9	32 bits (unsigned)<LF>  10	32 bits (signed)<LF>  11	32 bits (RGB chunky)<LF>  12	32 bits (float)<LF>  13	48 bits (Complex 2 × 24 int)<LF>  14	64 bits (Complex 2 × 32 float)<LF><LF>Offset to Data specifies the size, in bytes, of the file header. This part of the file is not taken into account when read. The pixel values are read from the byte immediately after the offset size. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Use Min Max determines if the user is using a predetermined minimum and maximum. The technique to determine this minimum and maximum depends on the following input values:<LF><LF>0	Don't use min max	Minimum and maximum are dependent on the type of image. For an 8-bit image, min = 0 and max = 255.<LF>1	Use file values	The pixel values from the file are scanned one time to determine the minimum and maximum. Then, a linear interpolation is performed before loading the image. <LF>2	Use optional values	Uses the two values described below. <LF><LF>Optional Min Value is the minimum value of the pixels if Use Min Max is selected in mode 2 (Use optional values). In this case, pixels with a smaller value are altered to match the chosen minimum. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Optional Max Value is the maximum value of the pixels if Use Min Max is selected in mode 2 (Use optional values). In this case, pixels with a greater value are truncated to match the chosen maximum. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Byte Order determines if the byte weight is to be swapped (Intel or Motorola). The default is FALSE, which specifies Big endian (Motorola). TRUE specifies Little endian (Intel). This function is only useful if the pixels are encoded on more than 8 bits.<LF><LF>File Path is the complete path name, including drive, directory, and filename, for the file to be loaded. This path can be supplied either by the user or the VI File Dialog from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the image structure containing the data read from the image file.<LF><LF>File Type indicates the file type that is read. This string contains the three indicative characters of the read file: APD (internal file format), TIF, BMP (Windows only), and PICT (Macintosh only.) File Type returns xxx if the file format is unknown.<LF><LF>File Data Type indicates the pixel size defined in the header for standard image file types. File Options are not necessary for reading standard image files. For other types of image files, the returned values are passed from File Options/File Data Type. Note that the original file type is never modified because only the image in memory is converted. <LF><LF>Color Palette contains the RGB color table (if the file has one) read from the file when the user passes the value TRUE for the input Load Color Palette? (No).<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>You can use this VI to open and display an image, as illustrated in the following graphic:
Reads or extracts a pixel value from an image. <LF>    	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal coordinate of the pixel to read. <LF><LF>Y Coordinate is the vertical coordinate of the pixel to read. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixel value (U8) returns the specified pixel value. This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixel value (I16) returns the specified pixel value. This output is only used for an 8-bit or 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixel value (SGL) returns the specified pixel value. The SGL format can accept values from all image types supported (8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating point).<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Reads the pixel values from a color image. This VI returns the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer indicator. This indicator can be converted into a cluster containing three elements possessing either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal position of the pixel. <LF><LF>Y Coordinate is the vertical position of the pixel.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixel Value (U32) returns the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer indicator.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Reads the position of the needle from the base of the needle and the array of the points of the arc curved by the extremity of the needle. It can read meters with a dark needle on a light background or vu-meters with a light needle on a light background. It returns the localition of the tip of the needle as a percentage of the full range of the meter.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image to be treated.<LF><LF>- 	Needle base is a cluster containing the coordinates of the rotation center of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Arc Points is an array of clusters containing the coordinates of the points of the bow curved by the extremity of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Needle color (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the color of the needle.<LF>	FALSE corresponds to a dark needle on a light background.<LF>	TRUE corresponds to a light needle on a dark background.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Percentage of  scale contains the angle pointed by the needle, in percentage of the full scale angle.<LF><LF>- 	Point is a cluster containing the coordinates of the extremity of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.    <LF>
Reconnect
Recopies the Image Src into the Image Dst. If a pixel value is 0 (OFF) in the Image Mask, then all corresponding pixels in Image Dst are reset to 0.<LF>        	    <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The Image Mask contents are considered to be binary. All pixel values other than zero are lit and all pixel values of 0 are turned off. Image Mask must be an 8-bit image if it is different than the Image Src. Image Dst must be the same image type as Image Src.
Record
Rect
Rectangle
Red
Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph
Red (or Hue) Histogram Report
Red (or Hue) Lookup Table
Red (or Hue) Plane
Red (or Hue) Plane out
Red (or Hue) Range
Red (or Hue) value
Red Bin
Red Container
Red Data Set
Red Event
Red Event State
Red Jump
Red Land
Red Scroll
Red Timer
Red Timer  (sec)
Red scroll
Red value
Redox LogIT
Redox Sensor Container
Redox Sensor Fork
Redraw image ? (Y)
Reentry?
Ref. Point X
Ref. Point Y
Reference Center
Reference Image
Reflection
Refreshes a rectangle in an image window. The advantage of this VI is that refreshing a part of an image is always faster than drawing the whole image.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) selects the window to refresh. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Update Rectangle is an array of elements. They are the coordinates of the rectangle to be refreshed (Left / Top / Right / Bottom).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	There is a direct relationship between a window number and the last drawn image. Therefore, specifying only the window number is enough to know which image is to be refreshed.
Region Reports
Region Status
Regroups all comparison operations between two images or an image and a constant. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. <LF>    	    <LF>Operator specifies the comparison operator to use. The valid operators are described in the following table:<LF><LF>  0	Average	Calculates the average.<LF>  1	Min	Extracts the smallest value. <LF>  2	Max	Extracts the largest value.<LF>  3	Clear if <<	If SrcA(x, y) << SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>  4	Clear if << or =	If SrcA(x, y)  SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>  5	Clear if = 	If SrcA(x, y) = SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0, <LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>  6	Clear if >> or =	If SrcA(x, y)  SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>   7	Clear if >>	If SrcA(x, y) >> SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is the value used in comparison with Image Src A for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image <LF>Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
Regular Page Links
Reject Border? (No)
Released
Remain Tasks
Remote Error String
Remote Run
Remote site IP number
Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  
Remove from Container
Reorganization Mode
Replace Value
Replaces one or more image planes from a color image (RGB, HSL, or HSV). Only the planes connected at the input are replaced. If all three planes are connected then the input Image Src is not necessary and only the Image Dst is used. The image is resized to the dimensions of the planes passed on input; therefore, their size must be identical. If one or two planes are connected, then the planes must have the same dimension as the source image. <LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to an image that has its three color planes replaced. It must be an RGB-chunky image. This image is not necessary if the destination image and the three color planes are connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst (RGB) is the reference to the destination image. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Plane is the reference to the first color plane. This plane can be either the red plane (Color Mode 0) or the hue plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not replaced if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Plane is the reference to the second color plane. This plane can be either the green plane (Color Mode 0) or the saturation plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not replaced if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Plane is the reference to the third color plane. This plane can be either the blue plane (Color Mode 0), the lightness plane (Color Mode 1), or the value plane (Color Mode 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not replaced if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out (RGB) is the reference to the output RGB image that is obtained by replacing one or more planes of the source color image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Replaces the real part or the imaginary part of a complex image, starting from a 2D array of floating-point values.<LF>  <LF>Plane specifies which component of the complex image is replaced with the values encoded in the array of floating points Image Pixels. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>  0	  (Default) Real<LF>  1  	Imaginary<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the input complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Pixels (float) is a 2D floating-point array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that form the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the image is equal to the size of the array. The image passed in the input Image is forced to the same size as the array encoded by Input Pixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Reread?
Resamples an array of pixels from an image using multiple interpolation functions. Use this VI to perform subpixel analysis of pixel profiles in the image.<LF> 	  <LF>Image Src is the input source image used for calculating the ROI profile. <LF>	<LF>   Coordinate Points is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates   <LF>   of pixels in the image.<LF>	  SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following <LF>   parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the interpolation. Three values are possible.<LF><LF>   0	Bi-Linear<LF>   1	Quadratic<LF>   2	Cubic Spline<LF><LF>SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Interpolated array contains the resampled pixel data.<LF>	<LF>Array Size specifies the size of the interpolated array.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Reserved
Reset Event
Reset Scrolls
Reset event
Reset the RCX mailbox to a value.<LF><LF>The default is to fill the mailbox with the number 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers <LF><LF>Fill Value: String in the number to fill the mailbox with. <LF><LF>Note: This number must be between 0 - 256.  It must be a numeric constant (cannot be a container etc...)
Reset the RCX mailbox to a value.<LF><LF>The default is to fill the mailbox with the number 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers <LF><LF>Fill Value: String in the number to fill the mailbox with. <LF><LF>Note: This number must be between 0 - 256.  It must be a numeric constant (cannot be a container etc...)<LF><LF>
Reset the RCX mailbox to zero.<LF>This empties the mailbox so that mail can be received <LF>from another RCX.
Reset the RCX mailbox to zero.<LF>This empties the mailbox so that mail can be received from another RCX.
Reset the angle sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the angle sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the container to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to zero.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier <LF>corresponding to which container you want to <LF>use: red, yellow, or blue.
Reset the container to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to zero.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to which container <LF>you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Reset the light sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the light sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the number of Touch and Release of the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the number of Touch and Releases using the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the number of clicks of the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the number of clicks using the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the temperature sensor to Celsius.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the temperature sensor to Celsius.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the temperature sensor to Fahrenheit.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the temperature sensor to Fahrenheit.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the timer to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Timer to zero.<LF><LF>Note:  This command is required before using the timer <LF>fork or wait for timer command. <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer: String in a timer modifier to represent the <LF>timer you are resetting.
Reset the timer to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Timer to zero.<LF><LF>Note:  This command is required before using the timer fork or wait for timer command. <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer: String in a timer modifier to represent the timer you are resetting.
Reset the touch sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Reset the touch sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Resets monitoring for an event.<LF>The default is to reset the Red Event with the value of port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue. <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF>   -Timer based events: Value of timer
Resets monitoring for an event.<LF>The default is to reset the Red Event with the value of port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF>   -Timer based events: Value of timer
Resize to Image Size? (Y)
Resnap
Rest
Rest.<LF>The default is a quarter rest (the same length as a quarter note).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Duration: String in a duration for which to rest.
Rest.<LF>The default is a quarter rest <LF>(the same length as a quarter note).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Duration: String in a duration for which to rest..
Resume Logging
Resume data logging for corresponding data set that has been stopped <LF><LF>The default is data logging is resumed for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Resume data logging for corresponding data set that has been stopped. <LF><LF>The default is data logging is resumed for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>
Returns a distance map based on the algorithms of Danielsson. The Danielsson distance map produces images and data that are similar to IMAQ Distance but are much more accurate. In most cases it is recommended that you use this function instead of IMAQ Distance. <LF>  <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns a selection of particle measurements that are sent from IMAQ BasicParticle or IMAQ ComplexParticle based on a minimum and maximum criteria. With this VI, you choose which measurements you want to obtain from a particle detection process.<LF>  <LF>Reject Border? (No) determines whether particles touching the border should be measured. If set to TRUE, the measurements for particles touching the border are rejected. In this case, the input image source must be connected to the input Image. The default is FALSE<LF>	<LF>Image is the same input source image that is used to measure the particle coefficients by IMAQ BasicParticle or IMAQ ComplexParticle. This input is used only in a case in which particles touching the border are discarded for measurement calculations (Reject Border? is set to TRUE). <LF><LF>Basic Reports is the output array of measurements from IMAQ BasicParticle. The measurements stored in each element of this array are described in the IMAQ BasicParticle section.<LF>	<LF>Complex Reports is the output array of measurements from IMAQ ComplexParticle. The measurements stored in each element of this array are described in the IMAQ ComplexParticle section.<LF>	<LF>Selection Values is an array of selection criteria. Each criteria is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF>  Parameter is an indicator that determines the coefficient <LF>  ( measurement) to be selected. Parameter can have values    <LF>  compatible to those described in IMAQ ComplexMeasure. The  <LF>  validity of these values depends on the type of measurements <LF>  passed as input (for example, through Basic Reports or Complex<LF>  Reports).<LF><LF>	The following Parameter values are possible for selecting basic measurements (from Basic Reports).<LF><LF>           0	Area (pixels)	surface area of particle in pixels<LF>           1	Area (calibrated)	surface area of particle in user units<LF>           2 -9	unused	<LF>           10	Left Column (X)	left X coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>           11	Upper Row (Y)	top Y coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>           12	Right Column (X)	right X coordinate of bounding <LF>                rectangle<LF>           13	Lower Row (Y)	bottom Y coordinate of bounding <LF>                rectangle<LF>           14 - 27	unused	<LF><LF>The following Parameter values are possible for selecting complex measurements (from Complex Reports).<LF><LF>        0	Area (pixels)	surface area of particle in pixels<LF>        1	Area (calibrated)	surface area of particle in user units<LF>        2	Number of holes	number of holes<LF>        3	Hole's area (pixels)	surface area of the holes in pixels<LF>        4 - 9	unused	<LF>        10	Left Column (X)	left X coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>        11	Upper Row (Y)	top Y coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>        12	Right Column (X)	right X coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>        13	Lower Row (Y)	bottom Y coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>         14 - 15	unused	<LF>          16	Longest segment length	length of longest horizontal line         <LF>               segment<LF>           17	Longest segment left column (X)	left-most X coordinate of <LF>                longest horizontal line<LF>           18	Longest segment top row (Y)	Y coordinate of longest <LF>                horizontal line segment<LF>           19	Perimeter	length of outer contour of particle<LF>           20	Hole's Perimeter	perimeter of all holes<LF>           21	SumX	sum of the X-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>           22	 SumY	sum of the Y-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>           23	 SumXX	sum of the X-axis squared for each pixel of the  <LF>                 particle<LF>           24	 SumYY	sum of the Y-axis squared for each pixel of the <LF>                 particle<LF>           25	 SumXY	sum of the X-axis and Y-axis for each pixel of the <LF>                 particle<LF>           26	 Corrected projection x	projection corrected in x<LF>           27 	Corrected projection y	projection corrected in y<LF>Note:	Only the particle measurements that respond to the selection criteria are selected. The coefficient values must be contained in the interval between Lower Value and Upper Value.<LF><LF>   Lower Value is the minimum value (boundary) for the values to be <LF>   selected. <LF>	   <LF>    Upper Value is the maximum value (boundary) for the values to <LF>    be selected. <LF><LF>Selection Value is a selection criteria. This value is used only if the array of selection criteria is not connected to Selection Values. The selection criteria possess the same structure as each element in the array Selection Values. The default value for Parameter is –1, which specifies that all measurements are made (no selection). <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Basic Reports Out is an output containing an array of the basic measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Basic Particles is an output containing the number of basic measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>Complex Reports Out is an output containing an array of the complex measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Complex Particles is an output containing the number of complex measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns different characteristics of the image.<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the image whose size has to be modified.<LF><LF>Image Type is the type of the image.<LF><LF>Unit is the measuring unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>    0	undefined<LF>    1	Angstrom<LF>    2	micrometer<LF>    3	millimeter<LF>    4	centimeter<LF>    5	meter<LF>    6	kilometer<LF>    7	microinch<LF>    8	inch<LF>    9	feet<LF>   10	nautical miles<LF>   11	standard miles<LF><LF>X Resolution gives the horizontal resolution of the image. <LF><LF>Y Resolution gives the vertical resolution of the image.<LF><LF>X Step specifies the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>Y Step specifies the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF>	<LF>	
Returns information about the host computer.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Host type returns the type of the host computer. The returned type is either Macintosh, Windows, Sun, or PowerMacintosh.<LF><LF>32 Bits? returns TRUE if the host computer has a 32-bit system.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the descriptor for an ROI.<LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>ROI Descriptor returns the descriptor for an ROI.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the events generated through the image windows as well as the data associated with them. <LF><LF>Event list (all) specifies which events to obtain. The default case returns all events generated through the image windows as well as the data associated with them. This VI enables you to specify the image window events that interest you.<LF><LF>0	No event	No event.<LF>1	Click event	A user has clicked in an image window. <LF>2	Draw event	A user has drawn in an image window. <LF>3	Move event	A user has moved an image window. <LF>4	Size event	A user has resized an image window. <LF>5	Scroll event	A user has moved the scroll bars in an image window. <LF>6	Activate event	A user has chosen (clicked once to activate) an image window. <LF>7	Close event	A user has closed an image window. <LF>8	Reserved	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) indicates the image window that is queried for events. <LF><LF>Event indicates the type of event. <LF><LF>Tool returns a code indicating the region tool used.<LF><LF>Coordinates indicates the relative position of the event. <LF><LF>Other Parameters supplies information associated with an event, such as positioning and regions distances. <LF><LF>The following table describes the possible values for the Event, Tool, Coordinates, and Other Parameters indicators.<LF><LF>Event	Tool	Coordinates	Other Parameters<LF>0  None	NA	empty	empty<LF>1  Click	0  Cursor	[0, 1]  position (x, y) of click	[0, 1, 2]  pixel value*<LF>8  Zoom	[0, 1]  position of click[2, 3]  position of image center	[0]  zoom factor<LF>2  Draw	1  Line	[0, 1]  position of starting point[2, 3]  position of ending point	[0, 1]  width and height[2]  vertical segment angle [3]  segment length<LF>2  Rectangle	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>3  Oval	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>4  Polygon	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>5  Freehand	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>3  Move	NA	[0, 1]  position of image window	empty<LF>4  Size 	NA	[0, 1]  width and height of image window 	empty<LF>5  Scroll	NA	[0, 1]  center position of image	empty<LF>6  Activate	NA	empty	empty<LF>7  Close	NA	empty	empty<LF>*Pixel values are stored in the first element of the array for 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images. The RGB values of color images are stored in the order [0, 1, 2]. The real and imaginary values of a complex image are stored in the order [0, 1].<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the events generated through the user windows and the data associated with them. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) indicates the image window that is queried for events. <LF><LF>User Click returns TRUE if a zone has been chosen by a user.<LF><LF>User Number returns the zone number chosen by the user.<LF><LF>User State returns the present status (TRUE or FALSE) of each zone. after a click has been registered. This output is by definition TRUE when the Mechanical Action of the zone is Latch; reading this event causes the zone to pass to FALSE.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the last key pressed when the focus was on the window indicated by the Window ID input.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window number indicates the window in which the key was caught.<LF><LF>Key Present. If TRUE, a new key was pressed. If FALSE, no new keys were pressed and the VI returns the last key pressed.<LF><LF>Key Pressed indicates the last key pressed.<LF><LF>Modifiers specifies a set of flags that identifies the modifiers. Some flags are platform dependent.<LF><LF>·	Option<LF><LF>·	Shift<LF><LF>·	Caps Lock<LF><LF>·	Cmd<LF><LF>·	Ctrl<LF><LF>·	Menu<LF><LF>·	NumPad<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the position of an image mask in relation to the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0). The default offset value [0, 0] is established when the image is initially created by IMAQ Create. The offset is only used for masked images. With this offset, the mask can be moved to any location in the image without having to create a new image for each mask. <LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>	X Offset specifies the horizontal offset of the image mask. <LF><LF>	Y Offset specifies the vertical offset of the image mask.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the screen size in pixels.<LF><LF>Ref. Point X. Unused.<LF><LF>Ref. Point Y. Unused.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Screen Width gives the X size of screen.<LF><LF>Screen Height gives Y size of screen.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Returns the user pen status.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Paint mode is used for zoom factors greater than 3. If the value is Paint, the rectangles which compose the ROI bounds are painted; if the value is Frame, these rectangles are framed (only the contour is traced).<LF><LF>Pen transfer mode is the actual transfer mode. Pen transfer mode has four possible values:<LF><LF>srcCopy	Overwrites the background and foreground with specified colors.<LF>scrOr	Overwrites only the foreground.<LF>srxXor	Inverts the pixels below the foreground pixels. The new value equals 255 minus the old value; this operation occurs for each plane of an RGB image.<LF>srcBic	Forces the background color on foreground pixels.<LF>Pen style is the actual pen style. Pen style has five possible values: Solid, Dash, Dot, DashDot, and DashDotDot.<LF><LF>Foreground color is the actual foreground color. <LF><LF>Background color is the actual background color.<LF><LF>Pen pattern is the actual pen pattern. TRUE values are assigned to the foreground while FALSE values are assigned to the background. The pattern size is a 8 × 8 2D array.<LF><LF>User pen active. If TRUE, the user pen is active.<LF><LF>Pen width is the actual pen width.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Reverse
Right
Ring
Rise triggers when it rises above the <LF>given value 
Rock
Rotate
Rotates an image.<LF>      	<LF>Color Replace Value is a cluster containing the Alpha, Red, Green, and Blue channel values used for filling a color image. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>	Angle (degrees) defines the angle (in degrees) to rotate. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Replace Value defines the filling value created by the rotation. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Rotates and translates an ROI in an image to transform the ROI from one coordinate system (Base Reference) to another (New Reference).<LF>  <LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest.<LF>	<LF>Base Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>   Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>   base-reference coordinate system.<LF>	<LF>    Angle is the angle the base-reference coordinate system makes     <LF>   with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>New Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>   Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>   new-reference coordinate system.<LF>  	<LF>   Angle is the angle the new-reference coordinate system makes <LF>   with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>ROI Descriptor out contains the new descriptor for the transformed ROI.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Rotation (1/16)
Rotation Sensor Equal Fork
Rotation Sensor Fork
Rotation Threshold
Rotations
Rotations of Angle Sensor
Row
Row / Column
Row / Column (Row)
Row of Max
Row of Min
Rows
Rows Per Strip
Run
Run Mode
Run Program On RCX
Run Subroutine
Run any Subroutine that has been created.<LF><LF>The default subroutine is to run subroutine 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Subroutine number: String in a number (0-7)  to pick which subroutine to run.<LF>
RunCamera
Running
Running?
SB
SELECT COM PORT
SH
SHIFT
SHOW ADMINISTRATOR BUTTON
SI
SO
STOP
SX
SY
Sample Data Set
Sample one hour
Sample one min
Sample one sec
Sample one tenth sec
Sample ten sec
Sampling Rate
Sampling Rate (Hz)
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 0.1 sec.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 1 hr.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 1 min.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 1 sec.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 10 sec.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every time you press the Touch Sensor on Port 2.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every time you write to a data set and mark the data with the time.  The time will rollover every 2^16 10ths of a second.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every time you write to the data set.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 0.1 sec.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 1 min.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 1 sec.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 10 sec.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every hour.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every time you write on the data set and mark the data with the time. The time will rollover every 2^16 10ths of a second.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every time you write to the data set.
Sampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Datalogging subroutine to capture data every time you press the Touch Sensor on Port 2.  The port is configured as counting clicks.  You will have to zero the sensor separately in your program.
Sampling frequency (max 100 Hz)
Save
Save &S
Save As
Save As...
Save BMP
Save Blue Scroll
Save Data
Save File
Save Image
Save JPG
Save Picture
Save Pilot File
Save Program File
Save Red Scroll
Save Scroll
Save Sound
Save Yellow Scroll
Save image
Save in Theme
Save the Pilot file.
Save the current image to a bitmap file.
Save the current image to a file.
Save... &S
Scale Invariance? (Yes)
Score
Scout
Scout Ambient Light Sensor Set Triggers
Scout Auto Adjust Light Sub
Scout Avoid Left Sub
Scout Avoid Right Sub
Scout Avoid Sub
Scout Basic Motion Sub
Scout Bugshake Sub
Scout Circle Left Sub
Scout Circle Right Sub
Scout Event Landing
Scout Event Sound
Scout Find Bright Sub
Scout Forward Sub
Scout Forward Turn Left Sub
Scout Forward Turn Right Sub
Scout Get Average Light Sub
Scout Get Motor Status Sub
Scout Get Sema0 Sub
Scout Get Sema1 Sub
Scout Get Sema2 Sub
Scout Global Sound Settings
Scout Init Sys Sub
Scout Light Geiger Sub
Scout Light On/Off
Scout Light Sensor Blink Time
Scout Loop AB Sub
Scout Motor Drive Sub
Scout Motor to Sound Sub
Scout Movements Sub
Scout Rwd Sub
Scout Rwd Turn Left Sub
Scout Rwd Turn Right Sub
Scout Seek Sub
Scout Select Various Parameters
Scout Send VLL
Scout Set Counter Value
Scout Set Light Sensor Hysteresis
Scout Set Light Sensor Low Threshold
Scout Set Light Sensor Upper Threshold
Scout Set Timer Limit
Scout Spin Left Sub
Scout Spin Right Sub
Scout Stand Alone or Power Mode
Scout VLL Commander Code Pilot
Scout VLL Commander Micro Scout
Scout Zig Zag Sub
Screen Height
Screen Width
Scroll
Scroll 
Scroll Backwards
Scroll Down
Scroll Fowards
Scroll Up
Scroll backwards through extra help items for this palette
Scroll down
Scroll down is used to move backwards to view earlier parts in a song
Scroll event
Scroll up
Scroll up is used to move forward to view later parts in the song
Scrollbars? (N)
Scrolling
Search Decimal Separator
Search Pattern
Search Sign
Segments status
Select COM Port
Select Camera
Select Computer
Select RCX
Select Region of Interest
Select a bin color and plot style to display your data.
Select a light value from 1 to 100 (100 is the brightest).
Select a note to record.
Select any line (names are from the names you choose on the Upload pages) to find it on the plot.  Open symbols are data from the Upload Area and closed symbols are from the Compute Area.
Select the Sensor you are using with the Sensor Adapter.
Select the Vision sensor definition file you are using for the blue container.
Select the Vision sensor definition file you are using for the red container.
Select the Vision sensor definition file you are using for the yellow container.
Select to which port the tower is connected.
Select whether you want to wait for the touch sensor to be pushed or released.
Select whether you want to wait until the light sensor reads a value that is greater than (brighter than) the specified value or less than (darker than) the specified value. 
Select which theme to save you program in.
Selection Mode
Selection Value
Selection Values
Selects Scout Motion, Touch, Light, Time, and FX rules for the Scout <LF>Stand Alone mode.<LF><LF>RULES:<LF><LF>Motion:  No Motion (0), Forward (1), ZigZag (2), Circle Right (3), Circle Left (4),<LF>              Loop A (5), Loop B (6), Loop AB (7).<LF>Touch:   Ignore (0), Reverse (1) [When T1 or T2 is hit direction on both motors is<LF>              changed], Avoid (2) [When T1 is hit the model will back up and turn to <LF>              the right,  When T2 is hit the model will back up and turn to the left], <LF>              Wait For (3) [The model waits for T1 or T2 to get hit, then action <LF>              starts], Brake (4) [While T1 is pressed, Motor A is braked, While T2 is<LF>              pressed, Motor B is braked]<LF>Light:     Ignore (0), Seek Light (1) [Model turns around every now and then and <LF>              finds the brightest direction],  Seek Dark (2) [Model turns around every<LF>              now and then and finds the darkest direction], Avoid (3) [If it gets <LF>              Bright or Dark, then action starts], Brake (5) [While the light is Bright <LF>              or Dark both motors are braked]<LF>Time:     Short (0) [Scale factor 1], Medium (1) [Scale factor 2], Long (2) [Scale<LF>              factor 4]<LF>FX:         No Theme (0), Bug (1) [Does the Bug-dance every now and then], <LF>              Alarm (2) [Alarm-sound depending on the motor drive], <LF>              Random (3) [Does a sequence of random  movements now and then], <LF>              Science (4) [Sound beeping Geiger function on the light sensor]<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Motion:  String a single modifier.<LF>Touch:   String a single modifier.<LF>Light:    String a single modifier.<LF>Time:    String a single modifier.<LF>FX:        String a single modifier.
Selects Scout Motion, Touch, Light, Time, and<LF>FX rules for the Scout Stand Alone mode.
Selects Stand Alone (SA) or Power Mode<LF><LF>Legal range for ""number"":  0 (Stand Alone Mode),<LF>                                         1 (Power Mode)
Selects Stand Alone (SA) or Power Mode<LF><LF>Legal range for ""number"":  0 (Stand Alone Mode),<LF>                                         1 (Power Mode)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Number:  String in a modifier to control the mode.
Selects a display palette. Five predefined palettes are available. To activate a color palette choose a code (0 to 4) for Palette Number and connect the output Color Palette to the input Palette Number of IMAQ WindDraw.<LF><LF>Palette Number (gray) enables the user to select one of the five predefined palettes. The relationship between the value and Palette Number is described below.<LF><LF>Gray	Gray scale is the default palette. The color tables are all identical.<LF>Binary	Binary palette is designed especially for binary images.<LF>Gradient	Gradient palette.<LF>Rainbow	Rainbow palette.<LF>Temperature	Temperature palette.<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Color Palette indicates an array of clusters composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of applying a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white). This output is to be directly connected to the input Color Palette of IMAQ WindDraw.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Selects the color of ROI lines.<LF><LF>Color of ROI is a cluster that specifies the color of the ROI. The default color is white.<LF><LF>Red gives the red plane intensity. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Green gives the green plane intensity. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Blue gives the blue plane intensity. The default is 255.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and <LF>Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Selects which (external) events should result in a <LF>system sound being played.<LF><LF>Legal sources are: 0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>                             and 4 (random number).<LF><LF>The resulting value has the same structure as an<LF>event list with each bit corresponding to a system<LF>event.
Selects which (external) events should result in a system sound being played.<LF><LF>Legal sources are: 0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>                             and 4 (random number).<LF><LF>The resulting value has the same structure as an<LF>event list with each bit corresponding to a system<LF>event.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
Send Mail
Send mail to another RCX.<LF>This sends a number to the mailbox of another RCX.<LF>The default is to send the number 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Number to send:  String in the number you want to send.
Sends a 7-bit VLL command out over the <LF>VLL output.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'source': 0 (variable)<LF>                                      2 (constant value).
Sends a 7-bit VLL command out over the <LF>VLL output.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'source': 0 (variable)<LF>                                      2 (constant value).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF>Number: String a single modifier.<LF>
Sensor
Sensor 1
Sensor 1 Info
Sensor 2
Sensor 2 Info
Sensor 3
Sensor 3 Info
Sensor Adapter
Sensor Bool. (0,1,2)
Sensor File
Sensor ID
Sensor ID (light)
Sensor Mode
Sensor Mode  (0,1,2)
Sensor Name
Sensor Operation
Sensor Raw (0,1,2)
Sensor Threshold
Sensor Title
Sensor Title 2
Sensor Type
Sensor Type (0,1,2)
Sensor Value
Sensor Value (0,1,2)
Sensor Value In
Sensor Value Out
Sensor channel
Sensor description
Sensors
Separate the X and Y coordinates of a Data Set into two arrays.<LF>The default Data Set number is 0.
Separates a ROI descriptor (describing many contours) into an array of simple ROI descriptors. Each of the ROI descriptor returned contains a single contour.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor is of type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. <LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>-  	ROI Descriptors is the returned array of ROI descriptors. Each ROI descriptor contains a single contour.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Separates overlapping circular objects and classifies them based on their radius, surface area, and perimeter. Starting from a binary image, it finds the radius and center of the circular objects even when multiple circular objects overlap. In addition, this VI can trace the circles in the destination image. It constructs and uses a Danielsson distance map to determine the radius of each object. <LF>  <LF>Note:	IMAQ Circles works correctly only for circles that have a radius less than or equal to 256 pixels.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Min Radius is the smallest radius (in pixels) that is detected. Circles possessing a radius smaller than this value do not appear in the destination image and have a negative radius value in the output Circles Data. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Max Radius (default 10) is the largest radius (in pixels) that is detected. Circles possessing a radius larger than this value do not appear in the destination image and have a negative radius value in the output Circles Data. The default is 10.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Nb Circles returns the number of detected circles in the image.<LF><LF>Note:	Circles with a radius outside the limits of Min Radius or Max Radius also are included in this number. <LF><LF>Circles Data returns an array of measurements for all detected circles. Each element in the array has a structure containing the following elements: <LF><LF>  Pos. X is the horizontal position (in pixels) of the center of the <LF>  circle. <LF>	<LF>  Pos. Y is the vertical position (in pixels) of the center of the circle. <LF><LF>  Radius is the radius of the circle (in pixels). Circles with a radius <LF>  outside the limits of Min Radius or Max Radius contain negative <LF>  radius values.<LF><LF>  Core Area is the surface area (in pixels) of the nucleus of the circle   <LF>  as defined by the Danielsson distance map. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Separates touching particles, particularly small isthmuses found between particles. It performs n erosions (n = Nb of erosions) and then reconstructs the final image based on the results of the erosion. If during the erosion process an existing isthmus has been broken or removed, then the particles are reconstructed without the isthmus. The reconstructed particles, however, have the same size as the initial particles except that they are separated. If during the erosion process no isthmus has been broken, then the particles are reconstructed as they were initially found (no changes are made). The source image must be an 8-bit binary image. The source image must have a border greater than or equal to 1. <LF>  <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Nb of Erosion specifies the number of erosions that are used to separate the particles. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Structuring Element is a 2D array that contains the structuring element to be applied to the image. The size of the structuring element (the size of this array) determines the processing size. A structuring element of 3 × 3 is used if this input is not connected. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Separation
Separation Dev.
Serial Comm errors
Set Change Rate Event
Set Click Event
Set Clock
Set Display
Set Double Click Event
Set Error Condition
Set Generic Down Event
Set Generic Up Event
Set Modifier Value
Set Motor A or Motor B according to the <LF>Movement Type variable.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Movement Type 0 - 8:   Motor A, Motor B<LF>Movement Type 9-11: VLL
Set Motor A or Motor B according to the Movement Type variable.<LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  String in a modifier to control the type of movement of<LF>                           Motor A or B, or the command sent over the VLL port.<LF><LF>Values for Movement Type:<LF><LF> 0: A Fwd, B Fwd          5: A Rwd, B Off             9: C Fwd<LF> 1: A Rwd, B Rwd          6: A Off, B Fwd          10: C Rwd<LF> 2: A Fwd, B Rwd          7: A Off, B Rwd          11: C Off<LF> 3: A Rwd, B Fwd          8: A Off, B Off<LF> 4: A Fwd, B Off
Set RCX Powerdown time
Set RCX powerdown time<LF>Equivalent of changing settings in Administrator<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 15 minutes before powerdown.<LF><LF>Modifier<LF><LF>Power down time: String in number of minutes to wait for powerdown.
Set Titles
Set Up Clicks Event
Set Up Dark Event
Set Up Decrease in Container Event
Set Up Decrease in Rotation Event
Set Up Decrease in Temp (C) Event
Set Up Decrease in Temp (F) Event
Set Up Enter Hi Event
Set Up Enter Low Event
Set Up Enter Normal Event
Set Up Increase in Container Event
Set Up Increase in Rotation Event
Set Up Increase in Temp (C) Event
Set Up Increase in Temp (F) Event
Set Up Increase in Timer Event
Set Up Light Event
Set Up Mail Event
Set Up Pressed Event
Set Up Released Event
Set Up Touch and Release Event
Set a Container to the value of the Clock.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the Clock.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Set any writeable source and value.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Modifier to set: This is any of the writeable sources.<LF><LF>New value:  This is any of the readable sources.
Set lower threshold, upper threshold and hysteresis for the light sensor around the local variable CenterLight according to the local variable ThPercent and the local variable HPercent.<LF><LF>CenterLight, ThPercent, HPercent and LocalVar5-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Center Light:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>ThPercent:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>HPercent: String a single modifier.
Set lower threshold, upper threshold and<LF>hysteresis for the light sensor around the local<LF>variable CenterLight according to the local variable <LF>ThPercent and the local variable HPercent.<LF><LF>CenterLight, ThPercent, HPercent and<LF>LocalVar5-8 are preserved by the sub.
Set the Container to the value of the Clock.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the Clock.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Set the RCX LCD display to show a <LF>a certain value.<LF><LF>The default is to display the value of the<LF>red container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Decimal Point: String in the decimal point position<LF>for the value displaed<LF><LF>Modifier to view: String in the value to be displayed<LF>(ex. Value of Port 1, Value of Red Container)<LF>
Set the RCX LCD display to show a a certain value.<LF><LF>The default is to display the value of the red container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Decimal Point: String in the decimal point position for the value displayed<LF><LF>Modifier to view: String in the value to be displayed<LF>(ex. Value of Port 1, Value of Red Container)<LF>
Set the RCX powerdown time.<LF>This is the equivalent of changing the powerdown time settings in Administrator.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 15 minutes before powerdown.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power down time: String in number of minutes to wait for powerdown.
Set the container a formula.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: this is the formula string for the container.  Precedence is given for multiplication and division only.  The formula can contain:<LF>+...addition<LF>-...subtraction<LF>*...multiplication<LF>/...division<LF>&...bitwise and<LF>|...bitwise or<LF><LF> and<LF><LF>c...container [0-20]  (e.g. c0 is the red container)<LF>m...mail value<LF>r...random number with max value [1-32767]  (e.g. r5 is a # from 1 to 5)<LF>s...sensor value [1-3]  (e.g. s1 is sensor 1)<LF>t...timer [1..3]   (e.g. t1 is the red timer)<LF>w...clock value<LF><LF>For example:  s1/10 + 3*m would be one tenth of the value of sensor 1 plus three times the mail value.  Remember that all math is carried out on integers so it is an integer divide.
Set the container to
Set the container to a certain event state.  Tells whether the event is in the low, normal or high state depending on the set thresholds. The eventstate may also be undefined or calibrating.<LF>0 == Low<LF>1 == Normal<LF>2 == High<LF>3 == Undefined<LF>4 == Start calibrating<LF>5 == Calibrating in process<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to Event 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Event:  This defines which event you are looking at (0-15)
Set the container to a certain value on a remote RCX.<LF><LF>The default is to set the Red Container on the Remote RCX  to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container on the remote RCX you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: Set the container to this value.
Set the container to a certain value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: Set the container to this value.
Set the container to a certain value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: Set the container to this value.
Set the container to a copy of the bit register of the successful event(s) for the current task.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the register.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the  container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number.  The bit corresponds to the event number.<LF>  <LF>1(2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1 <LF>3 (2^0+2^1) corresponds to events 0 and 1
Set the container to a copy of the bit register of the successful event(s) for the current task.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the register.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the  container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number. The bit corresponds to the event number.<LF>  <LF>1(2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1 <LF>3 (2^0+2^1) corresponds to events 0 and 1
Set the container to a random value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to a random number between 0 and 8.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Max random number: String in a number to be the maximum random number to set the container to.
Set the container to the Celsius value of the <LF>temperature sensor.  The default is to set the Red Container <LF>to the value of the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.<LF> (Takes only the integer part, hence 27.6°C becomes 27°C).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature <LF>sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the Celsius value of the temperature sensor. (Takes only the integer part, hence 27.6°C becomes 27°C).<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the Fahrenheit value of the <LF>temperature sensor.  The default is to set the Red <LF>Container to the value of the temperature sensor <LF>connected to Port 1.   (Takes only the integer part, <LF>hence 70.6°F becomes 70°F).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature <LF>sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the Fahrenheit value of the temperature sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.  (Takes only the integer part, hence 70.6°F becomes 70°F).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the number of points that have been captured in a Data Set.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the number of points captured on the Red Data Set. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container: String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String in the Data Set that points are being captured in: red, yellow, or blue.
Set the container to the number of points that have been captured<LF>in a Data Set.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the number of points captured on the Red Data Set. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container: String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set Value: String in the Value of the Data Set that you wish to <LF>use: red, yellow, or blue.
Set the container to the value of the Voltage Sensor. The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the Voltage Sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the Voltage Sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the Voltage Sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the acceleration sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the angle sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the angle sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier <LF>corresponding to which container you want to <LF>use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the angle sensor <LF>is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the angle sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the angle sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the angle sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the barometeric sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the generic sensor adapter. The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the sensor adapter connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the generic sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the humidity sensor. <LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the humidity sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the humidity sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the light sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the light sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the light sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the light sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the light sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the light sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the lux sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the mailbox.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the mailbox.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Set the container to the value of the mailbox.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the mailbox.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Set the container to the value of the number of Touch and Release of the<LF> touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>Touch and Release of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor <LF>is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the number of Touch and Releases of the  touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of Touch and Release of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the number of clicks of the  touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of clicks of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the number of clicks of the<LF> touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>clicks of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor <LF>is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the pH sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the pH sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the pH sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the position sensor. <LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the position sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the position sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the pressure sensor. <LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the pressure sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the pressure sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the redox sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the sound level sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sound level sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sound level sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the temperature sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the temperature sensor is <LF>connected to.
Set the container to the value of the timer.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the Red Timer.  <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in a Timer Value to represent <LF>which timer to put into the container.
Set the container to the value of the timer.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the Red Timer.  <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in a Timer Value to represent which timer to put into the container.
Set the container to the value of the touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor <LF>is connected to.
Set the container to the value of the touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor is connected to.
Set the counter value (for overflow detection and event generation).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'number': 0-1<LF>Legal range for 'source': 0 [variable], <LF>                                    2 [constant value], <LF>                                    4 [random value].<LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Number:  String a single modifier.<LF>Source:   String a single modifier.<LF>Value:     String a single modifier.
Set the counter value (for overflow<LF>detection and event generation).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'number': 0-1<LF>Legal range for 'source':   0 [variable], <LF>                                      2 [constant value], <LF>                                      4 [random value].
Set the the container to
Set the transmitter power of the RCX.<LF>(The transmitter power of the infrared transmitter has to be set manually with the switch on the front of the tower).<LF>The default power is Low.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF>Power: The power level (High or Low) of the infrared transmitter on the RCX.
Set-up
Sets the Light Sensor Blink Time<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 32767 (measured in 0.01 sec)
Sets the Light Sensor Blink Time<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 32767 (measured in 0.01 sec)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
Sets the Light Sensor Hysteresis<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020
Sets the Light Sensor Hysteresis<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
Sets the Light Sensor low threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)
Sets the Light Sensor low threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
Sets the Light Sensor upper threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)
Sets the Light Sensor upper threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
Sets the border size of the image and determines the current border size of the image.<LF>        	<LF>Get/Set Status (Set) determines whether the image border size is changed to the Image border size value (Set) or  the current image border size value is retrieved (Get).<LF>	<LF>Image in is the reference to the image that has to be modified.<LF>	<LF>Image border size in determines the new border size of the image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>Image border size out is the border size of the image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Sets the calibration scale for an image. <LF>        	  <LF>Unit is the measuring unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>  0	undefined<LF>  1	Angstrom<LF>  2	micrometer<LF>  3	millimeter<LF>  4	centimeter<LF>  5	meter<LF>  6	kilometer<LF>  7	microinch<LF>  8	inch<LF>  9	feet<LF>  10	nautical miles<LF>  11	standard miles<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Step specifies the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>Y Step specifies the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Sets the event to happen when a click occurs<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF><LF>Event Source: This is the sensor etc that is defining the event
Sets the event to happen when a doubleclick occurs<LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF><LF>Event Source: This is the sensor etc that is defining the event
Sets the event to happen when it goes above the upper threshold<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF><LF>Event Source: This is the sensor etc that is defining the event
Sets the timer limit (for overflow/wrap-around <LF>detection and event generation.)<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value), <LF>                                     4 (random number).
Sets the timer limit (for overflow/wrap-around detection and event generation.)<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value), <LF>                                     4 (random number).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Number:  String a single modifier.<LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
Sets up an event to be triggered when the value of the event source goes above the upper threshold<LF><LF>Note: The Define Settings command should follow this command. Use the Define Settings command to specify the upper threshold.  If a sensor is being used for the event source, the sensor should be zero-ed prior to starting event monitoring.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
Sets up an event to be triggered when the value of the event source goes below the lower threshold<LF><LF>Note: The Define Settings command should follow this command. Use <LF>the Define Settings command to specify the lower threshold.  If a <LF>sensor is being used for the event source, the sensor should be zero-ed <LF>prior to starting event monitoring.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
Sets up an event to be triggered when the value of the event source goes between the lower & upper threshold<LF><LF>Note: The Define Settings command should follow this command. Use the Define Settings command to specify the lower & upper threshold.  If a sensor is being used for the event source, the sensor should be zero-ed prior to starting event monitoring.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
Sets up an event to occur based on the number of clicks of the <LF>touch sensor . The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when 10 clicks of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Clicks Threshold:  String in the number of clicks.
Sets up an event to occur based on the number of clicks of the <LF>touch sensor. The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when 10 clicks of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Clicks Threshold:  String in the number of clicks.
Sets up an event to occur based on the number of touches and releases of the touch sensor. The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when 10 touches and releases of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>TR Threshold:  String in the number of clicks and releases.
Sets up an event to occur based on the number of touches and releases of the touch sensor. The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when 10 touches and releases of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>TR Threshold: String in the number of clicks and releases.
Sets up an event to occur when mail is received. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when mail is received by the RCX.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF>
Sets up an event to occur when mail is received. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when mail is received by the RCX.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is pressed.<LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the touch sensor on Port 1 is pressed.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is pressed.<LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the touch sensor on Port 1 is pressed.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox  
Sets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is released.<LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when the touch sensor <LF>on Port 1 is released.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.<LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the  sensor goes below the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 2V.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Sensor ID: This is the first three numbers on the sensors file in the floder ROBOLAB/Engine/Sensors.<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the  sensor<LF>goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 2V.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Sensor ID: This is the first three numbers on the sensors file in the floder ROBOLAB/Engine/Sensors.<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the  sensor<LF>goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 2V.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Sensor ID: This is the first three numbers on the sensors file in the floder ROBOLAB/Engine/Sensors.<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the container goes above the threshold. Dont forget to zero the container.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red container goes above 1.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Container Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the container goes above the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red container goes above 1.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Container Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the container goes below the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red container is equal to or goes below 1.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Container Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>     -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor goes below the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 iis equal to or goes below 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor<LF>goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor<LF>goes below the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the rotation sensor goes above the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the rotation sensor on Port 1 goes above 16 (16th of a rotation).<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Rotation Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in 16th of a rotation).  The event is sign dependent. (clockwise rotations produce positive values, counter clockwise rotations produce negative values).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the rotation sensor goes below the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the rotation sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below 16 (16th of a rotation).<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Rotation Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in 16th of a rotation).  The event is sign dependent. (clockwise rotations produce positive values, counter clockwise rotations produce negative values).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes above the threshold (in Celsius). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 goes above 30.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF> (in Celsius). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes above the threshold (in Fahrenheit). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 goes above 80.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF> (in Fahrenheit). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes below the threshold (in Celsius). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below 30.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in Celsius). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes below the threshold (in Fahrenheit). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below  80.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in Fahrenheit). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor<LF>goes above the threshold (in Celsius). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 goes above 30.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF> (in Celsius). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
Sets up an event to occur when the value of the timer goes above the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red timer goes above 1 second.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Timer Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event in seconds.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
Setup
Shadow?
Shape Report
Shape to draw
Shift
Shift Value
Show Context Help &H
Show Coordinates? (T)
Show other values, such as the Containers, Timers, Sensors, the Clock, and the Mail.
Show page
Show/Hide Administrator Button
Shows data acquired in Port 1, allows the user to define the type of data acquired.
Shows data acquired in Port 2, allows the user to define the type of data acquired.
Shows data acquired in Port 3, allows the user to define the type of data acquired.
Shows or hides an image window. <LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) specifies the image window to show or hide. It is specified by a number from 0 to 15. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Hide/Show (Show) specifies if an image window is visible. This input only is used when Get/Set Status? is TRUE (Set). <LF><LF>Bring To Front? (N) determines if a window is to be brought to the front. This input is only used when Get/Set Status? is TRUE (Set) and Hide/Show is also TRUE.<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know if the image window is visible or if the user wants to modify the visibility of an image window. The default is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Visible? returns the present visibility status of the window. A visible image window returns TRUE. <LF><LF>Frontmost Window? returns TRUE if an image window is in the front. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Shows or hides the WindTools palette and sets the regions status. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindShow, which is used for displaying image windows.<LF><LF>Hide/Show (Show) specifies whether the tools palette is visible. Use this input only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status?(Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the status of the available region tools. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Visible? returns the present visibility of the tools palette. A visible tools palette returns TRUE.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
Shrink Image
Sign Container
Since we needed to log timers, we had to use the upper programming levels.  The first program is in Level 4.  We take advantage of the touch sensor logging option to log the timer when the touch sensor is hit.  The disadvantage of this code is that the program will log the time every time the touch sensor is hit - regardless of whether or not the light is on.
Single waveform acquisition
Sixteenth note
Size
Size & Order #
Size & Tolerance
Size event
Size reduction
Size(Byte)
Skip It
Skip it
Slide
Slide #
Slope
Slopes
Snap
Snap 2nd Image
Snap Image
Snap Image and Wait
Snap a new image.
Snap an image to use.  For instance, if you selected subtract, then this sensor would  subtract this image from whatever the camera sees.
Snap image
Snapping Image
Snatch
Solid
Song Dwnld?
Song Name
Song Path
Sound
Sound Container
Sound FX
Sound In
Sound Level Container (Sound LogIT)
Sound Level Sensor Fork (Sound LogIT)
Sound LogIT
Sound Out
Sound Profile
Sound Type (from 1 to 6)
Source
Source (0,2,4)
Spacer
Spaces
Specifies a RCX code reset
Specifies the color depth of 'data'.  Its possible values are 1, 4, or 8 bits per pixel.  Its default is 8.
Specifies the color of the line.  This sets the pen's color.  The default is black.
Specifies the color of the rectangle.  This sets the pen's color.  The default is black.
Specifies the depth of the BMP.
Specifies the font for the text to draw. You can chose from the following predefined settings:<LF>0    User-specified Font<LF>1    Application Font (default)<LF>2    System Font<LF>3    Dialog Font
Spline fit to Data Sets
Square/Hexa (Square)
Srate
Stacatto
Standard  Deviation
Standard  Variation
Standard <CR>Variation
Standard Deviation
Standard Deviations
Standard Program
Standard Variation
Start
Start  remote programming of RCX(s)<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to the remote programming of RCX(s). It starts the dowlaoding of programs.
Start Data Logging
Start Data Logging w/clicks
Start Direct RCX Communication
Start Monitoring for Output Access Control
Start Monitoring for Sound Access Control
Start Monitoring for an Event
Start Remote Program
Start Task(s)
Start a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is <LF>pushed.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the <LF>Touch Sensor on Port 1 is pushed.<LF>  <LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF>.
Start a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is <LF>released.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Touch Sensor on Port 1 is released. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF>
Start a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is pushed.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 is pressed in. <LF>  <LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
Start a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is released.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 is released. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
Start a loop that repeats while the number of clicks of the <LF>Touch Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has a number of clicks less than 10. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>number of clicks.
Start a loop that repeats while the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has a number of clicks less than 10. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks.
Start a loop that repeats while the number of points in a data set is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the number of points in the Red Data Set is less than 1.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of points in the data set.
Start a loop that repeats while the number of times the <LF>Touch Senssor has been touched and released is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>Note: Every touch registers two counts -- one for the push down and one for the release up.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has been touched and released less than 10 times.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF> <LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of touches and releases.
Start a loop that repeats while the number of times the Touch Sensor has been touched and released is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>Note: Every touch registers two counts -- one for the push down and one for the release up.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has been touched and released less than 10 times.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF> <LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of touches and releases.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Container is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Red Container is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the container. 
Start a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Red Container is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Red Container is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that <LF>corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the container. 
Start a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Container is less than or equal to 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the container.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Red Container is less than or equal to 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that <LF>corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the container.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Acceleration Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Acceleration Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 25 m/s/s. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Acceleration Sensor on Port 1 is less than 25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the Acceleration sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Acceleration Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Acceleration Sensor on Port 1 is less than 25 m/s/s. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Accleration Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 25m/s/s.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the acceleration sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Angle Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 16 (one rotation). <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this while loop.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Angle Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this while loop.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF>
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Angle Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Angle Sensor on Port 1 is less than 16 (one rotation). <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this while loop.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Barometeric Sensor  is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is Greater than 1000 hPa. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is less than 1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the barometeric sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Barometeric Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is less than 1000 hPa. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the barometeric sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Clock is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Clock is less than 1 min. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the value of the Clock. 
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Clock is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the  Clock is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the Clock. 
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Clock is less than or equal to 1 min. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the value of the Clock.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Clock is less than or equal to 1 min. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the value of the Clock.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Generic Sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Generic Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the generic sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Light Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the light sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Light Sensor on Port 1 is less than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the light sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Light Sensor on Port 1 is less than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Light Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Lux Sensor  is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Lux Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 10000 lux. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Lux Sensor on Port 1 is less than 10000 lux.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the lux sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Lux Sensor  is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Lux Sensor on Port 1 is less than 10000 lux. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Lux Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 10000 lux.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the lux sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Redox Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 625 mV.  The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is less than 625 mV.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the redox sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Redox Sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 625 mV.  The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is less than 625 mV.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the redox sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Redox Sensor<LF>is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is less than 625 mV.  The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Redox Sensor is greater than 625 mV.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the redox sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Sound Pressure Level Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the  sound pressure sensor on Port 1 is less than 60 decibels. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound pressure level sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Celsius is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Fahrenheit is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Fahrenheit is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Fahrenheit is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Celsius, is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Celsius, is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Celsius, is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Fahrenheit, is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is greater  than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the timer.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is greater than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the timer.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is less than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the timer.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is less than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the timer.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the volt sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the volt sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is less than 2V. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the voltmeter.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is less than 2V. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the volt sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the humidity sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>humidity sensor on Port 1 is less than 5O%. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the humidity sensor on Port 1 is greater than 5O%.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the humidity sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the humidity sensor<LF>is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the humidity sensor on Port 1 is greater than 50%. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the humidity sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than 1.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the mail.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than 1. <LF>`<LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the mail.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than 1.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the mail.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the mail.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the pH Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pH Sensor on Port 1 is less than 7. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pH sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the pH sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pH sensor on Port 1 is greater than 7. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pH sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>position sensor on Port 1 is less than 180 degrees. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>position sensor on Port 1 is less than 180 degrees. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the value of the position sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor<LF>is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the pressure sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>pressure sensor on Port 1 is less than 100 kPa. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pressure sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the pressure sensor<LF>is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 100 kPa. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pressure sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the pressure sensoris greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 100 kPa. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pressure sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the sound pressure level sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the sound pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 60 decibels. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound pressure level sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the temperature sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>temperature sensor on Port 1 is less than 30 degrees C. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the temperature sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the temperature sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the temperature sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 degrees Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
Start a loop that repeats while the value of the temperature sensoris greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the temperature sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 degrees Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
Start a loop.<LF>The default is to loop twice.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Number of loops: String in a number to represent the number of loops (Max. 15 imbedded loops).
Start a loop.<LF>The default is to loop twice.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string<LF>after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Number of loops: String in a number to represent the number of <LF>loops (Max. 15 imbedded loops).
Start a new task with this command in order to run multiple tasks <LF>simultaneously.<LF><LF>Note: Each task that splits off will need its own separate End <LF>command (Red Traffic Light).
Start a new task with this command in order to run multiple tasks simultaneously.<LF><LF>Note: Each task that splits off will need its own separate End command (Red Traffic Light).
Start characters
Start communication with remote RCX(s)<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to start  direct communication with remote RCX(s). <LF><LF>
Start of Loop
Start one task.<LF><LF>The default is to start task 1.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to restart (starting with task 1).
Start one task.<LF><LF>The default is to start task 1.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to restart.
Start the current program in the RCX.<LF><LF>This is the equivalent of pushing the green run button on RCX.
Start the current program in the RCX.<LF><LF>This is the equivalent of starting a program by clicking the green run button on the RCX. 
Start the data logging for corresponding data set and clicks every time it takes a data point. <LF><LF>The default is  data logging is started for the Red Data Set and data is captured every second.<LF><LF>Note: One of the Initialize Logging commands must come before<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue<LF><LF>Wait (sec): String in the time to wait between capturing data points.
Start the data logging for the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is started for the Red Data Set and data is captured every second.<LF><LF>Note: One of the Initialize Logging commands must come before this one.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait (sec): String in the time to wait between capturing data points.
Start the data logging for the item in the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is started for the item initialized in the Red Data Set and data is captured every second.<LF><LF>Note: One of the Initialize Logging commands must come before this one.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait (sec): String in the time to wait between capturing data points.
Start time
Start/End
StartDirectMode
Starter Set
Starting Value
Starting from a binary image, calculates a skeleton from particles within an image or the lines delineating the zones of influence (skeleton of an inverse image). The source image must have a border greater than or equal to 1. <LF>  	  <LF>Mode specifies the type of skeleton to perform. The default is 0.<LF><LF>  0	Skeleton L uses this type structuring element:<LF>  1	Skeleton M uses this type structuring element:<LF>  2	Skiz is an inverse skeleton (Skeleton L on an inverse image).<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Starting from a labeled image, calculates the zones of influence between particles. Each labeled particle grows until the particles reach their neighbors, at which time this growth is stopped. The source image must have a border greater than or equal to 1.<LF>  <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Starts Direct Commands sent to other RCXs.<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to start direct communication with remote RCX(s).  
Starts Direct Commands sent to other RCXs<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to start remote programming of RCX(s).  It starts  the downloading of programs.
Starts monitoring for the corresponding event(s)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want <LF>to start monitoring for:  red, yellow, blue <LF>
Starts monitoring for the corresponding event(s)<LF>The default is to start monitoring for the Red Event.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want <LF>to start monitoring for:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>
Starts the motors and lamps.  This will not set any power settings or direction.  It will use the last defined settings.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to start.
Starts the motors and lamps.  This will not set any power<LF>settings or direction.  It will use the last defined settings.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to start.
State
State In
State Out
Statistic
Statistics
Status
StatusA (0-2)
StatusB (0-2)
Steepness
Step
Step # 1 of 2
Steps
Stop
Stop A
Stop Access Control Monitoring
Stop All Outputs
Stop B
Stop C
Stop Event Monitoring
Stop Logging
Stop Outputs
Stop Task(s)
Stop all event monitoring.
Stop character
Stop one or all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>The default is to stop all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-taking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to stop.  
Stop one or all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>The default is to stop all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to stop.  
Stop the data logging for the item in the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is stopped for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Stop the data logging for the item in the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is stopped for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>
Stop the motor or lamp connected to port A.
Stop the motor or lamp connected to port B.
Stop the motor or lamp connected to port C.
Stop the motors and lamps connected to all ports.
Stop the motors and lamps.<LF>The default is to stop all motors and lamps.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to stop.
Stop time (100msec)
Strikeout?
String
String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<LF>
String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download).  
String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>Check - is it on?:  if true (default), then the program will ping the RCX.   You HAVE to do this if you send the same command twice.<LF>
String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download).  Make sure the Scout is near the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<LF>
String a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  
String a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near<LF>the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<FONT style='B'><LF>
String a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near<LF>the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it<FONT size=10>.<FONT style='B'><LF>
String a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the Scout is near<LF>the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<FONT style='B'><LF>
String width
StringofLandI
Strings []
Structuring Element
Sub-Pixel Accuracy
SubPixel Accuracy
SubPixel Information
Subroutine number
Subtract
Subtract a number from a container.<LF>The default is to subtract 1 from the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to subtract:  String in a number to subtract <LF>from the container.
Subtract a number from a container.<LF>The default is to subtract 1 from the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to subtract:  String in a number to subtract from the container.
Subtracts one image from another or a constant from an image.<LF>    	    <LF>Constant is the value subtracted from the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The constant is rounded down in cases in which the image is encoded as an integer. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Subtracts two images where the first is a complex image, or subtracts a complex constant from a complex image.<LF>  <LF>Constant is the complex constant subtracted from the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B is the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image. If the image is not a complex image, then the imaginary part of the Image Dst is equal to Image Src A.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – Constant.
Successful Events
Superimposes objects (rectangles, ovals, lines, text, and so forth) on an image window. These superimposed objects normally are drawn in a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW picture using the Picture Control Toolkit for G Development Environments.<LF><LF>Redraw image? (Y) Specifies whether the image is redrawn in the window after the picture is superimposed on the window.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) specifies the window in which the picture is superimposed.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Picture to add (none) contains the objects (rectangles, ovals, lines, text, and so forth) that are superimposed on the window These superimposed objects normally are drawn in a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW picture using the Picture Control Toolkit for G Development Environments.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Suppress Error Codes? (F)
Suppress Upload bar?
Switch
Synchronous
TBS
TEST RCX COMMUNICATION
TIFF Options
TR
TR Threshold
TRUE
Tab Control
Table
Table 2
Tach Speed (0,1)
Tacho Counter (0,1)
Task
Task 1
Task Events (0-9)
Task ID
Task ID in
Task ID out
Task Number
Task Priority
Task Split
TaskFlags (0-1)
Tasks
Temp (C) Container
Temp (F) Container
Temperature
Temperature (Celsius)
Temperature Container (ProTemp LogIT)
Temperature Data
Temperature Sensor Fork (ProTemp LogIT)
Temperature Threshold
Template
Template Bounds
Template Names
Template page
Templates should be file names
Tempo
Test
Test (Data)
Test RCX Communication
Text
Text 1
Text 2
Text Mode (No RCX Communication)
Text version
ThPercent (1-100)
The Battery Level of the RCX.
The Describe Project page allows you to write about your findings.
The JPEG picture you have chosen.
The Presentation pages.
The RCX stores certain information.  You can use this program to see the values stored in its memory.<LF><LF>This is the value of the item whose picture is in the box to the left.
The Task ID defines which configuration you are using.
The VLL command sends out a code over<LF>the VLL port to the Micro Scout. <LF><LF>D:  signify direct commands.<LF>S:  signify scripting commands.<LF>
The VLL command sends out a code over<LF>the VLL port to the Micro Scout. <LF><LF>D:  signify direct commands.<LF>S:  signify scripting commands.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>VLL Command:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the command to send to the MicroScout.
The VLL command sends out a code to an other<LF>device that can be controlled by a VLL port. 
The VLL command sends out a code to an other<LF>device that can be controlled by a VLL port. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>VLL Command:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the command to send out.
The X-axis label comes from the Data Set.
The Y-axis label is the same as the bin name.  Change the bin name by clicking on the name below the picture of the bin.  If you delete the name, the next time you upload data it will take the name from the Data Set.
The battery level.
The command clears all the 16 events. Tasks that are actively waiting/monitoring for events are not alerted to this fact. 
The command empties the sound buffer and ignores future sounds. System generated sounds from e.g. button presses or low battery detection will still play.
The command immediately empties the sound buffer in the RCX from any and all queued tones or system sounds. This can be used to implement immediate sound feedback for events. 
The command restarts the sound buffer to play sounds.
The command sets the thresholds and hysteresis for the specified event number. The settings are calculated from the sensor measurements taken, and the sensor mode. In order to secure “correct” parameters, several measurements are taken. From these measurements the average EventValue is calculated. No of measurements is as follows: Physical sensors : 8 measurements Virtual sensors : 1 measurement When using the ‘cale’ command, the program must be halted for some time, in order to allow the firmware to do the calibration. To see how the actual calculations are done, please refer to the chapter Events, page 100. The command is not useful for calibrating an event that monitors a switch sensor. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF>
The duration of the tone, in seconds.
The equations for the lines.
The last value captured in the Blue Data Set.
The last value captured in the Red Data Set.
The last value captured in the Yellow Data Set.
The light sensor and the angle sensor are both reporting approximately 29 rotations in 5 seconds, which when multiplied by 12 comes to 348 rotations per 60 seconds, or 348 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).<LF><LF>The speed of the motor is supposed to be 350 RPM, so our spinner is accurate.  Our spinner is also as accurate as the LEGO angle sensor.
The picture to which you want to add the array of data. It defaults to an empty picture if you do not wire it.
The power level (High or Low) of the infrared transmitter on the RCX.
The resulting picture.
The speed of the motor or the intensity of the lamp.
The time between captured data points.  The fastest you can sample at these levels is 0.05 sec between points.
The time between captured data points. The fastest you can sample at these levels is 0.05 sec between points.
The time left in loading the Investigator Areas.
The title of your Investigator Project.
The top left point of the drawn bitmap.
The value is the battery voltage level multiplied by 1000.
The value is the battery voltage level multiplied by<LF>1000.
The value is the firmware version number multiplied by 100.
The value is the firmware version number<LF>multiplied by 100.
The value of Port 1.
The value of Port 2.
The value of Port 3.
The value of Port 4.
The value of Port 5.
The value of Port 6.
The value of Port 7.
The value of Port 8.
The value of a generic container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to <LF>select any of the 21 available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container <LF>variables.
The value of a generic container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
The value of a generic container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
The value of mail in the RCX mailbox.
The value of the Blue Container.
The value of the Blue Timer.
The value of the Red Container.
The value of the Red Timer.
The value of the Red timer.
The value of the Yellow Container.
The value of the Yellow Timer.
The value of the Yellow timer.
The value of the clock in the RCX (what you see <LF>on the display) in minutes since 00:00.
The value of the container as specified by another container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to <LF>select any of the 21 available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container <LF>variables.
The value of the duration for the blue event
The value of the duration for the generic event
The value of the duration for the red event
The value of the duration for the yellow event
The value of the hystersis for the blue event
The value of the hystersis for the generic event
The value of the hystersis for the red event
The value of the hystersis for the yellow event
The value of the lower threshold for the blue event
The value of the lower threshold for the generic event
The value of the lower threshold for the red event
The value of the lower threshold for the yellow event
The value of the red event
The value of the upper threshold for the blue event
The value of the upper threshold for the generic event
The value of the upper threshold for the red event
The value of the upper threshold for the yellow event
Theme Name
Themes
These buttons allow you choose which area you want to work in.
These buttons allow you to add and delete pages to your project.
These buttons allow you to return to the main Investigator screen, quit out of ROBOLAB, or see the help menu.
Thick
Thin
This Level 5 program takes advantage of the Free Sampling option (with time stamp) to sample the timer only after the light goes on and the user pushes the touch sensor.
This VI Extracts a single color plane from the image.
This VI adds two images pixel by pixel or a constant to one image.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> is added to the image.  (Does not work on a color image)
This VI adds two images pixel by pixel or a constant<LF> to one image.  If Image 2 is unwired, the constant <LF>is added to the image. (Does not work on a color image)
This VI allows the user to take data and send a waveform out to the motors at the same time (to within 10 msec).
This VI allows the user to take data and send multiple waveforms out to the motors at the same time with full triggering and clock control.
This VI allows the user to trigger acquisition sweeps along with using a sensor as a clock source for the acquisition.
This VI allows the user to trigger waveforms sent out along with using a sensor as a clock source for the waveform.
This VI automatically thresholds a histogram using <LF>the triangle method.  It outputs the threshold value.
This VI automatically thresholds a histogram using the triangle method.  It outputs the threshold value.
This VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  <LF>Pixels within the determined range  are given the value 1, while <LF>pixels outside this range  are given the value 0.  The output image is binary.
This VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  Pixels within the determined range are given the value 1, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is binary.
This VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  Pixels within the determined range maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  (Does not work with color images)
This VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  Pixels within the determined range maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is greyscale.
This VI automatically thresholds an image(clustering method).<LF>Pixels within the determined range  maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.   (Does not work with color images)
This VI automatically thresholds an image(clustering method).<LF>Pixels within the determined range <LF>maintain their original value, while pixels outside this <LF>range are given the value 0.  The output image is <LF>greyscale.
This VI changes the correlation image from frequency representation (low frequencies at the corners) to optical representation (low frequencies at the center) and vice-versa.
This VI closes the camera.
This VI closes the floating tools window
This VI closes the floating user window
This VI closes the microphone.
This VI collects one second of sound data
This VI collects one second of sound data.
This VI collects sound data until stopped
This VI computes the correlation of two images.
This VI converts a 2-dimensional array to an image.  <LF>The image resolution is equal to the number of <LF>columns by the number of rows. <LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left).  Default is False.
This VI converts a 2-dimensional array to an image.  The image resolution is equal to the number of columns by the number of rows.<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left).  Default is False.
This VI converts a ROBOLAB image type to a IMAQ image type.
This VI converts an IMAQ image type to a ROBOLAB image type and disposes of the IMAQ image.
This VI converts an image into a 2-dimensional array <LF>of rows and columns (e.g. 320 columns and 240 rows).<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left). Default is False.
This VI converts an image into a 2-dimensional array of rows and columns (e.g. 320 columns and 240 rows).<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left).
This VI converts an image to a LabView picture, and <LF>autoscales the pixel values from 0 to 255.  A binary <LF>image, for example, would show up as an image of <LF>zeroes and 255s (as opposed to zeroes and ones).<LF><LF>If 24-bit color table is wired, this VI will apply <LF>that color table to the picture.
This VI converts an image to a LabView picture, and autoscales the pixel values from 0 to 255.  A binary image, for example, would show up as an image of zeroes and 255s (as opposed to zeroes and ones).<LF><LF>If <<B>>24-bit color table<</B>> is wired, this VI will apply that color table to the picture.
This VI converts an image to a LabView picture.
This VI counts the number of blobs in an image.<LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.<LF><LF>The output image has each blobl labeled with a different number (up to 255), and the # of blobs is returned.
This VI counts the number of blobs in an image.<LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.<LF><LF>The output image has each blobl labeled with a different<LF>number (up to 255), and the # of blobs is returned.
This VI divides two images pixel by pixel or one <LF>image by a constant.  If Image 2 is unwired, <LF>the constant input is used to divide the image.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
This VI divides two images pixel by pixel or one image by a constant.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> input is used to divide the image. (Does not work on a color image)
This VI does a Fourier Transform on the one second <LF>of sound grabbed.
This VI does a Fourier Transform on the one second of sound grabbed.
This VI draws a 1, 4 or 8 bit pixmap or a 24 bit RGB pixmap into a LabVIEW picture.  This VI takes a 1D array of bytes as input and assumes all packing and padding is done by the user.
This VI extracts a subImage from the original image
This VI extracts the nearest power of two subset of an image for faster processing using the FFT.  For example, a 320x240 image would be cropped to a 256x256 image (the image is cropped from the right and bottom).
This VI fills tiny holes and smooths the inner  contour of particles with respect to the value of Connectivity.
This VI fills tiny holes and smooths the inner contour of particles with respect to the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Codabar barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Check character (False) (default False) indicates if a check character is encoded in the barcode. (This standard has an optional check character.)<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Code 128 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>-  Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>-  ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>-  error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>-  Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>-  error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Code 39 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Check character (False) (default False) indicates if a check character is encoded in the barcode. (This standard has an optional check character.)<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Code 93 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the EAN13 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>-	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>-	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>-	First flag character (default 3) is the first character of the code. This user specified character determines the way the other characters are encoded.<LF><LF>-	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>-	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>-	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the interleaved 2 of 5 standard barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>-  Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Check character (False) (default False) indicates if a check character is encoded in the barcode. (This standard has an optional check character.)<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the standard EAN 8 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the standard MSI barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the standard UPC A barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This VI generates color tables for all four planes - Red, Green, Blue and Greyscale, as well as a table of 256 random 24-bit colors. 
This VI generates color tables for all four planes <LF>- Red, Green, Blue and Greyscale, as well as a table <LF>of 256 random 24-bit colors. 
This VI gets the value of the pixel located at the specified <<B>>Position<</B>> and returns its value (either as an 8-bit number or an <<B>>RGB<</B>> cluster).
This VI gets the value of the pixel located at the specified <LF>Position and returns its value (either as an 8-bit <LF>number or an RGB cluster).
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in all planes creating an<LF>RGB image.
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the blue plane.
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the green plane.
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the greyscale<LF> plane.
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the red plane.
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized camera.  The color of the image is specified by <<B>>Image Type<</B>> (default is greyscale).
This VI grabs a single image from an initialized camera. <LF> The color of the image is specified by image type<LF> (default is greyscale).
This VI initializes the camera at Internet Settting (320x240).
This VI initializes the camera at its large setting (640x480)
This VI initializes the camera at its large setting <LF>(320x240).
This VI initializes the camera at its large setting <LF>(640x480)
This VI initializes the camera at its small setting (160x120).
This VI initializes the camera at its small setting <LF>(160x120).  
This VI initializes the camera on the internet at its large setting <LF>(320x240).
This VI initializes the microphone.
This VI inverts the input image.  (Does not work on a color image)
This VI inverts the input image.  <LF>(Does not work on a color image)
This VI is reserved for internal use.
This VI is similar to IMAQ WindZoom, but allows the user to zoom the image at different scales in X and Y. IMAQ WindXYZoom produces rectangular pixels in displaying the image.<LF><LF>Window number (0...15) is a number that specifies the image window. The default value is 0.<LF><LF>Zoom Factors X and Y is a cluster containing the zoom factors for X and Y scale.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor X ranges from –16 to +16.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor Y ranges from –16 to +16.<LF><LF>Center Point is a structure containing two elements that describe the (x, y) coordinates used to center the image in the image window. Using Center Point, you can center an image with respect to a user-chosen region. Additionally, you can use Center Point to place only a part of an image into an image window.<LF><LF>X is the horizontal coordinate of the center point.<LF><LF>Y is the vertical coordinate of the center point.<LF><LF>This value is adjusted automatically in cases in which the Center Point value is not coherent with the size of the image window and zoom factor. For example, an image at 256 × 256 displayed in an image window of 256 × 256 containing a zoom factor of (1, 1) by definition has a single Center Point of (127, 127). An erroneously entered value is corrected, which produces an output value that is different than the input value.<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user wants to know the present status or modify the Zoom Factor and Center Point.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Zoom Factors X and Y returns the actual Zoom Factor in both the axis.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor X returns the horizontal Zoom Factor.<LF>Zoom Factor Y returns the vertical Zoom Factor.<LF><LF>Center Point returns the actual Center Point.<LF><LF>X is the horizontal coordinate.<LF><LF>Y is the vertical coordinate.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	The interactive zoom tool produces the same results as a homogeneous X and Y zoom: it doubles (or reduces, by shift-clicking) the dimensions of the pixels in the image window by a factor of 2. For example, if you have a 5 × 3 zoom and you click with the zoom tool, you produce a 10 × 6 zoom. If you shift-click, you produce a 2 × 1 zoom. Zoom is bounded by the highest absolute value in X or Y: if you have a 10 × 2, you cannot zoom in because the double of 10 is greater than 16.
This VI loads an image from a BMP file.
This VI loads an image from a JPEG file.  It treats all images as color images (extract a plane if you only one greyscale).
This VI loads an image from a JPEG file.<LF>It treats all images as color images (extract<LF>a plane if you only one greyscale).
This VI mirrors the input image (vertical symmetry).  The image may be any <LF>type (binary, greyscale or RGB).
This VI mirrors the input image (vertical symmetry).  The image may be any type (binary, greyscale or RGB).
This VI multiplies two images pixel by pixel or one <LF>image by a constant.  If Image 2 is unwired, <LF>the constant input is used to multiply the image.	<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
This VI multiplies two images pixel by pixel or one image by a constant.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> input is used to multiply the image. (Does not work on a color image)
This VI performs a Hit-or-Miss morphological <LF>operation on the input image.  All pixel neighborhoods <LF>matching the given connectivity are kept.  All <LF>others are removed.  Input image must be binary.
This VI performs a Hit-or-Miss morphological operation on the input image.  All pixel neighborhoods matching the given <<B>>connectivity<</B>> are kept.  All others are removed.  Input image must be binary.
This VI performs a bitwise AND on two images. (Does not work on a color image)
This VI performs a bitwise AND on two images.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
This VI performs a bitwise OR on two images. (Does not work on a color image)
This VI performs a bitwise OR on two images.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
This VI performs a depth-first search on an image to <LF>determine the number of blobs and returns a parameter<LF>of  the blob.<LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.  <LF><LF>Connectivity defines the way in which blobs are <LF>searched.  4-connectivity will yield more small blobs, <LF>since diagonals are not considered connections.<LF>8-connectivity will yield fewer, larger blobs.  <LF><LF>Output is an image in which each blob is identified by <LF>a number.  All pixels corresponding to blob #1 are <LF>given the value 1, while all those corresponding to <LF>blob #2 are given the value 2 and so on.  Also, an array<LF>of blob sizes indicates the number of blobs<LF>found and each of their sizes.
This VI performs a depth-first search on an image to determine the number of blobs.  <LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.  <LF><LF><<B>>Connectivity<</B>> defines the way in which blobs are searched.  4-connectivity will yield more small blobs, since diagonals are not considered connections.  8-connectivity will yield fewer, larger blobs.  <LF><LF>Output is an image in which each blob is identified by a number.  All pixels corresponding to blob #1 are given the value 1, while all those corresponding to blob #2 are given the value 2 and so on.  Also, an array of <<B>>blob sizes<</B>> indicates the number of blobs found and each of their sizes.
This VI performs an erosion on the input image using <LF>the given connectivity.  This typically shrinks <LF>features in binary images.
This VI performs an erosion on the input image using the given <<B>>connectivity<</B>>.  This typically shrinks features in binary images.
This VI performs an external egde detection on the <LF>input image.  The result is an image containing only <LF>the external edges of the features in the original image.
This VI performs an external egde detection on the input image.  The result is an image containing only the external edges of the features in the original image.
This VI performs an internal egde detection on the <LF>input image.  The result is an image containing only <LF>the internal edges of the features in the original image.
This VI performs an internal egde detection on the input image.  The result is an image containing only the internal edges of the features in the original image.
This VI performs dilation on the input image using the <LF>given connectivity.  This typically enlarges <LF>features in binary images.
This VI performs dilation on the input image using the given <<B>>connectivity<</B>>.  This typically enlarges features in binary images.
This VI performs the selected Morphological operation <LF>using the given Connectivity.<LF><LF>The possible operations are:<LF><LF>Dilation<LF>Erosion<LF>Open<LF>Close<LF>External Edge Detection<LF>Internal Edge Detection<LF>Thin<LF>Thick<LF>Proper Open<LF>Proper Close<LF>Auto-Median<LF>Add<LF>Subtract<LF>Multiply<LF>Divide
This VI performs the selected Morphological operation using the given <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>.<LF><LF>The possible operations are:<LF><LF>Dilation<LF>Erosion<LF>Open<LF>Close<LF>External Edge Detection<LF>Internal Edge Detection<LF>Thin<LF>Thick<LF>Proper Open<LF>Proper Close<LF>Auto-Median<LF>Add<LF>Subtract<LF>Multiply<LF>Divide
This VI plays sound data
This VI reads sound data from a .wav file
This VI removes bright spots isolated in dark regions <LF>and smooths boundaries.
This VI removes bright spots isolated in dark regions and smooths boundaries.
This VI removes dark spots isolated in bright <LF>regions and smooths boundaries.
This VI removes dark spots isolated in bright regions and smooths boundaries.<LF>
This VI removes small particles and smooths the <LF>contour of particles with respect to the value of <LF>Connectivity.
This VI removes small particles and smooths the contour of particles with respect to the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>.
This VI rotates the input image.  The image may be any  type (binary, greyscale or RGB).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF>Angle (degrees) This is the amount to rotate (default is 45 degrees) 
This VI rotates the input image.  The image may be any  type (binary, greyscale or RGB).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF>Angle (degrees): This is the amount to rotate (default is 45 degrees) 
This VI saves an image to a BMP file.
This VI saves an image to a JPEG file.
This VI saves sound data to a .wav file
This VI shrinks an image to half its original size (1:2).
This VI subtracts two images pixel by pixel or a <LF>constant from one image.  If Image 2 is unwired, <LF>the constant is subtracted from the image.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
This VI subtracts two images pixel by pixel or a constant from one image.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> is subtracted from the image. (Does not work on a color image)
This VI thresholds an image based on the specified <<B>>Range<</B>>.  Pixels within this range are given the value 1, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is binary.
This VI thresholds an image based on the specified <<B>>Range<</B>>.  Pixels within this range maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is greyscale.
This VI thresholds an image based on the specified <LF>range.  Pixels within this range are given the <LF>value 1, while pixels outside this range are given the <LF>value 0.  The output image is binary.
This VI thresholds an image based on the specified <LF>range.  Pixels within this range maintain their <LF>original value, while pixels outside this range are given <LF>the value 0.  The output image is greyscale.
This VI uses dual combinations of openings and closings.  <LF>It generates simpler particles that have fewer details.
This VI uses dual combinations of openings and closings.  It generates simpler particles that have fewer details.
This VI will continually change the motor speed on a given channel based on an input array of numbers from -8 to 8 (0=stop).  The rate at which these speeds are changed is dictated by the scan rate.
This VI will have the RCX measure a waveform of a specified length and sampling rate on a specified channel.  It returns a 1-D array of data points measured.
This VI will pause action until the current lighting reaches this lighting.
This VI will pause action until the current temperature reaches this temperature.
This adds the Data Set defined by the X and Y numbers to an existing bin.<LF>The default bin is the red bin.
This allows you to adjust the camera settings.
This allows you to choose which tool you want to draw your mask.
This allows you to lock or unlock RCX program slots 1 & 2.<LF><LF>The RCX can retain up to 5 programs in memory at once.<LF><LF>It may be useful to lock programs 1 & 2 on the RCX.  If they are locked, you can not download new programs into slots 1 & 2 and if you attempt to do so, the program will automatically be downloaded into slot 3 instead.
This allows you to read the 8bit intensity on either image by moving the cursor around in either image.
This allows you to view the data sets in any bin.  The default is for the red bin.  The plot attributes are the labels for the X and Y axis.
This allows you to view the data sets in any bin.  The default is for the red bin.  The plot attributes<LF>are the labels for the X and Y axis.
This area allows you to change between pages in your Presentation.
This averages all the Data Sets in a bin together. <LF>It assumes that all lines have the same spacing in time.  If they<LF>are not, you will get an error, except if you have suppressed<LF>error codes by stringing a boolean true to 'Suppress Error Codes'.
This button will resnap the second image.  Motion is detected by grabbing two images and looking at the change in pixel intensity from the first image to the second.  Snap will re-grab both images, resnap will only regrab the second image.
This changes a selected note's length to 1 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1.
This changes a selected note's length to 1/16 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/16.
This changes a selected note's length to 1/2 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/2.
This changes a selected note's length to 1/4 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/4.
This changes a selected note's length to 1/8 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/8.
This changes the length of the selected note inside the beat.  The three options are regular, slurred, and staccato.  
This changes the shape of the mask to be applied to a circle.
This changes the shape of the mask to be applied to a square.
This changes the shape of the mask to be applied to a user defined polygon.
This chooses the color bin
This chooses the color bin.
This chooses which part of the bin you want to plot on the X axis:  the X value, Y value, or point number of all data sets in the bin.
This chooses which part of the bin you want to plot on the Y axis:  the X value, Y value, or point number of all data sets in the bin.
This cluster allows the user to set up a trigger and a clock.  If left unwired it will default to no trigger and internal clock pulses (as defined by the sampling rate).
This cluster contains all of the settings for the acquisition of a waveform.
This cluster defines the settings needed to trigger the start of a data acquisition event.
This command gives back the memory allotment within the RCX.
This command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Black Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Jump command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Green Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Jump command is needed somewhere<LF>else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to 20 <LF>to represent the jump number.  The same number must be <LF>used in the corresponding Jumping command.
This command is where the program will jump to when <LF>the Blue Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Jump command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when <LF>the Yellow Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Jump command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when another tasks of higher priority wants to control the outputs (motors, sounds, lights etc...).<LF><LF>
This command is where the program will jump to when any event is triggered.  You have to use the Event Register Container to figure out which event was triggered if you have more than one event.<LF><LF>Note: Events must be set up and monitoring must be started before this command can be used.
This command is where the program will jump to when the <LF>Red Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Jump command is needed somewhere else <LF>in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Black Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Blue Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Green Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to 20 to represent the jump number.  The same number must be used in the corresponding Jumping command.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Red Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
This command is where the program will jump to when the Yellow Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
This command is where the program will stop access control monitoring.<LF>
This command is where the program will stop access control monitoring.<LF><LF>
This command will poll the Control Lab for the value of any memory location (sensor value, container value, mail value, etc.).<LF>Outputs the value as a number.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
This command will poll the RCX for the value of any memory location (sensor value, container value, mail value, etc.) and displays it to the user.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
This command will poll the RCX for the value of any memory location (sensor value, contanier value, mail value, etc.). Outputs the value as a number.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
This command will poll the RCX for the value of any memory location (sensor value, contanier value, mail value, etc.).<LF>Outputs the value as a number.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
This completes the direct mode calls. It must be on the end of every direct mode string.
This completes the direct mode calls.<LF>It must be on the end of every direct mode string.
This container control allows you to specify more than just red, yellow and blue containers.  You will need to wire this into the Generic Container or Value of Generic Container modifier.<LF><LF>User 0-2 are the red, yellow, and blue containers.  <LF>User 23-29 are used in data logging.<LF>variables 33-47 are task specific variables and are used for loops and in Wait for Angle and Play System Sound.
This contains the speeds for the motor - ranging from -8 to 8.  0 imples stopping the motor and negative values rotate the motor in the opposite direction of positive values.  Lights behave similarly (with no difference between positive and negative values).
This control/indicator defines a sequence of execution.  In remote mode it includes the command list.  
This control/indicator defines a sequence of execution.  In remote mode it includes the command list.  The ID number corresponds to the port used:<LF>0   Modem Port (COM1)<LF>1   Printer Port  (COM2)<LF>2   PBrick Direct Modem<LF>3   PBrick Direct Printer<LF>4   PBrick Remote Modem<LF>5   PBrick Remote Printer
This controls the tempo at which the song is played.  This is displayed in Beats/min.
This defines on which plane of the image your sensor will operate.  For instance if you want to look for a red LEGO brick, then look for large (bright) values in the red plane.  All planes vary from 0 (dark) to 255 (light).
This defines the clock type:<LF>  Internal clock - the cluster is ignored<LF>  rising - the RCX will take a measurement when the clock sensor is greater than or equal to the value.  The RCX will then wait for the sensor to fall below the cutoff value before again waiting for the next clock pulse.<LF>  falling - the RCX will take a measurement when the clock sensor equals or falls below the value. The RCX will then wait for the sensor to rise above the cutoff value before again waiting for the next clock pulse.<LF>
This defines the trigger type:<LF>  No trigger - the cluster is ignored<LF>  rising trigger - the sweep will start when the trigger sensor is greater than or equal to the value<LF>  falling trigger - the sweep will start when the trigger sensor equals or falls below the value.
This defines which bin you want to use.
This defines which pixels are affected with the morphology or particle analysis.
This deletes the selected note
This describes which sensor will act as the external clock source.
This describes which sensor will act as the trigger.
This differentiates every Data Set in the bin separately and returns a plot of the differentiated Data Sets.
This displays a histogram of the different pixel values of light in the image that is displayed.  Pixel values in between the two lines are kept, while pixel values outside of the two lines are discarded.
This displays the current date and time.
This displays the current step in the program.
This displays the date and  time.
This displays the different blobs with the measurement associated with each blob.
This displays the image with the applied image operations.
This displays the musical term that corrisponds to the selected tempo.  The tempo can not be changed here.
This displays the path to the ROBOLAB program files on your hard drive.
This displays the path to your ROBOLAB program files.
This displays the total number of notes in the song, or the number of the current note while the song is being played by the computer
This displays the unaltered image.
This displays what the camera sees.  Click on the ""OK"" button to keep the image.
This displays whether the indicated program is open and running or not.
This extracts the measured values in a Data Set when the Data Set value is between two values. For instance you can use this to measure the time the temperature in a room is between two temperatures.  You can extract the data from the same data set or another one - for instance, you can extract the light values for when the temperature falls within a given range.<LF><LF>The default Cutoffs are 0 and 100.
This filters out the given values of blobs depending on the type of blob math that is selected.  Only blobs between Min and Max will be kept.   If Max<<= Min then the filter is ignored.  If Max = -1 then just the maximum blob is kept.
This finds the time that the measured value in a Data Set exceeds a given threshold value. For instance you can use this to measure the time the temperature in a room exceeds a given number.<LF><LF>The default Cutoff value is 0.
This finds the time that the measured value in a Data Set is below a given threshold value. For instance you can use this to measure the time the temperature in a room is below a given number.<LF><LF>The default Cutoff value is 0.
This functions works on 8bit, 16bit, float and RGB images.<LF><LF>Redraws an image in a user-defined size. This VI is useful for displaying a reduced or enlarged image (for example, a zoom-in or zoom-out image).<LF>  	<LF>Interpolation Type specifies the type of interpolation (zero-order or bilinear) used to resample the image.<LF>	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to redraw. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>X Resolution gives the final horizontal size of the image.<LF><LF>Y Resolution gives the final vertical size of the image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
This indicate the version number of the firmware on the RCX.  It may be useful for updating your RCX in the future.
This indicates the current firmware version of the RCX.  If this window says No RCX then communication with the RCX through the IR transmitter was unsuccessful.
This indicates the life of the batteries in your RCX.  If this value gets low, the outputs will run slowly and your RCX may not communicate with the IR Transimitter properly.
This initializes the microphone.
This input holds the data to be processed. The data can be either a single array or consecutive blocks of data, the latter being useful for large data arrays or for realtime processing. Note that in realtime processing, peaks/valleys are not detected until about width/2 data points past the peak/valley.
This inserts a rest into the song.  The length of the rest can be changed the same as the notes
This integrates every Data Set in the bin separately and returns a plot of the integrated Data Sets.
This integrates every Data Set in the bin separately and returns a plot of the integrated Data Sets.  The integrals (trapizoidal method) show the integral from time t0 to the arbitary time t (your X axis).
This is a list of VI's which will be allowed to be accessed from another machine.  
This is a list of machines that are allowed access.  Your own machine is automatically included.  A * allows all machines to have access.
This is a list of the commands that are sent to the RCX.
This is a list of the current themes in your  Vault.  To add a theme, type a name in the field below and click on Add Theme.  To delete a theme, highlight it and click on Delete Theme.
This is a simple example of a server which exports VIs to be called from another machine.  You may run both the client.llb and server.llb on the same machine without modifying the access list.  If you wish to run the client on another machine that is not in your domain you will have to list the name of the client in the Machine Access List. <LF><LF>The VIs listed in the Exported VI list are exported by the server.<LF><LF>To run this example start this VI First, then start the client.llb on all machines you want to try as clients. If you change either of the above lists, you must restart this VI for the changes to take effect.<LF><LF>Click the ""Stop"" button to quit.  This will turn off the server, terminating all client connections, and  restore the previous access lists to their original values.  
This is an Inventor SubVI (or collapsed area).  <LF>You can see the collapsed code by selecting Show Diagram <LF>  from the Windows menu.<LF>You can edit the icon by double clicking on it in this window.
This is one run of measurements.  The light sensor had a reading of 41 when nobody was coming in or going out of the room.  The light reading got lower when somebody walked into or out of the room.
This is the X axis of the current plotted bin.
This is the Y-axis of the current plotted bin.
This is the beginning of the program.
This is the container number.
This is the current image being seen by the camera.  It's appearance can be changed using the Plane button.
This is the end of the program.
This is the list of ports to turn on/off
This is the mask display.  I allows you to draw a mask on your image.
This is the maximum allowable blob.
This is the minimum allowable blob.
This is the number of samples the RCX acquires before the acquisition is complete.   This number must be less than 2000.  The more complex your code, the lower this number.<LF>
This is the path to where your ROBOLAB program is.
This is the power to the motors (0-8).
This is the resulting array of data sets taken.
This is the resulting array of data taken.
This is the sensor for the first data set.
This is the size of the current region of interest (ROI).
This is the title of your Invent and Investigate Project.
This is the type of LEGO sensor attached to the channel.  One for each channel.  The possible IDs are:<LF><LF>0 .. clicks (# of times the touch sensor is hit)<LF>1 .. light<LF>2 .. Temperature (Celsius)<LF>3 .. Temperature (Fahrenheit)<LF>4 .. Angle (degrees)<LF>5 .. Rotation (1/16 of a rotation)<LF>6 .. None<LF>7 .. touch sensor (returns a 0 or 1)<LF>8 .. Touch and Release (like sensor 0 only counts every touch and release rather than every touch)<LF>-2 .. 100 msec timer (specify which timer with the channel)<LF>-5 .. 10 msec timer<LF><LF>DCP Sensors<LF>101 .. Generic (unpowered 5v max)<LF>200 .. Temperature<LF>201 .. Humidity<LF>202 .. SPL<LF>204 .. Ph<LF>205 .. Pressure<LF>206 .. Position<LF>212 .. HiVolt
This is the type of LEGO sensor attached to the channel>>  The possible IDs are:<LF><LF>0 .. clicks (# of times the touch sensor is hit)<LF>1 .. light<LF>2 .. Temperature (Celsius)<LF>3 .. Temperature (Fahrenheit)<LF>4 .. Angle (degrees)<LF>5 .. Rotation (1/16 of a rotation)<LF>6 .. None<LF>7 .. touch sensor (returns a 0 or 1)<LF>8 .. Touch and Release (like sensor 0 only counts every touch and release rather than every touch)<LF>-2 .. 100 msec timer (specify which timer with the channel)<LF>-5 .. 10 msec timer<LF><LF>DCP Sensors<LF>101 .. Generic (unpowered 5v max)<LF>200 .. Temperature<LF>201 .. Humidity<LF>202 .. SPL<LF>204 .. Ph<LF>205 .. Pressure<LF>206 .. Position<LF>212 .. HiVolt
This is the type of sensor for this data set.
This is the type of sensor used as a clock.
This is the type of sensor used as a trigger.
This is the value currently being given from the selected sensor.
This is the value of the above statistic
This is the value of the statistic chosen to the left.
This is the window where the notes of the song are displayed.  You can view different parts of the Scroll by using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down buttons on either side of the Scroll.<LF><LF>
This lets you choose your line type (numbers, points, line points and line, or bar graph).
This lets you choose your line type (points and lines, lines, points, bar graph, or numbers).
This lets you confirm that you want to print.
This lets you stop waiting for the RCX.
This lets you use robolab with other LEGO hardware.
This lists all of the operations you want to use to process your image.  A few of the operations can only be used once.  These commands are then saveed as a program that can be run either in Vision Center or in Inventor 4.  Double-clicking on a page disables the page from the processing (this is in Define Sensor ONLY - Vision Center will run all commands).
This plays the current song through the computer.  Tempos might be played differently then the actual tempo
This provides a visual display of the current RCX battery level.
This reads the Data Set from a spreadsheet file.
This returns a histogram for each Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Bins:This is the desired number of bins in the histogram.<LF>The default number of bins is 10.
This routine will add the musical notes currently in a file into your inventor program.  If you do not specify a path, you will get a dialog box when you run your program.
This routine will add the musical notes currently on the blue scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the blue scroll button.    The default song is ""Row, Row, Row Your Boat.""
This routine will add the musical notes currently on the blue scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the blue scroll button.  The default song is ""Row, Row, Row Your Boat.""
This routine will add the musical notes currently on the red scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the red scroll button.  The default song is ""Frere Jaques.""
This routine will add the musical notes currently on the saved scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player (available in your Project menu after you have installed Extras) and then pressing the save scroll button.
This routine will add the musical notes currently on the yellow scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the yellow scroll button.  The default song is ""Twinkle Little Star.""
This saves the Data Set to a spreadsheet file.
This selects the RCX as the device which plays the notes
This selects the computer as the device which plays the notes
This selects the correct octave
This selects which color plane to view the image in.  Selecting a container will allow you to view the manipulated image for that sensor.
This sets the clock on the RCX.  If you do not specify hours, it will set the clock to the current time on your computer.  The clock's time will appear on the LCD display of the RCX.
This sets the clock on the RCX. If you do not specify <LF>hours, it will set the clock to the current time on your <LF>computer.  The clock's time will appear on the LCD <LF>display of the RCX.
This sets the motor direction randomly.  It does not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn randomly by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.
This sets the motor direction randomly.  It does<LF>not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn randomly by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.
This sets the priority of any task. <LF><LF>Note: 0 is the highest priority.<LF><LF>Modifiers<LF><LF>Priority: String in the priority you wish to assign to the task. <LF>0 is the highest priority.   <LF><LF>Note: This can ONLY be  a number from 0 - 255.  You cannot use container values and other modifiers.
This shows a plot of the data acquired
This shows a plot of the motor speeds sent out.
This shows all computed lines.  You can select only a subset of the data points by zooming on on the plot.  Only the visible data points will be entered into the choosen bin.
This shows all visible lines
This shows all visible lines.  For increased accuracy in sensor readings, go to the robolab website: http://www.lego.com/dacta/robolab.
This shows how fast Vision Center is working.  The number is the number of frames a second computed per second.  This number can be increased by disabling virtual memory, minimizing the number of tasks in your sensor, and by closing the image.  10-15 Hz is very fast (hardly any computation and no RCX communication), 5 Hz is a good rate when talking to the RCX, and slower than 1 Hz means your sensor is too complicated.
This shows that the computer is waiting for the RCX to come into view.
This shows the current status of the web page build.
This shows the current threshold values.
This shows the download process
This shows the errors in communication
This shows the image used by the operation.  For instance, if you selected subtract, then this sensor would  subtract this image from whatever the camera sees.
This shows the percent of the download process completed.
This shows the percent of the upload process completed.
This shows the upload process.
This shows which task (or subroutine) is being downloaded.
This shows you the status of your printing operation.
This simply sets the motor direction to go forward.  It does not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to reverse by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.
This simply sets the motor direction to go forward.  It does<LF>not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to go forward by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.
This simply sets the motor direction to reverse.  It does not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to reverse by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.
This simply sets the motor direction to reverse.  It does<LF>not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to reverse by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.
This specifies the camera port you want to use.  Click here to change it.
This specifies the serial port to which the IR Transmitter is connected.  Click here to change it.<LF><LF>If you choose AUTODETECT, ROBOLAB will automatically check to see which port the IR transmitter is connected to when downloading a program.
This toggles whether or not the notes being played are kept on the scroll.
This will abort the download process.
This will abort the upload process.
This will fit a curve to the desired Data Set.<LF>The default order for the curve is second order.
This will fit a line of the form y=a ln(x) + b to the desired Data Set.
This will fit a line to the desired Data Set.
This will fit a spline to the desired Data Set.
This will fit an exponential curve to the desired Data Set.
This will fit y=AlnX + B line to the desired Data Set.
This will stop the loading of the current Project.
This will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder - It will wait until the image is snapped before continuing.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers: none
This will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder. <LF>(This will only work with Vision Control open).<LF><LF>Modifiers: none<LF><LF>
This will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers: none
This will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder<LF><FONT predef=DLGFONT> - It will wait until the image is snapped before continuing<FONT predef=APPFONT>. <LF>(This will only work with Vision Control open).<LF><LF>Modifiers: none<LF><LF>
Threshold
Threshold 0,64,71
Threshold Binary
Threshold Data
Threshold Greyscale
Threshold Level
Threshold Parameters
Threshold Value
Time
Time (1 - 32767)
Time (1-32767)
Time (min)
Time (sec)
Time above threshold
Time below threshold
Time between samples
Time between samples (10msec)
Time to Hit (sec)
Timer
Timer (10ms) (0-3)
Timer 0 on limit
Timer 1 on limit
Timer 2 on limit
Timer Equal Fork
Timer Fork
Timer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the <LF>Blue Timer.
Timer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the <LF>Red Timer.
Timer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the <LF>Yellow Timer.
Timer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the Blue Timer.
Timer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the Red Timer.
Timer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the Yellow Timer.
Timer Threshold
Timer Value
Timer Value Container
Title
Title Page
Tolerance
Too much vectors?
Tool
Tool (Point)
Tools
Tools 1
Tools 2
Tools 3
Tools 4
Tools 5
Tools Type
Top
Total Buffer Size
Total Path
Total Path copy
Touch & Release
Touch 1 pressed
Touch 1 releaed
Touch 2 pressed
Touch 2 released
Touch Container
Touch Sampling
Touch Sensor Fork
Touch and Release Container
Touch and Release Equal Fork
Touch and Release Fork
Tower
Track
Trans. Counter
Transfer Max Size
Transforms a region of interest into a mask.<LF><LF>Image Model serves as a template for the destination image where the mask is placed. Image takes the characteristics of Image Model (size and location of ROI) when Image Model is connected. However, the connection of Image Model is optional. This can be any image type supported by IMAQ Vision.<LF><LF>Image is the destination image where the mask is copied. This image must be an 8-bit image type.<LF><LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest.<LF><LF>Filling Value (255) is the pixel value of the mask. All pixels inside of the region of interest take this value. The default value is 255.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>Coordinates out of space? returns TRUE if any ROI data is found outside the space associated with the image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Transforms an image mask into a region of interest.<LF><LF>External edges only (T) specifies whether only the external edges are transformed. The default is TRUE.<LF><LF>Image is the image containing the image mask that is transformed into a region of interest. This image must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Max number of vectors in ROI is the limit of points that define the contour of a region of interest. This value is 2500 by default but can be increased if necessary. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>ROI Descriptor returns the descriptor for a region of interest.<LF><LF>Too many vectors? returns TRUE if the number of vectors needed to represent the ROI exceeds the value specified by Max number of vectors in ROI.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Transforms an image through its symmetry.<LF>    	<LF>Type of Symmetry specifies the symmetry used. The default is 0.<LF><LF>   0	Horizontal	(Default) Based on the horizontal axis of the image<LF>   1	Vertical	Based on the vertical axis of the image<LF>   2	Central	Based on the center of the image<LF>   3	1st Diagonal	Based on the first diagonal of the image<LF>    (the image must be squared)<LF>   4	2nd Diagonal	Based on the second diagonal of the image <LF>     (the image must be squared)<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Transition
Translates an image based on a horizontal and vertical offset.<LF>      	<LF>Replace Value defines the filling value created by the shift. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>XOffset is the horizontal offset added to the image. The default is 0.<LF><LF>YOffset is the vertical offset added to an image. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
Transmission Error
Transposes the complex components of an FFT image of a complex image. The high and low frequency components of an FFT image are inverted to produce a central symmetric representation of the spatial frequencies.<LF>  <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image for the image to be transposed. This input can accept only a complex image. <LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
Trig/Clock
Trigger
True
Truncates the frequencies of a complex image.<LF>  <LF>Low pass/High pass (Low pass) determines which frequencies are truncated. Choose low pass (F) to remove the high frequencies or high pass (T) to remove the low frequencies. The default is FALSE, which specifies low pass.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be an 8-bit or RGB image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Truncation Frequency % is the percentage of the frequencies that are retained within a Fourier-transformed image. This percentage is expressed with respect to the length of the diagonal of the FFT image and the Boolean Low pass/High pass (Low pass). The default value is 10.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>For example, the defaults Low pass (F) and 10 result in retaining 10 percent of the frequencies starting from the center (low frequencies). The selection of High pass and 10 results in retaining 10 percent of the frequencies starting from the outer periphery.
Truncation Frequency %
Try Again
Try again
Try to get access to a resource through the <LF>glaobal variable GlobalVar1.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Try to get access to a resource through the <LF>global variable Sema0.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Try to get access to a resource through the gloabal<LF>variable GlobalVar2.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Try to get access to a resource through the global variable GlobalVar1.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Try to get access to a resource through the global variable GlobalVar2.<LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Try to get access to a resource through the global variable Sema0.<LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
Tufts University
Tufts University College of Engineering
Turn Outputs On
Turn RCX Power Off
Turn on lamps.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which lamps to turn on by stringing together <LF>any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power <LF>level for the lamps.
Turn on lamps.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which lamps to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamps.
Turn on motors in a random direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
Turn on motors in a random direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
Turn on motors in the forward direction.  <LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
Turn on motors in the forward direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B <LF>and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
Turn on motors in the reverse direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
Turn on motors in the reverse direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
Turn on the lamp connected to port A <LF>at full power.
Turn on the lamp connected to port A at full power.
Turn on the lamp connected to port A.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the lamp.
Turn on the lamp connected to port A.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamp.
Turn on the lamp connected to port B <LF>at full power.
Turn on the lamp connected to port B at full power.
Turn on the lamp connected to port B.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the lamp.
Turn on the lamp connected to port B.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamp.
Turn on the lamp connected to port C <LF>at full power.
Turn on the lamp connected to port C at full power.
Turn on the lamp connected to port C.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the lamp.
Turn on the lamp connected to port C.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamp.
Turn on the motor connected <LF>to port A at full power in the <LF>forward direction.
Turn on the motor connected to <LF>port A at full power in the reverse <LF>direction.
Turn on the motor connected to <LF>port B at full power in the forward <LF>direction.
Turn on the motor connected to <LF>port B at full power in the reverse <LF>direction.
Turn on the motor connected to <LF>port C at full power in the forward <LF>direction.
Turn on the motor connected to <LF>port C at full power in the reverse <LF>direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port A <LF>in the forward direction.  <LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port A at full power in the forward direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port A at full power in the reverse direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port A in the forward direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port A in the reverse direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port A<LF>in the reverse direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port B <LF>in the forward direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port B at full power in the forward direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port B at full power in the reverse direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port B in the forward direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port B in the reverse direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port B<LF>in the reverse direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port C at full power in the forward direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port C at full power in the reverse direction.
Turn on the motor connected to port C in the forward direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port C in the reverse direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port C<LF>in the forward direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
Turn on the motor connected to port C<LF>in the reverse direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
Turn the RCX Off.<LF>This is the equivalent of pushing red On-Off button on the RCX.
Turn the RCX Off.<LF>This is the equivalent of pushing the red On-Off button on the RCX.
Turns the VLL output (the red LED) on or<LF>off for decorative purposes.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'onoff': 0-1 (Boolean)
Turns the VLL output (the red LED) on or<LF>off for decorative purposes.<LF><LF>Legal range for onof: 0-1 (Boolean)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>On/Off:  String a single modifier.<LF>
Type
Type in an amount of time to wait for.<LF><LF>If you want to wait for a random amount of time, make sure you have selected the dice in the space to the left of this number and enter a maximum random number in this space.
Type in here the name of your bin.
Type in the number to compare to the value of the sensor.
Type infomation about this page of your Project below.
Type of Symmetry
Type of log
Type the name of a theme you want to delete in the field above or highlight it in the list and then click this button to delete it.
Type the number to compare to the value of the sensor.
U32 value
UART Setup (0-17)
UNLOCKED
UNTITLED
Unaltered image
Underline?
Undo
Undo the mask that was applied.
Unique ID
Unit
Units
Units read by the sensor.
Unmute Sound
Unused0
Unused1
Unused2
Up 2
Up an Octave
Update Rectangle
Upload
Upload Area
Upload Data
Upload Data from the RCX.
Upload Page
Upload Tools
Uploaded Data
Uploaded Data 2
Upper Cutoff
Upper Threshold
Upper Threshold (0-15)
Upper Value
Upper value
Use Camera Sensor
Use Min Max
Use TIFF Options
Use Vertex (No)  
Use this area to define which project pages you want to print.
Use this field to select the name of a theme you want to create or delete.  You can type a name in this field or click on an exisitng theme from the list above.
Use this input to reject peaks/valleys that are too small. For peaks, any peak found with a fitted amplitude that is less than threshold is ignored. Valleys are ignored if the fitted trough is greater than threshold.
User Click
User Mechanical Actions
User Number
User Project VIs *
User Rectangles
User Source
User State
User pen active
User pen active ? (no)
User10
User11
User12
User13
User14
User15
User16
User17
User18
User19
User20
User21
User22
User23
User24
User25
User26
User27
User28
User29
User3
User30
User31
User4
User5
User6
User7
User8
User9
Uses ambient light levels for setting up the <LF>light sensor trigger levels.  This command <LF>sets upper and lower thresholds and the <LF>hysteresis for the light sensor.<LF><LF>This command takes no parameters.
Uses ambient light levels for setting up the light sensor trigger levels.  This command sets upper and lower thresholds and the hysteresis for the light sensor.<LF><LF>This command takes no parameters.
VLL Command
Value
Value (time)
Value defines the cutoff number for the external clock.
Value defines the cutoff number for the trigger.
Value for Operation
Value of Battery
Value of Blue Container
Value of Blue Data Set
Value of Blue Event
Value of Blue Timer
Value of Clock
Value of Container's Container
Value of Firmware
Value of Generic Container
Value of Generic Event
Value of Mail
Value of Port 1
Value of Port 2
Value of Port 3
Value of Port 4
Value of Port 5
Value of Port 6
Value of Port 7
Value of Port 8
Value of Red Container
Value of Red Data Set
Value of Red Event
Value of Red Timer
Value of Yellow Container
Value of Yellow Data Set
Value of Yellow Event
Value of Yellow Timer
Value of operation
Value of the Blue Lower Threshold
Value of the Blue Upper Threshold
Value of the Container, Timer, Sensor, Clock, or Mail.
Value of the Generic Lower Threshold
Value of the Generic Upper Threshold
Value of the Red Lower Threshold
Value of the Red Upper Threshold
Value of the Yellow Lower Threshold
Value of the Yellow Upper Threshold
Value of the blue duration
Value of the blue hysteresis
Value of the generic duration
Value of the generic hysteresis
Value of the red duration
Value of the red event
Value of the red hysteresis
Value of the yellow duration
Value of the yellow hysteresis
Value out
Value read
Value to read
Values
Var
Variable (0-31)
Vault
Vertex
Vertical
View
View All
View Area
View Modifier
View Page
View Printed Manuals...
View and Compare Area
Visible?
Vision
Vision Center
Vision Template
Voltage Container (Voltmeter LogIT)
Voltage Fork (Voltmeter LogIT)
Voltage LogIT
Voltmeter
Volume
Wait  (sec)
Wait (1/100 sec)
Wait (min)
Wait For Clock
Wait For Container
Wait Time (sec)
Wait for
Wait for 1 sec
Wait for 1 second.
Wait for 10 Points
Wait for 10 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 10 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Wait for 10 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 10 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Wait for 10 sec
Wait for 10 seconds.
Wait for 100 Points
Wait for 100 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 100 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Wait for 2 sec
Wait for 2 seconds.
Wait for 4 sec
Wait for 4 seconds.
Wait for 500 Points
Wait for 500 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 500 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
Wait for 500 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 500 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Wait for 6 sec
Wait for 6 seconds.
Wait for 8 sec
Wait for 8 seconds.
Wait for Angle
Wait for Brighter
Wait for Change
Wait for Change (%)
Wait for Clicks
Wait for Dark
Wait for Darker
Wait for Decrease in Acceleration
Wait for Decrease in Barometeric Pressure
Wait for Decrease in Camera Sensor
Wait for Decrease in Lux 
Wait for Decrease in Redox 
Wait for Decrease in Voltage (Generic)
Wait for Decrease in Voltage (Voltmeter LogIT)
Wait for Decreasing Humidity (HumiPro LogIT)
Wait for Decreasing Pressure (Pressure LogIT)
Wait for Decreasing Sound Level (Sound LogIT)
Wait for Decreasing Temp (C)
Wait for Decreasing Temp (F)
Wait for Decreasing Temperature (C) (ProTemp LogIT)
Wait for Decreasing pH (ph LogIT)
Wait for Increase in Acceleration
Wait for Increase in Barometeric Pressure
Wait for Increase in Camera Sensor
Wait for Increase in Lux 
Wait for Increase in Redox 
Wait for Increase in Voltage (Generic)
Wait for Increase in Voltage (Voltmeter LogIT)
Wait for Increasing Humidity (HumiPro LogIT)
Wait for Increasing Pressure (Pressure LogIT)
Wait for Increasing Sound Level (Sound LogIT)
Wait for Increasing Temp (C)
Wait for Increasing Temp (F)
Wait for Increasing Temperature (C) (ProTemp LogIT)
Wait for Increasing pH (pH LogIT)
Wait for LetGo
Wait for Light
Wait for Mail
Wait for N Points
Wait for N hundredths of a sec
Wait for Position Decrease (Position LogIT)
Wait for Position Increase (Position LogIT)
Wait for Push
Wait for RCX to be in View
Wait for Random Time
Wait for Rotation
Wait for Rotation w/o Reset
Wait for Time
Wait for Time (min)
Wait for Timer
Wait for a random amount of time.  The default is <LF>to  wait for a random amount of  time between <LF>0 and 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Max random time (sec):  String in a number <LF>corresponding to the maximum random number <LF>you want to wait for.
Wait for a random amount of time.<LF>The default is to wait for a random amount of time between 0 and 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Max random time (sec):  String in a number corresponding to the maximum random number you want to wait for.
Wait for a specified amount of time in minutes.<LF>The default time is 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (min):  String in a number of <LF>minutes to wait for.
Wait for a specified amount of time in minutes.<LF>The default time is 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (min):  String in a number of minutes to wait for.
Wait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (1/100 sec):  String in a number of <LF>hundredths of seconds to wait for.
Wait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (1/100 sec):  String in a number of hundredths of seconds to wait for.
Wait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (in seconds):  String in a number of <LF>seconds to wait for.
Wait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (in seconds):  String in a number of seconds to wait for.
Wait for darker? or brighter?
Wait for release? or push?
Wait for specified number of points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 1 point to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Number of points: String in the number of points to wait for.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 greater than <LF>the current value.  The default port is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 greater than the current value.   The default port is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 less than <LF>the current value.  The default port is port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 less than the current value.  The default port is port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is brighter <LF>than the current value.  The default is to wait until the <LF>light sensor value on Port 1 has increased by 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Wait for Change:  Wait until the light sensor value has <LF>increased by the number specified.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is brighter than the current value.  The default is to wait until the light sensor value on Port 1 has increased by 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Wait for change:  Wait until the light sensor value has increased by the number specified.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is darker <LF>than the current value.  The default is to wait until the <LF>light sensor value on Port 1 has decreased by 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Wait for Change:  Wait until the light sensor reads a value that <LF>is decreased by the number specified.
Wait for the light sensor to read a value that is darker than the current value.  You can specify how much darker it should wait for.  The default is to wait for a value that is 5 less than the current value with the light sensor on Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  The input port that the light sensor is connected to.<LF><LF> Wait for change:  Wait until the light sensor reads a value that is decreased by the number specified.
Wait for the touch sensor to read a number of clicks<LF>that is greater than the specified number. <LF>The default is to wait until the number of clicks on the <LF>touch sensoron Port 1 is greater than 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Clicks:  String in the number of clicks to  wait for
Wait for the touch sensor to read a number of clicksthat is greater than the specified number. <LF>The default is to wait until the number of clicks on the touch sensoron Port 1 is greater than 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Clicks:  String in the number of clicks to wait for
Wait for this amount of time.
Wait for?
Wait for? 2
Wait greater? or less?
Wait time
Wait time (sec)
Wait until Clock equals (min)
Wait until Timer is: (tenths of seconds)
Wait until Voltage is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Voltage Sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
Wait until all of the Investigator Areas have been loaded.
Wait until mail equals
Wait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the <LF>angle specified (in either direction).  The default is to <LF>wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater <LF>than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Angle:  String in the angle to wait for (in degrees).
Wait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the <LF>number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) <LF>in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle <LF>sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one <LF>rotation).  This program does NOT reset the sensor.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to <LF>wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
Wait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the <LF>number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) <LF>in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle <LF>sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one <LF>rotation).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to <LF>wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
Wait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the angle specified (in either direction).  The default is to wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Angle:  String in the angle to wait for (in degrees).
Wait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one rotation). This program does NOT zero the sensor each time.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
Wait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
Wait until the Barometeric sensor reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a barometeric sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is greater than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container <LF>to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch <LF>the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.<LF>You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level <LF>to wait  for (0 to 255).
Wait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is greater than the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.  You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level to wait  for (0 to 255).
Wait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is less than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container <LF>to wait until it reads a value equal to or less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch <LF>the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.<LF>You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the sensor value <LF>to wait  for (0 to 255).
Wait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is less than the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container to wait until it reads a value equal to or less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.  You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the value to wait  for (0 to 255).
Wait until the Clock is equal to the number specified. The default is to wait for the Clock to be equal to 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Wait until clock equals (min):  String in the amount of time to wait for.
Wait until the Clock is equal to the number specified. The default is to wait for the Clock to be equal to 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Wait until clock equals (min):  String in the amount of time to wait for.<LF>
Wait until the Container is equal to the number <LF>specified. The default is to wait for the Red <LF>Container to be equal to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container <LF>modifier corresponding to which container <LF>you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait until the container equals:  String in the <LF>number to wait for.
Wait until the Container is equal to the number specified. The default is to wait for the Red Container to be equal to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to which container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait until the container equals:  String in the number to wait for.
Wait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is brighter than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 <LF>to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch <LF>the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level <LF>to wait  for (1 to 100).
Wait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is brighter than the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level to wait  for (1 to 100).
Wait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is darker than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 <LF>to wait until it reads a brightness that is less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch <LF>the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level <LF>to wait  for (1 to 100)
Wait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is darker than the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 to wait until it reads a brightness that is less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level to wait  for (1 to 100)
Wait until the Lux sensor reading is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Lux sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>10000 lux.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Lux:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the Lux sensor reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Lux sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>10000 lux.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Lux:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the Redox sensore reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a redox sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 625 mV.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
Wait until the Timer reaches a certain value.<LF>The default is to wait until the Red Timer reaches 1 sec.<LF><LF>Note:  You will need a Zero Timer command at some point before this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until timer is:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) for the Timer wait for.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier to indicate which timer to wait for.
Wait until the Timer reaches a certain value.<LF>The default is to wait until the red timer reaches <LF>1 sec.<LF><LF>Note:  You will need a Zero Timer command <LF>at some point before this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until timer is:  String in a number (in <LF>tenths of seconds) for the Timer wait for.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier to indicate <LF>which timer to wait for.
Wait until the Volatge is greater than the value specified.  The default is a Voltage Sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the Voltage is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Voltage Sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the accelerometer sensor reading is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a accelerometer sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than<LF>25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Acceleration:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the accelerometer sensor reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a accelerometer sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Acceleration:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the barometer sensor reading is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a barometeric sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the container equals
Wait until the generic unpowered sensor voltage is greater than the value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the generic unpowered sensor voltage is less than the value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the humidity is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a humidity <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a relative humidity value greater than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the humidity is greater than the value specified.  The default is a humidity sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a relative humidity value greater than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the humidity is less than the number specified.  The default is a humidity sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a relative humidity value less than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the humidity is less than the number specified.  The default is a humidity sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a relative humidity value less than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pH is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a pH <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a pH value greater than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the <LF>sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pH is greater than the value specified.  The default is a pH sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pH value greater than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pH is less than the number specified.  The default is a pH sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pH value less than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pH is less than the value <LF>specified.  The default is a pH sensor <LF>on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a <LF>pH value less than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
Wait until the position is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a position <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a position value greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the position is greater than the value specified.  The default is a position sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a position value greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the position is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a position<LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a position value less than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the position is less than the number specified.  The default is a position sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a position value less than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pressure is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a pressure <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a pressure value greater than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pressure is greater than the value specified.  The default is a pressure sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pressure value greater than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pressure is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a pressure <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a pressure value less than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the pressure is less than the number specified.  The default is a pressure sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pressure value less than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the redox sensor voltage is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a redox sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 625 mV.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
Wait until the sound level is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a sound level <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a decibel value greater than 60 dB.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the sound level is greater than the number specified.  The default is a sound level  sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a decibel value greater than 60.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the sound level is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a sound level <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a decibel value less than 60.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the sound level is less than the number specified.  The default is a sound level sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a decibel value less than 60.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the temperature is greater than <LF>the number specified.  The default is a <LF>temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting <LF>until it reads a temperature greater than <LF>30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that <LF>is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is atemperature <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a temperature value greater than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperauture (C):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the temperature is greater than the number <LF>specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on <LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature <LF>greater than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the <LF>temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is greater than the number specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature greater than 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is greater than the number specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature greater than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is greater than the value specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature value greater than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature (C):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the temperature is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a temperature <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a temperature less than 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number <LF>that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a temperature <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a value less than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature (C):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
Wait until the temperature is less than the number <LF>specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on <LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature <LF>less than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the <LF>temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is less than the number specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature less than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is less than the number specified.<LF>The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature less than 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
Wait until the temperature is less than the value specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature (C):  String in a number that is the sensor to wait for.
Wait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 <LF>is pushed in.
Wait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 <LF>is released.
Wait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 is pushed in.<LF><LF>
Wait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 is released.
Wait until the touch sensor is pushed in.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already pushed in when <LF>the program executes this command, the RCX will <LF>wait until the touch sensor is released and pushed in again.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Number of Clicks: If you wire in a value here it will wait for that <LF>clicks (or pushes).  If unwired - it waits of a single push.<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.
Wait until the touch sensor is pushed in.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already pushed in when the program executes this command, the RCX will wait until the touch sensor is released and pushed in again.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Number of Clicks: If you wire in a value here it will wait for that clicks (or pushes).  If unwired - it waits of a single push.<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.
Wait until the touch sensor is released.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already released when the <LF>program executes this command, the RCX will wait until <LF>the touch sensor is pushed in and released again.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.
Wait until the touch sensor is released.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already released when the program executes this command, the RCX will wait until the touch sensor is pushed in and released again.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.
Wait until the voltage sensor voltage is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
Wait until the voltage sensor voltage is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
Wait until this number of points has been taken.   The maximum number of points is 1000.
Waits until RCX is in View of tower.
Warning
Watch (0)
Waveform Graph
Web
Web Help
Web Resources
Welcome to Inventor.<LF>Write your program in the window below.<LF>To go back to the main menu, close all Inventor windows.
Well Time
When the mouse is moved over an active window, this VI returns the window number and the mouse coordinates.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window Number gives the number of active windows.<LF><LF>X mouse coordinate gives the X coordinate of the mouse in the active screen.<LF><LF>Y mouse coordinate gives the Y coordinate of the mouse in the active screen. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
Which Vault?
While Accelerometer is Greater Than
While Accelerometer is Less Than
While Barometer is Greater Than
While Barometeric Sensor is Less Than
While Generic Sensor Is Greater Than
While Lux Sensor is Greater Than
While Lux Sensor is Less Than
While Position is Greater Than
While Position is Less Than
While Redox Sensor Is Greater Than
While Redox Sensor Is Less Than
White
White on Black
WhiteIsZero
Whole note
Width
Width & Height
Window Number
Window Number (0...15)
Window Number (0...22)
Window Number (17...22)
Window Number Out
Window can close? (Yes)
Window can grow? (Yes)
Window has title bar? (Yes)
Window is floating? (No)
Window number
Write Area
Write Data Point to Data Set
Write Page
Write error code
Writes an image in a file.<LF><LF>Color Palette: is used to apply an RGB color palette to the file. Color Palette is an array of clusters constructed by the user or supplied by IMAQ GetPalette. This palette is composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of applying a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained. (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white).<LF><LF>Image: is the reference to the image structure to which the data from the image file is applied.<LF><LF>File Type: describes the file type to be written. The default file type is APD. The file types supported are : BMP, TIFF, PICT (Macintosh only), and AIPD (internal file format).<LF><LF>File Path: is the complete path name, including drive, directory, and filename, for the file to be loaded. This path can be supplied either by the user or the VI File Dialog from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out: is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note :	The options regulating the saving of an image file can be used for certain file types. These options exist as a cluster that is not visible from the connection panel but is visible from the front panel of the VI. For example, the cluster TIFF Options allows the user to specify the value of certain tags (for example, RowsPerStrip, PhotometricInterpretation, or ByteOrder). To change the default values for a TIFF file, it is sufficient to modify the parameter in the front panel of IMAQ WriteFile.
X + Y Axis Averages
X - Y Axis Averages
X Axis
X Axis Averages
X Centroid
X Component
X Coordinate
X Duplication Step
X Inc
X Increment
X Max
X Min
X Offset
X Position
X Resolution
X Scale.Range
X Size
X Start
X Step
X Step Size
X Value
X axis
X mouse coordinate
X-axis
XOffset
XY Graph 1
XY Graph 2
XY Graph 3
XY Graph 4
XY Graph 5
XY Graph 6
XY Graph 7
XY Graph 8
XY Plot
Xor/Xnor (Xor)
Y Axis
Y Axis Averages
Y Centroid
Y Component
Y Coordinate
Y Duplication Step
Y Inc
Y Max
Y Min
Y Offset
Y Position
Y Resolution
Y Scale.Range
Y Size
Y Step
Y Step Size
Y Values
Y axis
Y axis<LF>X axis
Y mouse coordinate
Y-axis
YES
YOffset
Yellow
Yellow Bin
Yellow Container
Yellow Data Set
Yellow Event
Yellow Jump
Yellow Land
Yellow Scroll
Yellow Timer
Yellow scroll
You can see that the sun started to rise 350 min after the program started.  The small amount of light measured at night was from the little red light on the light brick.
You found a secret button!<LF><LF>Click here to download a secret song to the RCX.
Your Program [06/07/1999 15-36-45]
Your Program [12/07/1999 13-52-48]
Zero Angle Sensor
Zero Clicks Sensor
Zero Light Sensor
Zero Temperature Sensor (Celsius)
Zero Temperature Sensor (Fahrenheit)
Zero Timer
Zero Timers
Zero Touch Sensor
Zero Touch and Release Sensor
Zero all of the timers.
Zero the angle sensor.
Zoom
Zoom Factor
Zoom Factor X
Zoom Factor Y
Zoom Plot
ZoomFactors X and Y
[user-specified font]
admin button text: HIDE
alpha
appended path
appended path 2
area
array
arrayofLandI
background
beta
bit depth(8)
blue
border
bottom
bounds
brian
buttons
calls 4
cancelled
channel 1
channel identifies the analog input channel you want to measure (can be 1, 2, or 3).  This corresponds to the grey connector on the RCX.
channel identifies the analog input channel you want to measure. If x, y, and z refer to channels, you can specify a list of channels by separating the individual channels by commas–for example, x,y,z. If x refers to the first channel in a consecutive channel range and y refers to the last channel, you can specify the range by separating the first and last channels with a colon–for example, x:y.
channel identifies the pwm output channel you want to control (can be A, B, or C).  This corresponds to the black connector on the RCX.
channel<FONT predef=APPFONT>
channels identifies the analog input channels you want to measure (can be 1, 2,  and/or 3).  This corresponds to the grey connectors on the RCX.  To have more than one simply list them with columns (1,2 would read first channel 1 then channel 2).  Data for each channel is returned as another row of the resulting data matrix.
channels identifies the analog input channels you want to measure. If <LF>x, y, and z refer to channels, you can specify a list of channels by separating the individual channels with commas–for example, x,y,z. If x refers to the first channel in a consecutive channel range and y refers to the last channel, you can specify the range by separating the first and last channels by a colon–for example, x:y.
channels identifies the pwm output channels you want to control (can be A, B, and/or C).  This corresponds to the black connectors on the RCX.  If you specify multiple channels, you will need multiple columns in your waveform matrix.
channels<FONT predef=APPFONT>
channels<FONT predef=APPFONT> (1)
char*
chooses between looking for peaks (positive-going bumps) and valleys (negative-going bumps)
clustering
code
code is the error code associated with an error.<LF>
code is the number identifying an error or warning. If status is TRUE, code is a non-zero error code. If status is FALSE, code can be zero or a warning code. Use the error handler VIs to look up the meaning of this code and to display the corresponding error message.
color table
colors
computer
contains an error code for any invalid operations. 
contains the amplitudes of peaks/valleys found in the current block of data. 
contains the locations of peaks/valleys found in the current block of data. Locations are reported in indices from the start of processing.
contains the number of peaks/valleys found in the current block of data.
contains the second derivatives of the peaks/valleys found in the current block of data. 
contrast
current path
data string
dedication
degrees
delete
delete?
depth
desired font(Application)
device <FONT predef=APPFONT>(Com1)
don't change
done?
elements
empty picture is the output.<LF>
end of data (T)
entropy
error
error code is -1 if baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, or port number are out of range, or if the serial port could not be initialized. Check the values of baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, and port number. If these values are valid, verify that the serial port has been initialized.<LF>Refer to Appendix C, Error Codes, for a list of error codes.<LF>You can connect error code to one of the error handler VIs. These VIs can furnish you with a description of the error, and give you options on how to proceed when an error occurs. For more information on using the error handler VIs, refer to Chapter 18, Error Handler VIs, of your LabVIEW user manual.<LF>Some error codes returned by the serial port VIs are platform-specific. Please refer to your system documentation for a list of error codes.<LF><LF>
error code. If error code is non-zero, an error occurred. Refer to Appendix C, Error Codes, for a list of error codes.<LF>You can connect error code to one of the error handler VIs. These VIs furnish you with a description of the error, and give you options on how to proceed when an error occurs. For more information on using the error handler VIs, refer to Chapter 18, Error Handler VIs, of your LabVIEW user manual.<LF>Some error codes returned by the serial port VIs are platform-specific. Please refer to your system documentation for a list of error codes.<LF>
error in
error in (no error)
error in describes an error that you want to check. If unwired, this VI checks error code for errors.<LF>
error in describes an error that you want to check. If you leave error in unwired, this VI checks error code for errors.<LF>
error in is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. If error in indicates that an error occurred before this VI was called, this VI may choose not to execute its function, but just pass the error through to its error out cluster. If no error has occurred, then this VI executes normally and sets its own error status in error out. Use the error handler VIs to look up the error code and to display the corresponding error message. Using error in and error out clusters is a convenient way to check errors and to specify execution order by wiring the error output from one subVI to the error input of the next.
error in<FONT predef=APPFONT> (no error)
error out
error out contains the same information as status out, code out, and source out. It has the same structure as error in.<LF>
error out is a cluster containing the same information as in status out, code out, and source out. It has the same structure as error in.<LF>
error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. If an error occurred before this VI was called, error out is the same as error in. Otherwise, error out shows the error, if any, that occurred in this VI. Use the error handler VIs to look up the error code and to display the corresponding error message. Using error in and error out clusters is a convenient way to check errors and to specify execution order by wiring the error output from one subVI to the error input of the next.
falling
file names
filter width
final path
firmware
flattened pixmap data
flipped?
font name selects the font to use for the string.<LF>
font size selects the size of the font in points.<LF>
force DL
grow?
help
help screen
high
histogram
http://www.ceeo.tufts.edu/
http://www.ifactory.com/
http://www.lego.com/dacta/
http://www.lego.com/dacta/robolab/robolabsupport
http://www.natinst.com/robolab/
image
indicates that the first block of data is to be processed. The VI requires some internal setup that must be done at the start for proper operation.
indicates that the last block of data is to be processed. The VI cleans up internal data after the last block has been processed.
initialize (T)
input data
inter-class variance
invalid
invalide
item tag
itteration
keep
last path
left
light
light & temp program
light &temp data
light vs temp
line 2
lines
localdomain
log
log?
logging info
low
mask
metric
min
moments
motion
motor speed
name
name 2
name me
name of program:
net error
new features
new file path is the path of the file to which the VI wrote data. You can use this output to determine the path of a file that you open using dialog. new file path returns Not A Path if the user selects Cancel from the dialog box.<LF>
new path
new picture
no cmd
no error
no mimic
no refresh inventor
no refresh pilot
nothing
number
number of samples/ch
number of samples/ch is the number of samples per channel the VI acquires before the acquisition is complete. <LF>
numberofpages
of
on
onoff (0 - 1)
output string
pH Container (pH LogIT)
pH LogIT
pH Sensor Fork (pH LogIT)
pH meter
page
path
path to vault
peaks/valleys
picture
plane
play where
plays 5
plot 0
plot style
points
port
print now?
pts/sweep
purple
queue element
rcx there?
record
rect
red
reset
rest
return value
reverse
right
rising
rotations
samples
samples/ch
save in theme:
scan rate is the number of scans per second the RCX acquires. The default rate is 10 scans/s.   The RCX cannot do better than about 100 samples per sec.<LF>
scan rate is the number of scans per second the RCX sends out to the motors. The default rate is 10 scans/s.   The RCX cannot do better than about 100 samples per sec.<LF>
scan rate is the number of scans per second the VI acquires. The default rate is 1,000 scans/s. <LF>
scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT>
scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT> (10 scans/sec)
scott
sec/sweep
size(s)
skip?
somewhere.outthere.com
sound_enable
sound_onoff
soundset_number
source
source is a string that indicates the origin of the error, if any. Usually source is the name of the VI in which the error occurred.
source. In case of an error, most VIs that use the error in and error out clusters set source to the name of the VI or function that produced the error.<LF>
speed A
speed C
spreadsheet string
stats
status
status is TRUE if an error occurred before this VI was called, or FALSE if not. If status is TRUE, code is a non-zero error code. If status is FALSE, code can be zero or a warning code.
status is TRUE if an error occurred, or FALSE if not. If status is TRUE, code is a non-zero error code. If status is FALSE, code can be zero or a warning code.
status is TRUE if an error occurred. If this value is FALSE, the VI assumes that no error occurred according to the error in, and then checks error code.<LF>
status is TRUE if an error occurred. If this value is FALSE, then the error handler assumes that no error occurred according to the error in, and then checks the error code.<LF>
stop
stripped path
substring
substring 2
sure?
task
task 0
test
threshold
time
top
top left point(0, 0)
touch
touch sensor image
translator
try again?
try again? 2
type of LEGO sensor
type string
untitled
value
values measured
variable
vi path
vi reference
void*
volts
waveform
waveform (1D)
waveforms
webpage
whatthe
width
width specifies the number of consecutive data points to use in the quadratic least squares fit. The value should be no more than about 1/2 of the half-width of the peak/valley and can be much smaller (but >>2) for noise-free data. Large widths can reduce the apparent amplitude of peaks and shift the apparent location. For noisy data, this modification is unimportant since the noise obsures the actual peak.
write
x is the horizontal coordinate that increases to the right.<LF>
x1Left
x2Right
xRes
y is the vertical coordinate that increases to the bottom.<LF>
y1Top
y2Bottom
yRes
yellow